ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE 6.1.

0 | February 2017 | 3725-63706-011B

Polycom® RealPresence® Group

Series Administrator Guide
Copyright© 2017, Polycom, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced,
translated into another language or format, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Polycom, Inc.
6001 America Center Drive
San Jose, CA 95002
USA
Trademarks Polycom®, the Polycom logo and the names and marks associated with Polycom products
are trademarks and/or service marks of Polycom, Inc. and are registered and/or common law marks in the
United States and various other countries.

All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. No portion hereof may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, for any purpose other than the recipient's personal use, without
the express written permission of Polycom.
End User License Agreement BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU ARE AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF
THE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) AT: http://documents.polycom.com/indexes/licenses.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE EULA, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT, AND YOU
MAY RETURN IT IN THE ORIGINAL PACKAGING TO THE SELLER FROM WHOM YOU PURCHASED
THE PRODUCT.
Patent Information The accompanying product may be protected by one or more U.S. and foreign
patents and/or pending patent applications held by Polycom, Inc.
Open Source Software Used in this Product This product may contain open source software. You may
receive the open source software from Polycom up to three (3) years after the distribution date of the
applicable product or software at a charge not greater than the cost to Polycom of shipping or distributing
the software to you. To receive software information, as well as the open source software code used in
this product, contact Polycom by email at mailto:[email protected] (for video products) or
mailto:[email protected] (for voice products).
Disclaimer While Polycom uses reasonable efforts to include accurate and up-to-date information in this
document, Polycom makes no warranties or representations as to its accuracy. Polycom assumes no
liability or responsibility for any typographical or other errors or omissions in the content of this document.
Limitation of Liability Polycom and/or its respective suppliers make no representations about the
suitability of the information contained in this document for any purpose. Information is provided "as is"
without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The entire risk arising out of its use
remains with the recipient. In no event shall Polycom and/or its respective suppliers be liable for any
direct, consequential, incidental, special, punitive or other damages whatsoever (including without
limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, or loss of business information),
even if Polycom has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Customer Feedback We are striving to improve our documentation quality and we appreciate your
feedback. Email your opinions and comments to mailto:[email protected].
Polycom Support Visit the Polycom Support Center for End User License Agreements, software
downloads, product documents, product licenses, troubleshooting tips, service requests, and more.
Contents
Before You Begin............................................................................................. 13
Get Help............................................................................................................................ 13
Polycom and Partner Resources............................................................................13
The Polycom Community....................................................................................... 14

Getting Started................................................................................................. 15
High Definition Video Conferencing.................................................................................. 15
User Interface Customization............................................................................................16
Security Setting Management........................................................................................... 16
Call Setting Configuration................................................................................................. 17
Powering On and Off.........................................................................................................17
Power On the System............................................................................................ 17
Power Off the System............................................................................................ 17
Powering On the RealPresence Group 700 System.............................................. 18
Navigating the System...................................................................................................... 18
Log On....................................................................................................................18
Changing a Password............................................................................................ 19
Search the Web Interface.......................................................................................19

Setting Up System Hardware.......................................................................... 20

Mount and Position the System........................................................................................ 20
Position the Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System.............................................21
Positioning the Polycom EagleEye Director......................................................................22
Setting Up Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Camera..............................................................23
Setting Up a Microphone...................................................................................................23
Available Microphone Inputs by System................................................................ 24
Set Up Third-party Microphones............................................................................ 24
SoundStructure Digital Mixer..................................................................................25
Setting Up the Polycom StereoSurround Kit..................................................................... 25
Adding a Touch Monitor.................................................................................................... 26
Touch Monitor Support...........................................................................................27
Adding a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone.......................................... 28

Running the Setup Wizard...............................................................................29

Run the Setup Wizard Locally...........................................................................................29
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location................................................................29

Polycom, Inc. 1
Contents

Configuring General System Settings............................................................31

Name the System..............................................................................................................31
Enter Contact Information................................................................................................. 31
Set the Location................................................................................................................ 32
Set the Language..............................................................................................................33
Set the Date and Time...................................................................................................... 33

Using a Provisioning Service..........................................................................35

Enable a Provisioning Service.......................................................................................... 36
Configure a Provisioning Service...................................................................................... 36
Disable a Provisioning Service..........................................................................................37
ZTP Web Service Solution................................................................................................ 37
Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned System........................................ 38
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation............................................................................ 38
Polycom RealPresence Cloud Service...................................................................39

Activating System Options..............................................................................40

System Software Options..................................................................................................40
View System Software Options.............................................................................. 41
Obtain Software or System Option Keys................................................................41
Create a Single Key File to Update Multiple Systems............................................42
Key File Formats.................................................................................................... 42
Activate System Options........................................................................................ 42
Enter a Multipoint Option Key.................................................................................43

Microsoft Interoperability................................................................................ 44
Skype for Business Content Sharing................................................................................ 44
Register a System with Skype for Business......................................................................45
Configure the Skype for Business Directory Server............................................... 48
Upload Logs to the Skype for Business Server......................................................49
Configure the Directory Services Contact List.................................................................. 50
Skype for Business-Hosted Video Conferencing.............................................................. 50

Calendaring Service.........................................................................................51
Enable the Calendaring Service........................................................................................51
Join Scheduled Meetings.................................................................................................. 53

Configuring Network Settings.........................................................................54

Polycom, Inc. 2
Contents

Connecting to a LAN......................................................................................................... 54
LAN Status Lights...................................................................................................54
Configure LAN Properties...................................................................................... 55
Configure IP Address (IPv4) Settings.....................................................................58
Configure IP Address (IPv6) Settings.....................................................................59
Configure DNS Server Settings..............................................................................60
LLDP and LLDP-MED Support......................................................................................... 60
LLMP-MED Information Discovery......................................................................... 61
Behavior When LLDP is Enabled........................................................................... 61
Enable LLDP Using a USB Storage Device........................................................... 61
Enable LLDP in the Web Interface......................................................................... 62
IP Network Settings...........................................................................................................62
Configure H.323 Settings....................................................................................... 62
Configure the System to Use a Gatekeeper...........................................................63
SIP Settings............................................................................................................64
RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support........................................................ 68
AS-SIP Settings................................................................................................................ 68
Enable the AS-SIP Setting..................................................................................... 68
Configure AS-SIP Settings for MLPP..................................................................... 68
Add an AS-SIP Service Code.................................................................................69
Delete an AS-SIP Service Code.............................................................................69
Defining AS-SIP Outbound Precedence Call Defaults........................................... 69
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)............................................................... 69
Define MLPP Network Domains.............................................................................70
Add an MLPP Network Domain..............................................................................71
Alternative Network Address Type (ANAT)............................................................ 71
Configure Network Quality Settings.................................................................................. 71
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings.......................................74

Securing the System........................................................................................75

Configure Security Profiles................................................................................................75
Maximum Security Profile Requires Default Value Changes................................. 76
Managing System Access.................................................................................................76
Enable External Authentication.............................................................................. 77
Configure Local Access..........................................................................................78
Configure Remote Access......................................................................................80
Local Accounts....................................................................................................... 82
Detecting Intrusions.......................................................................................................... 86
View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List.......................................................87
Secure API Access........................................................................................................... 87
Enable Secure API Access.................................................................................... 88

Polycom, Inc. 3
Contents

Disable Secure API Access....................................................................................88

Access the API with SSH....................................................................................... 88
Port Lockout...................................................................................................................... 89
Configure the Port Lockout Setting........................................................................ 90
Whitelist.............................................................................................................................90
Enable a Whitelist...................................................................................................91
Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist............................................................................. 91
IPv4 Address Formats............................................................................................91
IPv6 Address Formats............................................................................................92
Encryption......................................................................................................................... 92
Configure Encryption..............................................................................................93
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls...................................................... 94
Set the Transport Protocol for SVC Calls...............................................................94
Set Up AES Encryption for SVC Calls....................................................................94
Verify H.323 Media Encryption...............................................................................94
System Configuration with a Firewall or NAT....................................................................95
Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal Connectivity............................................................ 96
Configure the H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal..........................................................96
Security Certificates.......................................................................................................... 99
How Certificates are Used......................................................................................99
Certificate Signing Requests.................................................................................. 99
Configure Certificate Validation Settings..............................................................103
Install Certificates................................................................................................. 104
Certificate Revocation Settings............................................................................ 105
Remove a Certificate and CRL.............................................................................106
Set Up a Security Banner................................................................................................106
Set a Meeting Password................................................................................................. 107
Visual Security Classification.......................................................................................... 107
Enable Visual Security Classification................................................................... 108
Enable Room and Call Monitoring.................................................................................. 108
Monitor a Room or Call........................................................................................ 109
Send a Message to a System.............................................................................. 109
Configure the OCSP Revocation Method.............................................................109

Configuring Call Settings.............................................................................. 111

Configure Call Settings................................................................................................... 111
Setting Call Preferences for SVC....................................................................................113
Configure SVC Dialing Options............................................................................ 114
Enable SVC Preference (H.264) for Calls............................................................ 115
Enable Automatic Answering of SVC Point-to-Point Calls................................... 115
Set Preferred Call Speeds.............................................................................................. 116

Polycom, Inc. 4
Contents

Configure the Recent Calls List.......................................................................................116

Set Call Answering Mode................................................................................................117
Set the Maximum Call Length......................................................................................... 117
Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode........................................................................................118
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts............................................................................. 118
Turn Off Flashing Alerts....................................................................................... 119
Setting Up Audio-Only Calls............................................................................................119
Enable Audio-Only Calls...................................................................................... 119
Disable Audio-Only Calls......................................................................................119
Select the Call Type Order for Audio-Only Calls.................................................. 119
Place an Audio-Only Call from the System Web Interface...................................120

Setting Up a Directory....................................................................................121
Enable H.323.................................................................................................................. 121
Configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server................................................................ 122
Configure the LDAP Directory Server............................................................................. 123
Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups......................................................................124
Types of Favorites Contacts.................................................................................124
Create a Favorites Contact.................................................................................. 125
Create a Favorites Group.....................................................................................125
Edit a Favorites Group......................................................................................... 125
Delete a Favorites Group..................................................................................... 126
Importing and Exporting Favorites....................................................................... 126
Setting Up Speed Dial.....................................................................................................127
Enable Speed Dial................................................................................................127
Add Speed Dial Contacts..................................................................................... 127
Image File Requirements for Speed Dial Contacts.............................................. 127
Upload an Image File for Speed Dial Contacts.................................................... 128
Remove Speed Dial Contacts.............................................................................. 128
Kiosk Mode...........................................................................................................128
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers................................................................ 129
Configuring a Directory Server............................................................................. 129

Configuring Audio Settings...........................................................................131

Configure General Audio Settings...................................................................................131
Configure Audio Input Settings....................................................................................... 133
3.5mm Audio Input............................................................................................... 137
Audio Output Settings..................................................................................................... 137
Configure Audio Output Settings..........................................................................137
Set the Speaker Volume...................................................................................... 138
Stereo Settings................................................................................................................139

Polycom, Inc. 5
Contents

Test StereoSurround.......................................................................................................139
Acoustic Fence Technology............................................................................................ 140
Configure the Acoustic Fence.............................................................................. 140
USB Headset Support.....................................................................................................141

Configuring Video Settings........................................................................... 142

Monitor Resolution Rates for RealPresence Group Series Systems.............................. 142
Full-Motion HD................................................................................................................ 143
Maximize HDTV Video Display....................................................................................... 144
Monitor Profiles............................................................................................................... 144
Configure Monitor Profile Settings........................................................................144
Prevent Monitor Burn-In.................................................................................................. 148
Adjust Brightness for Room Lighting...............................................................................148
CEC Monitor Controls..................................................................................................... 148
Enable CEC Controls........................................................................................... 149
Disable CEC Controls.......................................................................................... 149
Configure Video Input Settings....................................................................................... 149
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings............................................................................153
Configuring Monitor Settings...........................................................................................155
Configure Monitor Settings...................................................................................155
Third-Party Touch Panel Controls...................................................................................156
Configure Secondary Monitors for Content.....................................................................157

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System..................................... 158

Configure Camera Settings.............................................................................................159
Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye IV Camera................................................................... 160
EagleEye IV Camera Orientation......................................................................... 161
EagleEye Acoustic Camera Indicator Lights................................................................... 161
Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye Producer System.........................................................162
Calibration............................................................................................................ 162
Camera Tracking..................................................................................................163
Update EagleEye Producer Software...................................................................165
Update the EagleEye Producer System Image....................................................165
EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights..................................................................... 166
Download System Logs and Configurations........................................................ 167
Participant Count CDR Details............................................................................. 167
Perform a Factory Restore................................................................................... 168
Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System...............................................................169
Position the Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System................................ 169
Change the EagleEye Camera.............................................................................171
Configure Camera and Video Settings.................................................................172

Polycom, Inc. 6
Contents

Change Camera Tracking Settings...................................................................... 173

EagleEye Director II Camera System Group Framing......................................... 175
Participant Count CDR Details............................................................................. 175
Update Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System Software........................ 175
Indicator Lights..................................................................................................... 176
View System Status for EagleEye Director II Camera System............................ 177
EagleEye Director II Camera System Diagnostics............................................... 178
Download System Logs and Configurations........................................................ 180
Perform a Factory Restore................................................................................... 180
Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Director.......................................................................... 181
EagleEye Director Indicator Light.........................................................................181
Camera Presets.............................................................................................................. 185
Configure FECC on the Far-end Site Camera..................................................... 186

Configuring Remote Control Behavior.........................................................187

Configure Remote Control Behavior............................................................................... 187
Programming the Remote Control.................................................................................. 188
Set the Remote Control Channel ID.....................................................................189
Set the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System.................................. 189
Confirm the Channel ID........................................................................................189
Recharge the Remote Control Battery................................................................. 190
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems...................... 191

Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers...................................................... 192

Polycom Concierge Solution........................................................................................... 192
Add the System Pairing Code to the System Home Screen................................ 192
Check the Polycom Concierge Service Status.....................................................193
Enabling RealPresence Mobile....................................................................................... 193
SmartPairing Prerequisites...................................................................................193
Configure SmartPairing........................................................................................ 193

Enabling Content Sharing............................................................................. 195

Configure Content Sharing..............................................................................................195
Adjust Audio Level for Content........................................................................................196
Connecting a Computer.................................................................................................. 196
Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor................................................................... 196
Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor................................................................... 196
Setting Up a Polycom Content Display Application.........................................................197
Download and Install Polycom People+Content IP.............................................. 197
Configure Closed Captioning.......................................................................................... 197

Polycom, Inc. 7
Contents

Enter Closed Captions on the Web Interface....................................................... 198

Enter Closed Captions Using Equipment Connected to a Serial RS-232 Port.....199
Dial-Up Connection to the System's RS-232 Serial Port......................................199
Enable VisualBoard Content Sharing..............................................................................201
Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application................................................................. 201
Configure the Polycom UC Board................................................................................... 201
Sharing Content During Calls..........................................................................................202
Configuring DVD Player Settings.................................................................................... 202
Adjust DVD Audio Settings for Content................................................................202

Configuring Call Recording...........................................................................204

Polycom RealPresence Media Suite Recording............................................................. 204
Enable Recording Controls.................................................................................. 204
Recording Calls Remotely....................................................................................204
Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a RealPresence Group 700 System........ 206

Customizing the Local Interface................................................................... 207

Change the Background Image on the Home Screen.................................................... 207
Change the Startup Image on the Home Screen............................................................ 208
Set Up the Address Bar.................................................................................................. 208

Calling............................................................................................................. 210
Call a Favorite Contact....................................................................................................210
Call a Speed Dial Contact............................................................................................... 210
Call a Recent Call Contact.............................................................................................. 211
Place a Call..................................................................................................................... 211
Searching Directory Contacts to Call.............................................................................. 211
Browse Global Contact Entries to Call............................................................................ 211
Place a Cascaded Call....................................................................................................212
Place an Audio-Only Call................................................................................................ 213

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device................................... 214

Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device.................................................................. 214
Run the RealPresence Touch Device Setup Wizard...................................................... 214
Power Off the RealPresence Touch................................................................................215
Wake the RealPresence Touch...................................................................................... 215
Enable the RealPresence Touch Device........................................................................ 215
Pairing the Device........................................................................................................... 216
Pairing States....................................................................................................... 216
Pair For the First Time..........................................................................................216

Polycom, Inc. 8
Contents

Pair to a Previously Paired System...................................................................... 217

Unpair a RealPresence Touch............................................................................. 217
Remove a System from the Paired System List...................................................217
Managing the RealPresence Touch Device....................................................................218
Open a Remote Management Window................................................................ 218
Pair Using RealPresence Touch Web Interface...................................................218
Unpair Using the RealPresence Touch Web Interface.........................................218
Change the RealPresence Touch User Name and Password............................. 219
Enable Recent Calls and Speed Dial................................................................... 219
Customize the RealPresence Touch Screens................................................................ 219
Choose the Home Screen Icons.......................................................................... 219
Choose the Place a Call Screen Icons.................................................................220
Change the Background Image............................................................................221
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch.................. 221
Set Up Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch........................................221
Enable Microsoft Skype Mode for RealPresence Touch.................................................223
Updating Software...........................................................................................................223
Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates............................................ 223
Managing Polycom Touch Device Software on Your Server............................... 224
Update Software from the Web Interface............................................................. 225
Update Software from the Local Interface............................................................225
Update RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device...................226
Update the Software and the Factory Restore Partition From a USB Storage
Device............................................................................................................. 226
Restart the RealPresence Touch Device........................................................................ 227
Restart a System from a RealPresence Touch Device...................................................227
Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device.....................................................227
View System Details and Connection Status....................................................... 227
View Call Statistics............................................................................................... 228
Download RealPresence Touch Logs.................................................................. 228
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device............................228
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch..................................... 229
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device....................................229
Test the Software Download URL........................................................................ 230

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device.............................................. 231

Positioning the Polycom Touch Control.......................................................................... 231
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control.................................................................................231
Enable the Polycom Touch Control.................................................................................232
Configuring the Software.................................................................................................232
Configure LAN Settings........................................................................................233

Polycom, Inc. 9
Contents

Configure Location and Time Settings................................................................. 234

Configure Admin ID and Password...................................................................... 235
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control....................................................................... 236
Power Off the Polycom Touch Control............................................................................236
Wake the Polycom Touch Control...................................................................................236
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control................................................................ 236
Pairing the Polycom Touch Control Device.....................................................................237
Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device...............................................................237
Pair to a System After Setup................................................................................ 237
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control Device.......................................................... 238
Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely............................................................238
Open the Remote Management Window............................................................. 238
Transfer Polycom Touch Control Logs to a USB Storage Device........................239
Updating the Software.....................................................................................................239
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site for the Polycom Touch Control. 239
Update Software Manually from the Web Interface..............................................240
Update Software Automatically in the Web Interface........................................... 241
Update Software Automatically in the Local Interface..........................................242
Update Software Manually in the Local Interface.................................................242
Update Software from a USB Storage Device..................................................... 243
Set a Software Version as Current for the Polycom Touch Control..................... 243
Remove a Polycom Touch Control Software Version.......................................... 244
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device................................................. 244
Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light................................................................ 244
View System Details.............................................................................................244
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the Polycom
Touch Control..................................................................................................245
Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control..................................245

System Maintenance......................................................................................247
Managing System Profiles.............................................................................................. 247
Store a Setting Profile.......................................................................................... 247
Upload a Profile....................................................................................................247
Perform a Factory Restore of a System............................................................... 248
Delete Data and System Files..............................................................................250
Restoring and Resetting a System..................................................................................250
System Log Files.............................................................................................................250
View Log File Status.............................................................................................250
Configure System Log Management....................................................................251
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging..............................................252
Retrieving Log Files........................................................................................................ 254

Polycom, Inc. 10
Contents

Download System Log Files.................................................................................254

Transfer System Log Files................................................................................... 254
SNMP Condition Reports..................................................................................... 254
Upgrading System Software........................................................................................... 257
Preparing to Upgrade........................................................................................... 258
System Software Updates....................................................................................258
Installing an Older Software Version...............................................................................259
Determine the Software Version.......................................................................... 259
Delete System Settings........................................................................................ 260
Downgrading Tips................................................................................................ 260

Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 261
General Troubleshooting.................................................................................................261
View Remote Sessions on the System........................................................................... 262
Placing a Test Call.......................................................................................................... 262
RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights..................................................... 263
RealPresence Group 700 Indicator Lights........................................................... 264
EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights..................................................................... 265
Audio and Video Tests.................................................................................................... 265
Audio Meters........................................................................................................ 267
Set Audio Meter Levels........................................................................................ 267
System Diagnostics.........................................................................................................267
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Web Interface.................................................267
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface............................................... 268
Viewing System Details on the Local Interface............................................................... 270
Access the Information Screen............................................................................ 271
Access the Status Screen.................................................................................... 271
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote Control....273
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote Control...........273
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom Touch
Control.............................................................................................................274
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom Touch Control. 274
Provisioning Service Registration Failure....................................................................... 274
Call Detail Report (CDR).................................................................................................274
Download a Call Detail Report (CDR).................................................................. 278
Knowledge Base............................................................................................................. 278
Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support............................................................ 278
Locate the System Serial Number........................................................................278
Locate the Software Version................................................................................ 278
Locate Active Alert Messages.............................................................................. 278
Locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension Settings..........................................279

Polycom, Inc. 11
Contents

Locate the LAN Status......................................................................................... 279

Locate Diagnostics............................................................................................... 279
Contacting Technical Support......................................................................................... 279
Polycom Solution Support.................................................................................... 280

System Panel Views.......................................................................................281

Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System....................................................................281
Polycom RealPresence Group 310 System....................................................................282
Polycom RealPresence 500 System...............................................................................285
Polycom RealPresence Group 700 System....................................................................287

Port Usage...................................................................................................... 291

Connections to Systems................................................................................................. 291
Connections from Systems............................................................................................. 295

Security Profile Default Settings...................................................................302

Maximum Security Profile Default Settings..................................................................... 302
Changing Maximum Security Profile Default Values............................................314
Other Restrictions When Using the Maximum Security Profile............................ 315
High Security Profile Default Settings............................................................................. 315
Changing High Security Profile Default Values.................................................... 326
Medium Security Profile Default Settings........................................................................326
Changing Medium Security Profile Default Values...............................................336
Low Security Profile Default Settings.............................................................................. 337

Call Speeds and Resolutions........................................................................ 348

Point-to-Point Call Speeds.............................................................................................. 348
Multipoint Call Speeds.................................................................................................... 348
High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions...................................................................... 349
Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video............................................................. 351
Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video............................................................. 351

Polycom, Inc. 12
Before You Begin
Topics:

• Get Help

The Polycom RealPresence Group Series Administrator Guide is for administrators who need to install
system software, options, and accessories, and to configure, customize, manage, and troubleshoot
Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series systems.
This guide covers the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, RealPresence Group 500,
and RealPresence Group 700 systems.
This guide provides concepts and general guidance to the system administrator. Polycom expects the
administrator to be a mid-grade IT professional who is experienced in system administration.
Please read the Polycom system documentation before you install or operate the system. The following
related documents for systems are available at Polycom Support:
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Setup Sheet : Describes the contents of your package, how
to assemble the system and accessories, and how to connect the system to the network. The setup
document is included in the system package.
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Quick Tips : Quick reference on how to use basic features
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide : Describes how to perform video conferencing
tasks in the system local interface
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide: Provides cable information and
API command descriptions
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Regulatory Notices : Describes safety and legal
considerations for using Polycom RealPresence Group Series systems
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes
Polycom recommends that you record the serial number and option key of your system here for future
reference. The serial number for the system is printed on the unit.
System Serial Number: ____________________________________________
Option Key: ____________________________________________________

Get Help
For more information about installing, configuring, and administering Polycom products, refer to
Documents and Downloads at Polycom Support.
For support or service, please contact your Polycom distributor or go to Polycom Support at Polycom
Support.

Polycom and Partner Resources

To find all Polycom partner solutions, see Strategic Global Partner Solutions.

Polycom, Inc. 13
Before You Begin

The Polycom Community

The Polycom Community gives you access to the latest developer and support information. Participate in
discussion forums to share ideas and solve problems with your colleagues. To register with the Polycom
Community, simply create a Polycom online account. When logged in, you can access Polycom support
personnel and participate in developer and support forums to find the latest information on hardware,
software, and partner solutions topics.

Polycom, Inc. 14
Getting Started
Topics:

• High Definition Video Conferencing

• User Interface Customization
• Security Setting Management
• Call Setting Configuration
• Powering On and Off
• Navigating the System

High Definition Video Conferencing

RealPresence Group Series systems offer the following high-definition (HD) capabilities:
• Send people or content video to the far site in HD
• Receive and display video from the far site in HD
• Display near-site video in HD
• Full-motion HD
Systems with HD capability can send video in wide-screen, HD format. To send video in HD format, use
any model of Polycom camera that supports HD video and a Polycom system capable of sending 720p or
better video.

When the far site sends HD video, RealPresence Group Series systems with HD capability and an HD
monitor can display the video in wide-screen, HD format. The HD 720 format supported by these systems
is 1280 x 720, progressive scan format (720p). RealPresence Group Series systems with 1080 capability
can receive 1080p progressive format and can display 1080p progressive or 1080i interlaced format.
Near-site video is displayed in HD format when you use an HD video source and an HD monitor.
However, near-site video is displayed in SD if the system is in an SD or lower-resolution call.
To use HD for a multipoint call, keep the following requirements in mind:
• The call must be hosted by a system or a conferencing platform that supports HD such as Polycom
RealPresence Collaboration Server 1500 or 2000.
• The system host must have the appropriate option keys installed.
• All systems in the call must support HD (720p at 30 fps) and H.264.
• The call rate must be high enough to support HD resolution.
• The call cannot be cascaded.

Polycom, Inc. 15
Getting Started

User Interface Customization

You can use the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to configure how information is
displayed for end users on the Home screen of the system local interface.
Home Screen Icons appear in the lower center of the system local interface, three at a time. By default,
users see the icons shown in the following table in this location.

Icon Name

Camera
This icon takes you to the Camera Control screen.

Place a Call
This icon takes you to the Place a Call screen, where
you can manually dial a call, or can select a contact
name from a list.

Content
This icon appears only when a content source is
detected.

Security Setting Management

To configure your RealPresence Group Series system security settings using the system web interface,
use a supported browser with cookies enabled. For a list of supported browsers and version numbers,
refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes .
To access the system web interface, open a web browser and enter the IP address of the system using
the https protocol; for example, use the format https://10.11.12.13.

Caution: The HTTPS protocol ensures that the configuration of all login information (such as
user names and passwords) is transmitted using an encrypted channel, including
those user names and passwords used to communicate with third-party systems
on your network. Using HTTPS severely limits the ability of anyone on the network
to discover these credentials. For this reason, all attempts to use the system web
interface via HTTP are redirected to the HTTPS interface.

Polycom, Inc. 16
Getting Started

You can find security settings and passwords in the system web interface at Admin Settings > Security.
Settings are under different sections of the security interfaces. In accordance with local laws and
regulations, not all security settings are available in all countries.
Related Links
Log On on page 18

Call Setting Configuration

The RealPresence Group Series system call settings screen allows you to determine which settings are
available to users when they place and answer calls in the system local interface.

Powering On and Off

After you have connected all of the equipment that you will use with the RealPresence Group Series
system, connect the power cable and power on the system. Note that Polycom RealPresence Group 300,
310, 500, and 700 systems do not have what you might think of as a power button—they have a power
proximity sensor. Instead of pressing an actual button that moves, you touch the sensor (or near the
sensor) that indicates power on the front of the system.

Note: Make sure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it or before you
unplug the power cable. Do not unplug the power cable when the system is powered on.

Power On the System

You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and
500 systems.
• If the system is asleep, press any button on the remote control or pick up the remote control to
wake the system up.
• Press on the remote control.
• Touch the power sensor on the front of the system.
The Polycom screen is displayed within about 10 seconds.
Related Links
Configure Remote Control Behavior on page 187
Power Off the System on page 17

Power Off the System

You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and
500 systems.
• Press and hold on the remote control.
• Touch and hold the power sensor on the front of the system. The indicator light changes color and
blinks, indicating that the system is shutting down. Release the power sensor when the indicator
light changes color.
Related Links

Polycom, Inc. 17
Getting Started

Configure Remote Control Behavior on page 187

Power On the System on page 17

Powering On the RealPresence Group 700 System

You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power off the RealPresence Group 700 system.
The RealPresence Group 700 system can be powered on and off with the remote using the same buttons
as shown for the other RealPresence Group Series systems; however, the RealPresence Group 700
system supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the camera when the system is
powered off. So, if the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI
connector attached to the system, it will not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the system
using the handheld remote when in the Power Off state.
• Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the optional EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain in a Power On state, so that
the camera is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
• Position the RealPresence Group Series system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system
has a line-of- sight to the remote control.
• Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the system.

Navigating the System

You can navigate the RealPresence Group Series system using the system web interface.

Log On
You can use the system web interface to perform most of the calling and configuration tasks you can
perform on the local system. To log on to your system's web interface, you must open a web browser and
enter the system's IP address.
Login credentials are user IDs and passwords that identify the user and define the user's ability to access
the system. You can configure both local and remote access for users.
The system web interface supports the most commonly used web browsers. For a list of supported
browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes at Polycom Support.
To configure your browser to use the system web interface, you must do the following:
• Use a supported web browser.
• Configure your browser to allow cookies.

Procedure
1. In your web browser address line, enter the system's IP address, for example, "http://10.11.12.13".
2. Enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin).
3. Enter the Admin Remote Access Password, if one is set.
Related Links
Security Setting Management on page 16
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location on page 29

Polycom, Inc. 18
Getting Started

Changing a Password
Polycom recommends that you change the default Admin ID and the default password for your
RealPresence Group Series system. Keep the following naming conventions in mind:
• The string “root” cannot be used as an ID.
• ID and password strings are not case sensitive.

Note: Make sure you can recall the admin password if you set one. If you forget the
password, you must use the restore button to run the setup wizard again to access
the Admin Settings in the system web interface and reset the password.

Search the Web Interface

In a text box just under the IP Address bar on the RealPresence Group Series system web interface
Place a Call screen, you can enter a search term to receive a list of system web screens. For instance, if
you type Call, the system generates a list of screens that match your search term, such as Call
Settings, Recent Calls, and Time in Call.

Procedure
1. In the Search box, type a text string.
2. Select any of the search results to go directly to that screen in the system web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 19
Setting Up System Hardware
Topics:

• Mount and Position the System

▪ Position the Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System
• Positioning the Polycom EagleEye Director
• Setting Up Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Camera
• Setting Up a Microphone
• Setting Up the Polycom StereoSurround Kit
• Adding a Touch Monitor
• Adding a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone

The following topics provide information on how to set up and configure Polycom video systems and
cameras.

Mount and Position the System

This manual provides information to supplement the setup sheets provided with your RealPresence
Group Series system and its elective peripherals. A printed copy of the setup sheet is provided with each
system. PDF versions of the setup sheets are available at Polycom Support.
RealPresence Group Series systems are designed to be placed on tabletops or in equipment racks. If the
system or any accessories are installed in an enclosed space, such as a cabinet, ensure that the air
temperature in the enclosure does not exceed 40°C (104° F). You might need to provide forced cooling to
keep the equipment within the operating temperature range.

Note: Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions.

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• If you plan to place the system on a table or open shelf, attach the self-adhesive feet to the
bottom of the system.
• If you plan to mount a RealPresence Group 700 system in an equipment rack, install the
mounting brackets, as shown in the following figure.

• RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems use a different type of mounting bracket.
For more information, refer to Polycom Support or contact your Polycom distributor.

Polycom, Inc. 20
Setting Up System Hardware

2. Place the system in the desired location, keeping in mind the following pointers:
• Position the system so that the camera does not face toward a window or other source of
bright light.
• Leave enough space to connect the cables easily.
• Place the camera and display together so that people at your site face the camera when
they are looking at the display.

Position the Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera

System
Follow these guidelines when you use the EagleEye Director II camera system with your RealPresence
Group Series system.
▪ Make sure the EagleEye Director II camera system is on a level surface or mounting bracket.
▪ The camera’s viewing angle is approximately 9 degrees above and 30 degrees below its direct line
of sight as shown below.

▪ To ensure the optimal performance of the EagleEye Director II camera system facial recognition
feature, follow these suggestions:
◦ Provide ample lighting on faces of participants. This allows the EagleEye Director II camera
system to correctly frame faces, using the eyes, noses, and mouths as guidelines.
◦ Allow only minimal backlighting.
▪ To ensure the best view from the EagleEye Director II camera system voice-tracking feature, follow
these suggestions:
◦ Make sure ambient room noise is quiet enough to allow the EagleEye Director II camera
system to locate the participant who is speaking.
◦ Be sure to set up the audio connection from the RealPresence Group Series system to the
EagleEye Director II camera system, whether you connect it directly to the audio output of the
RealPresence Group Series system or to an audio processor managing the room audio.
◦ Set the EagleEye Director II camera system on top of a monitor. Ideally, place the camera
between 5.5 and 7 feet from the ground.

Polycom, Inc. 21
Setting Up System Hardware

The following figure shows placement of EagleEye Director II camera system:

Ensure that people are sitting within the viewing range of between 3 and 33 feet from the device. The
following figure shows the viewing range of EagleEye Director II camera system.

Note: Before powering on the EagleEye Director II camera system, connect the camera system
to the RealPresence Group Series system using a HDCI cable. This will prevent the
camera system from automatically entering sleep mode after three minutes.

Positioning the Polycom EagleEye Director

The Polycom® EagleEye™ Director is an automatic HD dual-camera racking system that works with
RealPresence Group Series systems.

Polycom, Inc. 22
Setting Up System Hardware

Follow these guidelines when you use the EagleEye Director with your system:
• Do not connect more than one EagleEye Director to a single RealPresence Group Series system.
• Avoid setting the EagleEye Director in the corner of a room. The EagleEye Director should be at
least 12 inches away from all of the walls.
• Make sure the EagleEye Director is on a level surface or mounting bracket.
• The camera's viewing angle is approximately 9 degrees above and 30 degrees below its direct line
of sight, as shown next.
.
• To ensure optimal performance of the EagleEye Director facial recognition feature, follow these
suggestions:
◦ Provide ample lighting on faces of participants. This allows the system to correctly frame
faces, using the eyes, noses, and mouths as guidelines.
◦ Allow only minimal backlighting.
• To ensure the best view from the EagleEye Director voice-tracking feature, follow these
suggestions:
◦ Make sure ambient room noise is quiet enough to allow the system to locate the participant
who is speaking.
◦ Be sure to set up the audio connection from the system to the EagleEye Director, whether
you connect it directly to the audio output of the system or to an audio processor managing
the room audio.
◦ Set the EagleEye Director on top of a monitor. Ideally, place the camera between 5.5 and 7
feet from the ground.
The following figure shows EagleEye Director placement:
• Ensure that people are sitting within the viewing range of between 3 and 22 feet from the device.
The following figure shows the EagleEye Director viewing range.

Setting Up Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Camera

The Polycom EagleEye Acoustic camera is designed to be placed on top of your monitor, as shown next.

Setting Up a Microphone
To receive and send audio, you must connect and configure both microphones and speakers. For specific
details regarding how to connect audio inputs and speakers, refer to the appropriate RealPresence Group

Polycom, Inc. 23
Setting Up System Hardware

Series system setup sheet. For information about required audio cables, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Related Links
Set Up Third-party Microphones on page 24
System Panel Views on page 281

Available Microphone Inputs by System

Make sure that the system is powered off before you connect audio devices to it. The number of audio
inputs varies based on the RealPresence Group Series system you are using.
Related Links
Set Up Third-party Microphones on page 24
System Panel Views on page 281

Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 300/310/500

The RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and RealPresence Group 500 systems have
one microphone input, as shown in the following figure.

Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 700

The RealPresence Group 700 system has two microphone inputs. You can freely configure the way you
connect devices to a system, as long as you do not exceed the limits mentioned in the following sections.
If you are using the RealPresence Group 700 system, you can connect devices to either or both inputs as
long as you stay within the guidelines for the total number of devices allowed for the system.

Set Up Third-party Microphones

You can connect third-party microphones directly to audio input 1 on a RealPresence Group Series
system, or through a line-level mixer to the AUX audio input on any system. You can configure a system
to use non-Polycom microphones.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
2. Select Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, if available.

Polycom, Inc. 24
Setting Up System Hardware

3. If echo cancellation is preferred, select Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, Echo
Cancelled, if available.
4. Speak into the microphones that are connected to the audio line inputs. The audio meter should
peak at about 5 dB for normal speech.
5. Select Save.
Related Links
Setting Up a Microphone on page 23
Available Microphone Inputs by System on page 24
SoundStructure Digital Mixer on page 25
System Panel Views on page 281

SoundStructure Digital Mixer

You can connect several microphones to a system through a Polycom audio mixer. Connecting a
Polycom audio mixer to RealPresence Group Series systems provides flexibility in audio setup. The
SoundStructure C-Series mixer connects to the digital microphone connector on a system, and no
configuration is necessary.
When incorporating a SoundStructure digital mixer, remember the following:
• Connect a SoundStructure digital mixer using the digital microphone input on the room system.
• Adjusting the volume on a system changes the volume of the SoundStructure digital mixer that is
connected.
• The following configuration settings are not available on a system when a SoundStructure digital
mixer is connected: Audio input 1 (Line In), Bass, Treble, Enable Polycom Microphones, Enable
MusicMode™, and Enable Keyboard Noise Reduction.
• The system Line Output is muted when a SoundStructure digital mixer is connected.
• All echo cancellation is performed by the SoundStructure digital mixer.
The digital mixer allows you to provide a microphone for each call participant in a boardroom. For
connection details, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Related Links
Set Up Third-party Microphones on page 24
System Panel Views on page 281

Setting Up the Polycom StereoSurround Kit

The Polycom StereoSurround kit is designed for use with RealPresence Group Series systems. It
includes two speakers and a subwoofer.
When a system is configured for Polycom StereoSurround, the audio inputs and outputs are all treated as
stereo. Otherwise, all audio inputs and outputs are mono.
When you set up the system for StereoSurround, the left microphone and speaker should be on the left
from the local room perspective. Place the speaker connected to the audio system's right channel on the
right side of the system, and the other speaker on the left side. The system reverses the left and right
channels for the far site, as shown in the following illustration. This ensures that the sound comes from
the appropriate side of the room.
For best results, place the speakers about 60° apart as seen from the center of the conference table, as
shown next.

Polycom, Inc. 25
Setting Up System Hardware

If you use the subwoofer in the Polycom StereoSurround kit, place it beside a wall or in a corner near the
speakers, as shown next.

Adding a Touch Monitor

RealPresence Group systems have touch user interface capability when connected to touch-capable
monitors. The local user interface works with both touch interaction and the RealPresence Group Series
system remote control. When the Polycom® VisualBoard™ Application or Skype for Business content is

Polycom, Inc. 26
Setting Up System Hardware

playing, the touch is redirected to those interfaces for control and annotation. When these tools are
minimized to show the main user interface, or when a notification comes up, touch is directed to the
primary monitor so that user can control the user interface.These are the supported monitor scenarios:
• Single touch monitor: If only one touch monitor is detected, touch interactions are enabled by
default. You can now interact with the primary user interface using touch. When VisualBoard or
Skype for Business content is playing, the touch is redirected to those interfaces for control and
annotation. When these tools are minimized to show the main user interface, or when a notification
is displayed, touch is directed to primary so that user can control the primary user interface.
• Two or more monitors: For multiple monitor setups, and if at least one monitor is touch, touch
interaction is not enabled by default.
◦ If the touch monitor is attached as primary, and is configured as a touch monitor, touch
interaction is enabled on that monitor to control the primary user interface.
◦ The Diagnostic configuration setting appears only if there is more than one monitor attached
to the system, and there is at least one touch monitor attached.
To enable the touch monitor interface on RealPresence Group 300 and RealPresence Group 310
systems, you must activate the dual monitor option key in the system's web interface.
All of the systems provide one serial port to allow you to control the system through a touch-panel using
the API. The RealPresence Group 700 system also provides one serial port, but depending on your
system's capabilities, you might be able to use the RS-232 serial port to control the system through a
touch panel using the API.
When the USB interface is connected to a RealPresence Group Series system, a touch option appears
on your touch monitor screen. If the USB interface is either disconnected or switched away from the
system, it reconfigures to not use the touch capability, assuring the system is available to users.
Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it.

Touch Monitor Support

The VisualBoard application supports several different touch monitors for use with RealPresence Group
Series systems. For a list of supported monitors, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Release Notes at Polycom Support. To enable the touch monitor interface on RealPresence Group 300
and RealPresence Group 310 systems, you must activate the dual monitor option key in the system's web
interface.
System Software Upgrades

Install a Second Monitor for Use With the VisualBoard Application

To install a touch or standard monitor as a second monitor, follow the steps in this section. For
RealPresence Group 310 systems, you must have a dual option key installed to use a second monitor
with the system. Polycom recommends the use of digital output for content (DVI-D or HDMI) instead of
analog (VGA or YPbPr) when using the VisualBoard application. Digital content produces the optimum
results with alignment of the VisualBoard application.

Procedure
1. Connect the video cable by doing one of the following:
• Connect one end of an HDMI cable to the HDMI Input port on the monitor. Connect the other
end of the HDMI cable to the Monitor 2 HDMI Output port on the system.
• If your monitor has only a DVI input port, use a DVI-HDMI adaptor to connect it to the HDMI
output port of the system.

Polycom, Inc. 27
Setting Up System Hardware

2. Connect the touch monitor to the system.

If you are using a Polycom UC Board sensor with your current content monitor, the sensor is
connected to the system.
a) Connect one end of a USB cable to the USB port on the touch monitor.
b) Connect the other end of the USB cable to the USB port on the system.
A USB storage device can also be installed in the second USB port on the system for
importing and exporting slides, images, or photos.
3. To connect cables from the monitor 2 or the touch monitor to the system, refer to the next figure.

Adding a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference

Phone
When you connect a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone to a RealPresence Group Series
system, the conference phone becomes another way to dial audio or video calls. The conference phone
also operates as a microphone, and as a speaker in audio-only calls. For more information, refer to the
following documents at Polycom Support:
• Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone Connected to a Polycom RealPresence Group
System in Unsupported VoIP Environments Integration Guide
• Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone Connected to a Polycom RealPresence Group
System in Unsupported VoIP Environments User Guide

Polycom, Inc. 28
Running the Setup Wizard
Topics:

• Run the Setup Wizard Locally

• Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location

When you power on your RealPresence Group Series system or enter the IP address for the first time,
the setup wizard detects the system's IP connections and leads you through the minimum configuration
steps. The setup wizard is also called the out-of-box (OOB) wizard. The setup wizard is available during
initial setup, after a software update or system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the
restore button.
You can install the system software in either of two ways:
• In the room with the system — Use the remote control to navigate the screens and enter
information. You can use the number pad on the remote control to enter text. Point the remote
control at the camera to control the system.
• From a remote location — If you know the IP address of the system, you can access and configure
the system by using the system's web interface.
Related Links
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location on page 29
Run the Setup Wizard Locally on page 29

Run the Setup Wizard Locally

You must launch and run the setup wizard to begin configuring your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
» After you power on the system for the first time and the setup wizard launches, navigate the
screens and perform the required steps to configure the system.
The setup wizard allows you to set an Admin ID and password, where you can limit access to the
Admin Settings. The default Admin ID is admin and the default admin password is the 14-digit
system serial number on the Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail
screen in the local interface or on the back of the system.
Related Links
Running the Setup Wizard on page 29

Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location

You can launch and run the setup wizard from a remote location to begin configuring your RealPresence
Group Series system on the system web interface. If you know the IP address of the system, you can
access and configure it using the system web interface.

Procedure
1. Enter the IP address of your system in the system web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 29
Running the Setup Wizard

2. Navigate the screens and perform the required steps to configure the system.
After the system starts up from the setup wizard (OOB) wizard, you might be unable to gain
access to system web interface for up to a minute. This can occur after the IP address displays on
the local interface.
Related Links
Running the Setup Wizard on page 29
Log On on page 18

Polycom, Inc. 30
Configuring General System Settings
Topics:

• Name the System

• Enter Contact Information
• Set the Location
• Set the Language
• Set the Date and Time

Name the System

The RealPresence Group Series system name appears on the screen of the far-end site when you make
a call. The system interface supports the 16 language fonts listed in the following figure. Other languages
might not display correctly. The first character of a System Name must be a letter or a number instead of
a dollar sign ($) or underscore (_) character. Polycom supports double-byte characters for the system
name.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
System Name.
2. In the System Name field, enter a name and click Save.

Enter Contact Information

You can enter contact information for your RealPresence Group Series system so that users know whom
to call when they need assistance.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > My Information >
Contact Information.
2. Configure the following settings.

Polycom, Inc. 31
Configuring General System Settings

Setting Description

Contact Person Specifies the name of the system administrator.

Contact Number Specifies the phone number for the system

administrator.

Contact Email Specifies the email address for the system

administrator.

Contact Fax Specifies the fax number for the system

administrator.

Tech Support Specifies the name of the person who provides

technical support.

City Specifies the city where the system administrator is

located.

State/Province Specifies the state or province where the system

administrator is located.

Country Specifies the country where the system

administrator is located.

Help Desk Number Specifies the phone number of the help desk. This
number is used in the help desk setting so that your
users can place an audio-only call to the help desk.

Set the Location

On the system web interface, you can set the location to specify the country and the country code where
the RealPresence Group Series system is located.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > My Information >
Location.
2. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

Country Specifies the country where the system is located.

Changing the country automatically adjusts the
country code associated with your system.

Country Code Displays the country code associated with the

country where the system is located.

Polycom, Inc. 32
Configuring General System Settings

Set the Language

You can select from 16 different languages to display in the RealPresence Group Series local and system
web interfaces.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Language and select
the language to use in the interface.

Set the Date and Time

On either the system web interface, you can set the date and time settings for your RealPresence Group
Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time >
System Time.
2. Configure these settings:

Setting Description

Date Format Specifies how the date is displayed in the interface.

Note: This a web-only setting.

Time Format Specifies how the time is displayed in the interface.

Auto Adjust for Daylight Saving Time Specifies the daylight saving time setting. When
you enable this setting, the system clock
automatically changes for daylight saving time.
Note: This a web-only setting.

Time Zone Specifies the time difference between GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time) and your location.

Time Server Specifies whether the connection to a time server is

automatic or manual for system time settings. You
can also select Off to enter the date and time
yourself.

Primary Time Server Address Specifies the address of the primary time server to
use when Time Server is set to Manual.

Secondary Time Server Address Specifies the address of the time server to use
when the Primary Time Server Address does not
respond. This is an elective field.

Polycom, Inc. 33
Configuring General System Settings

Setting Description

Current Date and Current Time • If the Time Server is set to Manual or
Auto, these settings are not displayed.
• If the Time Server is set to Off, these
settings are configurable.

3. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time
in Call.
4. Configure these settings:

Setting Description

Show Time in Call Specifies the time display in a call:

• Elapsed Time—Displays the amount of
time in the call.
• System Time—Displays the system
time on the screen during a call.
• Off—Time is not displayed.

When to Show Specifies when the time should be shown:

• Start of the call only—Displays only
when the call begins.
• Entire call—Displays continuously
throughout the call.
• Once per hour—Displays at the
beginning of the hour for one minute.
• Twice per hour—Displays at the
beginning of the hour and midway
through the hour for one minute.

Show Countdown Before Next Meeting This setting is displayed only when the calendaring
service has been enabled.
When enabled, it displays a timer that counts down
to the next scheduled meeting 10 minutes before
that meeting. If a timer is already showing, the
countdown timer replaces it 10 minutes before the
next scheduled meeting.

Polycom, Inc. 34
Using a Provisioning Service
Topics:

• Enable a Provisioning Service

• Configure a Provisioning Service
• Disable a Provisioning Service
▪ ZTP Web Service Solution
• Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned System
• Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation

If your organization uses a RealPresence Resource Manager system or a BroadSoft BroadWorks® Device
Management System (DMS) system, you can manage systems in dynamic management mode. In
dynamic management mode, the following might be true:
• Polycom systems are registered to a standards-based presence service, so presence states are
shared with Contacts.
• Polycom systems have access to a corporate directory that supports LDAP access.
◦ The Domain, User Name, Password, and Server Address fields are populated on the
Provisioning Service screen.
◦ Configuration settings that are provisioned, or that are dependent on provisioned values, are
read-only on the system.
◦ The system checks for new software from the provisioning service every time it restarts and at
an interval set by the service. It automatically accesses and runs any software updates made
available by the service.
◦ A provisioning service system administrator can upload a provisioned bundle from an already
configured system. When systems request provisioning, the provisioned bundle and any
automatic settings are downloaded. A system user with administrative rights can change the
settings on the system after the provisioned bundle is applied. If you later download a new
provisioned bundle from the provisioning service, the new bundle overwrites the manual
settings.
• If the system has previously registered successfully with a provisioning service but fails to detect
the service when it restarts or checks for updates, an alert appears on the System Status screen. If
the system loses registration with the provisioning service, it continues operating with the most
recent configuration that it received from the provisioning service.
• If a Polycom Touch Control is connected to a provisioned RealPresence Group Series system, a
RealPresence Resource Manager system can receive status updates from the Polycom Touch
Control and can provide software updates to the Polycom Touch Control. For supported
RealPresence Resource Manager versions, go to http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/
support/us/support/service_policies.html and click the Current Interoperability Matrix link.
If you use BroadSoft DMS provisioning, note the following points:
• Bundled provisioning is not supported.
• Provisioning uses the same XML-based profile used for dynamic provisioning.
• Provisioned fields are read only.
Related Links

Polycom, Inc. 35
Using a Provisioning Service

Enable PKI Certificates on page 102

Enable a Provisioning Service

You can register your RealPresence Group Series system with the RealPresence Resource Manager
system in a few ways:
• If the system detects a provisioning service on the network while running the setup wizard, it
prompts you to enter information for registration with the service.
The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted,
or after using the restore button. For information about configuring the RealPresence Resource
Manager system so that Polycom systems detect and register with it, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager System Operations Guide.
• You can enter the registration information and attempt to register by going to the Admin Settings in
the Polycom system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2. Select the Enable Provisioning setting.

Configure a Provisioning Service

After you enable the provisioning service, the RealPresence Group Series system should complete the
following fields automatically. If the system does not complete the fields automatically, get the information
from your network administrator. Multiple Polycom systems can be registered to a single user.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2. At Enable Provisioning, select the checkbox.
3. Configure these settings for automatic provisioning.

Setting Description

Server Type Specifies the type of provisioning server. Select

RPRM, DMS, or CLOUD.
• RPRM is the RealPresence Resource
Manager.
• DMS is the Broadsoft BroadWorks
Device Management System.
• CLOUD is the RP Cloud server.

Domain Name Specifies the domain for registering to the

provisioning service.

User Name Specifies the endpoint's user name for registering

to the provisioning service.

Polycom, Inc. 36
Using a Provisioning Service

Setting Description

Password Specifies the password that registers the system to

the provisioning service.

Server Address Specifies the address of the system running the

provisioning service.

4. Select Save or Update.

The system tries to register with the RealPresence Resource Manager or with a DMS system
using NTLM authentication.
5. Verify that Registration Status changes from Pending to Registered.
You might need to wait for a minute or two before the status changes.
Related Links
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation on page 38

Disable a Provisioning Service

You can disable a provisioning service on the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2. Disable the Enable Provisioning setting.

ZTP Web Service Solution

The ZTP solution is a cloud-based Web service designed to simplify the deployment of Polycom devices.
The Polycom ZTP console is a web interface that you can use to create and manage profiles and device
associations. The ZTP solution is intended as a one-time step at initial deployment. Usually, end
customers require a supplier or skilled installer to deploy devices out of the box. The ZTP web console
enables you to create provisioning profiles that you can associate with one or more devices. These
profiles enable end customers to install the devices themselves. The profiles also provide a central
provisioning server address that automatically redirects multiple customer devices to your provisioning
server. In addition to setting the provisioning server address, you might also use the solution to do the
following:
▪ Perform software updates (VOIP phones only)
▪ Set additional configuration parameters that simplify deployment, for example, a custom CA
certificate for HTTPS provisioning (VOIP phones only)
For more information, refer to the Polycom Zero Touch Provisioning User Guide at Polycom Support.

Polycom, Inc. 37
Using a Provisioning Service

Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned

System
When your RealPresence Group Series system is provisioned through the RealPresence Resource
Manager system and you use PKI certificates, consider the following information. Be sure to enable
provisioning after you follow the procedures applicable to each Security Profile type.
• To use the Maximum Security Profile with provisioning:
◦ The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using Maximum Security Mode.
◦ You must manually assign the Maximum Security Profile to the system during installation
using the setup wizard, or afterwards using the system web interface.
◦ You must use full PKI and observe the following procedures before you enable provisioning
on the system:
1. You must install a signed client certificate on the system to enable the provisioning
connection to be authenticated by the RealPresence Resource Manager system.
2. Decide whether to automatically validate web clients by enabling the Always Validate
Peer Certificates from Browsers setting. If you do enable the setting, you'll need to
install a signed server certificate and all of the CA certificates needed to validate
browser certificates for all web clients. Then configure the certificate revocation
method.
3. Decide whether to validate servers by enabling the Always Validate Peer
Certificates from Servers setting. If you do enable the setting, you must install of the
CA certificates needed to validate server certificates from all remote servers. Then
adjust the certificate revocation method accordingly. For example, you might need to
load additional CRLs if you use the CRL revocation method).
• To use the Medium or High Security Profile with provisioning:
◦ The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using commercial mode.
◦ You must manually assign the Medium or High Security Profile to the system during
installation using the setup wizard, or afterwards using the system web interface.
◦ Configure PKI according to your company's guidelines.
• To use the Low Security Profile with provisioning:
◦ The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using commercial mode.
◦ You can enable provisioning in the setup wizard. All provisionable settings are taken from the
RealPresence Resource Manager system.

Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation

You can use the RealPresence Resource Manager to navigate the RealPresence Group Series system
directories or contacts. Contacts are displayed in a hierarchical format, where you can select the top
directory and search for contacts within each level of the directory hierarchy.
This feature is supported using a RealPresence Resource Manager server (LDAP) and does not include
standalone LDAP servers or other global directory servers.
The following limitations apply to this feature:
• You can use RealPresence Resource Manager 7.1 and higher only.

Polycom, Inc. 38
Using a Provisioning Service

• You can search and navigate up to three directory levels.

• You cannot use the Polycom Touch Control to navigate the system LDAP directories.
• This feature is supported on dynamically-managed video conferencing systems only.

Procedure
1. Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and make selections for each setting.
2. Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service and enable provisioning.
Related Links
Configure a Provisioning Service on page 36
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers on page 129
The global directory provides a list of RealPresence Group Series systems that are registered with the
Global Directory Server and are available for calls. The other systems appear in the directory, allowing
users to place calls to participants by selecting their names.

Polycom RealPresence Cloud Service

The Polycom® Cloud service enables service providers to configure RealPresence Group Series systems
with a provisioning service. During the first-time system setup, the RealPresence Cloud service might be
automatically configured and provisioned according to the service provider's parameters. If needed, you
can enable and configure RealPresence Cloud mode in the system web interface.

Enable RealPresence Cloud Mode

If your RealPresence Group Series system was not automatically configured and provisioned, you can
enable and configure RealPresence Cloud mode in the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2. At Enable Provisioning, select the checkbox.
3. At Server Type, select CLOUD.
4. Click Save.
The registration status changes to Registered after 1 to 2 minutes.

Polycom, Inc. 39
Activating System Options
Topics:

• System Software Options

The following topics provide information on how to update software, and to add system software options
for your Polycom system.

System Software Options

In the system local interface, activated system options have checkmarks next to them. The following
system options are available for your RealPresence Group Series system. Some options are not available
for certain systems. For example, RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems do not support Multipoint
Video Conferencing.
• Multipoint Video Conferencing: This option enables your system to make video calls to more than
one site at a time. It is available for RealPresence Group 500 and RealPresence Group 700
systems. To activate this feature, you must purchase and install a key code.
• Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP): This option improves the interoperability of systems
in environments with certain Cisco telepresence systems. To activate this feature, you must
purchase and install a key code.
• Skype for Business Interoperability License: This option enhances the video experience by
enabling the following Microsoft features for all RealPresence Group Series systems:
◦ Real-time video (RTV) provides higher resolutions during video calls when integrated with
Skype for Business Server 2015.
◦ The Microsoft version of H.264 SVC delivers a continuous presence style experience.
◦ Simulcast H.264 streams are now supported, allowing RealPresence Group Series systems
in SVC-enabled Skype calls to transmit multiple streams of the local video depending upon
the capabilities of the far-end systems. For example, far-end systems displaying high
resolution images receive high resolution images from the system, while simultaneously far-
end systems displaying low resolution images receive low resolution images from the system.
◦ Centralized Conferencing Control Protocol (CCCP) enables seamless participation in
multipoint video conferences hosted on Skype's audio/video server.
◦ The Skype AVMCU Spotlight feature enables the system to display only the broadcaster's
video when a participant is made the broadcaster in a call.
◦ RealPresence Group Series systems support Forward Error Correction (FEC) DV0 and DV1
in Skype for Business Server 2015 and Skype for Business 2015 client environments for both
H.264 SVC and RTV endpoints. The scheme introduces recovery packets on the transmitter
which recover lost video packets on the receiver. Enabling or disabling the Lost Packet
Recovery feature in the system web interface does not affect the negotiation of FEC.
◦ IPv6 is supported in Skype for Business Server 2015 and Skype for Business 2015 client
environments with IPv6 networks.
To activate this feature, you must purchase and install a key code.
• Advanced Video 1080p: This option makes 1080p video and content available to systems. To
activate this feature, you must purchase and install a key code.

Polycom, Inc. 40
Activating System Options

For information about integrating with Skype for Business Server 2015, refer to the Polycom Unified
Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments at Polycom Support.
Related Links
Activate System Options on page 42
Microsoft Interoperability on page 44

View System Software Options

You can view options supported on your RealPresence Group Series system in the system web interface.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
The options available on your system are displayed.

Obtain Software or System Option Keys

To perform a major or minor software update or activate options, obtain a key before you run the software
update. A key is the number that activates software or options on a specific RealPresence Group Series
system. A key is valid only on the system for which it is generated. You can obtain software or option
keys for a single system or for multiple systems. If you do not have a support agreement, contact an
authorized Polycom dealer to get a key.
The following types of keys are available:
• Software keys are valid for the software updates you are installing as well as for any point,
maintenance, or patch releases that may later become available.
• Option keys activate software options and are valid across all software releases.

Procedure
1. Open a browser and navigate to Polycom Support.
2. Under Licensing & Product Registration, click Activation/Upgrade.
3. Log in to your account.
4. Do one of the following:
• To update one system, click Site & Single Activation/Upgrade. Follow the onscreen
instructions to enter your system license number and serial number.
• To update multiple systems that are covered by a software service agreement, click Batch
Upgrade and then select your product. Follow the onscreen instructions to upload the text
file that contains your system license numbers and serial numbers, or serial numbers only.
• To update multiple systems not covered by a software service agreement, click Batch
Activation. Follow the onscreen instructions to upload the text file that contains your system
license numbers and serial numbers, or serial numbers only. Polycom sends a text file
containing the requested keys for each system.
Related Links
Activate System Options on page 42
Preparing to Upgrade on page 258

Polycom, Inc. 41
Activating System Options

Create a Single Key File to Update Multiple Systems

After you receive your key files from Polycom, you can create a single key file to upgrade multiple
RealPresence Group Series systems.

Procedure
1. Open the key files with a text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Copy the contents of one file to the end of the other file.
Repeat, as necessary.
3. Save the combined file with the name sw_keys.txt.
You now have a single text file that contains all of your keys for software updates. Use the keys in the file
to upgrade the applicable systems.

Key File Formats

Most key files use this format:

License Number <TAB>Serial Number<TAB>Key

For example, a text file with update license numbers, serial numbers, and
keys might look like this:
U1059-3131-6042-3609<TAB>8213190FFAE7D5<TAB>UBA5-1D6E-EB00-0000-0192

The following example shows a software update key file:

U1000-0000-0000-0000-0003<TAB>82041003E070B0<TAB>U8FB-0D4E-6E30-0000-0009
U1000-0000-0000-0000-0004<TAB>820327024193AK<TAB>U982-4507-5D80-0000-0009

The following example shows an option key file:

K1000-0000-0000-0000-0001<TAB>82041003F082B1<TAB>K15B-DC2D-E120-0000-0009
K1000-0000-0000-0000-0002<TAB>82041503E093B0<TAB>K27E-30F9-2D20-0000-0009

RealPresence Group Series systems covered by a software service agreement use a slightly different key
file format. The following is an example of a software update key file for such a system:

U<TAB>82041003F082B1<TAB>U7B6-698E-1640-0000-02C1
U<TAB>82041503E093B0<TAB>UCC1-C9A6-FE60-0000-02C1
U<TAB>82041003E070B0<TAB>UEC6-FDA0-8F00-0000-02C1
U<TAB>820327024193AK<TAB>U7B7-D6BD-3610-0000-02C1

Activate System Options

To activate certain features on your RealPresence Group Series system, you must use the system's web
interface. Some of the features of a system are optional. If you want to activate your system options
without upgrading your software, you do not need to download software or run the software update. The
only thing you need is your system option key.

Procedure
1. Open a supported browser and go to the system's web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 42
Activating System Options

2. Navigate to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.

3. Enter the option key and click Save.
Related Links
System Software Options on page 40
Obtain Software or System Option Keys on page 41

Enter a Multipoint Option Key

You can use your RealPresence Group Series system to participate in multipoint conferences. Multipoint
conferences include multiple video sites and can also include H.323 audio-only or SIP audio-only sites.
All H.323 audio-only and SIP audio-only connections count toward the number of sites in a call. Multipoint
calls require a multipoint conferencing unit (MCU) or a hosting system. Depending on the system's
configuration, systems can host multipoint calls. You cannot configure multipoint calls without purchasing
and installing a Multipoint Video Conferencing option key code.
Depending on your system model, you might need to enter a multipoint option key to enable multipoint
calling. For information about purchasing a multipoint call option, please contact your Polycom distributor.
The multipoint option key cannot be used with RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems, since these
systems do not support multipoint calling.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
2. In the Key field, enter the Multipoint Video Conferencing option key.
3. Click Save.

Polycom, Inc. 43
Microsoft Interoperability
Topics:

• Skype for Business Content Sharing

• Register a System with Skype for Business
• Configure the Directory Services Contact List
• Skype for Business-Hosted Video Conferencing

The following topics provide information for system administrators on interoperability with Microsoft
products and features. It is important to note that assistance from Polycom Microsoft Integration Services
is mandatory for Skype for Business 2015 integrations. For additional information and details, please refer
to http://www.polycom.com/services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom
representative.
Some of the functionality that RealPresence Group Series systems support when integrated with
Microsoft includes the following:
• During active calls, the Skype for Business application and desktop sharing lets Skype clients share
content with RealPresence Group Series systems
• AES encryption automatically encrypts calls to other systems that have AES encryption enabled
• Real-time video (RTV) in Skype-hosted calls provides higher resolutions during video calls when
your system is integrated with Skype for Business Server 2015. This feature requires enabling the
Skype for Business Interoperability License key enabled on your system. The following functionality
is enabled using a RealPresence Group Series system or a RealPresence Touch device.
• Skype for Business 2015 media encryption in calls with systems that have encryption enabled
• Start video as an audio-only participant during point-to-point and conference calls
• Add additional contacts as audio-only participants to a meeting
• Accept or decline a video stream request
• Accept or decline incoming calls forwarded from a contact
• Restart a RealPresence Group Series system from a RealPresence Touch device
• Restart the RealPresence Touch device
For more information on these Microsoft features, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for
Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
For information on limitations of this feature, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes
for your software version at Polycom Support.
Related Links
System Software Options on page 40

Skype for Business Content Sharing

You can scroll and zoom content on the system monitor, and systems can control content received from
Skype clients. For details, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide .

Polycom, Inc. 44
Microsoft Interoperability

RDP content sharing does not require the Polycom RealPresence Group Series system to be in an audio
or video call.
You can control shared content from a Skype for Business client using a USB mouse and keyboard.
The following content types from Skype clients are available:
• All Monitors: Displays content from all monitors connected to the system with the Skype client.
• Primary Monitor: Displays content from the primary monitor connected to the system with the
Skype client.
• Secondary Monitor: Displays content from the secondary monitor connected to the system with
the Skype client.
• Program: Displays content from a particular program connected to the system with the Skype
client.
For content to display properly, the room system Monitor 2 must support Progressive mode, and the
output resolution should be set to a Progressive setting (for example, 1280x720p or 1920x1080p).
Interlaced output for Monitor 2 is not supported (do not use Resolution setting -1920x1080i-).
For information on how to share content from Skype clients, refer to Microsoft documentation.
For information on limitations of this feature, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes
for your software version at Polycom Support.

Register a System with Skype for Business

When you register a RealPresence Group Series system with a Skype for Business Server, the system
user can see a list of Skype for Business 2015 contacts and whether contacts are online or offline.
Contacts display in the directory and users can choose to display up to five contacts on the home screen
or call a contact.
The H.263 codec has been deprecated and a Skype for Business Interoperability License is required for
integration with Skype for Business Server.

Procedure
» Open a browser window and in the Address field enter the system IP address or host name.
2 Go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network and select SIP.
3 Configure the following SIP settings for your Skype for Business environment.

Setting Description

Select to enable the system to make and receive SIP

Enable SIP calls.

Specifies whether the system is successfully registered

Registration Status with the Skype for Business Server 2015.

Select Auto if your Skype for Business Server

configuration is set up for automatic discovery, which
requires you to correctly configure Skype for Business
SRV records. If the Skype for Business Server is not
SIP Server Configuration configured for automatic discover, select Specify.

Polycom, Inc. 45
Microsoft Interoperability

Setting Description

The SIP network infrastructure in which your

RealPresence Group Series system is operating
determines which protocol is required.
• Auto enables an automatic negotiation of
protocols in the following order: TLS, TCP,
and User Datagram Protocol (UDP). This is
the recommended setting for Microsoft
environments.
• TLS provides secure communication of the
SIP signaling. TLS is available only when
the system is registered with a SIP server
that supports TLS. When you choose this
setting, the system ignores TCP/UDP port
5060. TLS is required when connecting to
Skype for Business.
• TCP provides transport via TCP for SIP
signaling and is not applicable for Skype for
Business. Signaling encryption is
mandatory.
• UDP provides transport via UDP for SIP
Transport Protocol signaling.

This setting is disabled by default (recommended).

When disabled, it causes the system to use an
ephemeral source port for all outgoing SIP messages.
When enabled, it causes the system to use the active
SIP listening port as the source port (5060 or 5061,
depending on the negotiated SIP transport protocol in
use). This can be useful to establish correct operation
with remote SIP peer devices, which require that the
Force Connection Reuse source port match the contact port in SIP messages.

Polycom, Inc. 46
Microsoft Interoperability

Setting Description

BFCP Transport Preference Controls the negotiation behavior for content sharing
using the Binary Floor Control Protocol (BFCP).
Establishes the relationship between the floor control
server and its clients, while the available settings
determine how network traffic flows between the server
and clients.
TCP is typically known as the older, slightly slower, and
more reliable method, but is not supported under some
circumstances, such as with session border controllers
(SBCs).
Prefer UDP—Starts resource sharing using UDP, but
fall back to TCP if needed. This is the default value
when SIP is enabled.
Prefer TCP—Starts resource sharing using TCP, but
fall back to UDP if needed.
UDP Only—Shares resources only through UDP. If
UDP is unavailable, content sharing in a separate video
stream is not available.
TCP Only—Shares resources only through TCP. If
TCP is unavailable, content sharing in a separate video
stream is not available.

Specify the system's SIP name. This is the SIP URI or

Skype for Business sign-in address. Specify the
address for the conference room or user account
Sign-in Address created for the Polycom system.

Specifies the name and Windows Domain to use for

authentication when registering with a SIP Registrar
Server, for example, [email protected].
RealPresence Group Series systems supports the User
Principal Name format, [email protected] as
well as the legacy Microsoft DOMAIN\username format.
If the SIP server requires authentication, this field and
User Name the password cannot be blank.

When enabled, allows you to specify and confirm a new

password that authenticates the system to the SIP
Password Server.

Polycom, Inc. 47
Microsoft Interoperability

Setting Description

If you selected Specify in the SIP Server

Configuration field, you need to specify the DNS
name of the SIP Registrar Server.
In a Skype for Business environment, specify the DNS
name of the Front End Pool or Director. The default
port is 5061.
If registering a remote RealPresence Group Series
system with an Edge Server, use the fully qualified
domain name of the Access Edge Server. The port for
the Edge Server role is usually 443 and must be
entered explicitly.
Polycom recommends using the DNS name. The
format for entering the address and port is the
following:
DNS_NAME
TCP_Port
TLS_Port
Syntax Examples:
• To use the default port for the protocol you
have selected:
pool.corp.local
• To specify a different Transport Layer
Security (TLS) port and use the default
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port:
Registrar Server pool.corp.local:443

Specify the DNS name or IP address of the SIP Proxy

Server. If you leave this field blank, the Registrar
Server is used. Note that in a Microsoft environment,
the Proxy server and the Registrar server are always
the same server, so only one server address field is
required. If you selected Auto for your SIP Server
Configuration and leave the Proxy Server field blank,
no Proxy Server is used.
By default for TCP, the SIP signaling is sent to port
5060 on the proxy server. By default for TLS, the SIP
signaling is sent to port 5061 on the proxy server.
The syntax used for this field is the same as for the
Proxy Server Registrar Server field.

Registrar Server Type For Skype for Business Server, select Microsoft.

Configure the Skype for Business Directory Server

To allow your users to search the directory servers to add contacts, you must set up and configure the
Microsoft directory servers in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. The global directory

Polycom, Inc. 48
Microsoft Interoperability

provides a list of other systems that are registered with the Global Directory Server and available for calls.
The other systems appear in the directory, allowing users to place calls to other users by selecting their
names.
The global directory searching feature does not support directory servers that are unable to store
contents locally on systems, including Microsoft Skype in Web Query mode.
For information on how to configure directory servers for Microsoft environments, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
You can configure the system to use Skype for Business Server when the system is automatically
provisioned by a RealPresence Resource Manager system or in standard operating mode.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
2 Configure the SIP settings.
3 In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and select the
Microsoft Service Type. Configure the following settings on the Directory Servers screen.

Setting Description

Registration Status Specifies whether the system is successfully registered

with the Skype for Business Server 2015.

Domain Name Specifies the Domain Name entered on the SIP

Settings screen.

Domain User Name Specifies the Domain User Name entered on the SIP
Settings screen.

User Name Specifies the User Name entered on the SIP Settings
screen.

Related Links
Set Up Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch on page 221

Upload Logs to the Skype for Business Server

You can upload diagnostic logs to the Skype for Business Server to provide the Skype for Business
administrator access to RealPresence Group Series device logs that can help the administrator
troubleshooting issues. The Skype for Business administrator can enable or disable support for this
option from the Skype for Business Server.

Procedure
1. In the web interface, navigate to Diagnostics > System > Logs.
2. Click Upload system log.
For information on uploading logs from the RealPresence Touch user interface, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series User Guide .

Polycom, Inc. 49
Microsoft Interoperability

Configure the Directory Services Contact List

You can configure display options for your Microsoft contacts in your RealPresence Group Series system
contact list. If you don't complete the Directory Services configuration, the Skype for Business Directory
search, personal favorites, and contacts list do not display in the Contacts menu.

Procedure
1. Open a browser window and in the Address field enter the system IP address or host name.
2. Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers.
3. In the Skype for Business Server section of the Directory Servers page, configure these settings:
• Server Type Specifies whether the SIP Registrar Server is a Skype for Business Server. Enabling
this setting activates integration features such as the Microsoft global directory and Skype for
Business contact sharing with presence.
• Registration Status Upon successful authentication this field displays as Registered, as shown in
the next figure.
• Domain Name Specifies the Windows Domain to use for Directory lookup, for example,
windowsdomain.local.
RealPresence Group Series systems support the User Principal Name format
<windowsdomain.local> as well as the legacy Microsoft NETBIOS domain format.

Skype for Business-Hosted Video Conferencing

Skype for Business-hosted conferencing is supported only when Polycom endpoints are registered to
Skype for Business and the Skype for Business Interoperability License is enabled on the RealPresence
Group Series system. If you want to use the call management features, pair your system with a Polycom®
Touch Control or Polycom® RealPresence Touch™.
When using Skype for Business-hosted video conferencing, keep the following points in mind:
• When in a Skype for Business-hosted call, the system displays a Busy presence state and rejects
any incoming calls.
• When in a Skype for Business-hosted call, other multipoint calling methods, such as internal
multipoint hosting, RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) or RealPresence DMA hosted
conferencing, and Conference on Demand, are disabled.
• In SVC multipoint calls hosted on Skype for Business Server, you can view multiple far-end sites in
layouts. Note that when using RealPresence Group Series systems, layouts vary by model. On
RealPresence Group 300, 500, and 700 systems, you can view a maximum of five far-end sites.
In Skype for Business-hosted conferences, systems require a Polycom Touch Control or RealPresence
Touch to do the following:
• View conference participants
• Add participants to the conference
• Organize and initiate conferences with
• RealPresence Group Series and Skype for Business clients and groups

Polycom, Inc. 50
Calendaring Service
Topics:

• Enable the Calendaring Service

▪ Join Scheduled Meetings

RealPresence Group Series systems can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 to retrieve
calendar information for a specific Microsoft Outlook or a Microsoft Office 365 individual or system
account. The system connects to Microsoft Exchange Server using the credentials you provide, or by
automatically discovering the connection information based on an email address or SIP server address.
Connection to a calendaring service allows the system to:
• Display the day's scheduled meetings, along with details about each
• Display a Join button on all scheduled meetings for the current day
• Let users join the meeting without knowing the connection details
• Hide or show details about meetings marked Private, depending on the configuration of the system
• Display a meeting reminder before each scheduled meeting, along with a reminder tone
Professional Services for Microsoft integration is mandatory for Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft
Outlook and Microsoft Office Communications Server integrations. For additional information and details,
please refer to http://www.polycom.com/services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local
Polycom representative.

Enable the Calendaring Service

Before users can view their scheduled meetings on the RealPresence Group Series system local
interface, you must enable the Calendaring Service in the system web interface. Microsoft Exchange
Server 2013 and Skype for Business 2015 are supported.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Calendaring Service.
2. Configure these settings, as appropriate:

Setting Description

Enable Calendaring Service Enables the room video system to connect to a

calendaring service and retrieve meeting
information.

Email Specifies the mailbox account this system should

monitor for calendar information. This should match
the Primary SMTP Address for the account on
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013/Skype for
Business 2015, which displays as the value of the
mail attribute in the account properties.

Polycom, Inc. 51
Calendaring Service

Setting Description

Domain Specifies the domain for registering to the Microsoft

Exchange Server 2013/Skype for Business 2015, in
either NETBIOS or DNS notation, for example,
either company.local or COMPANY.
If you are using the Auto Discover Using setting,
do not provide a value in this field.

User Name Specifies the user name for registering to Microsoft

Exchange Server 2013/Skype for Business 2015,
with no domain information included. This can be
the system name or an individual's name.
If you want the Calendaring Service to use the
calendar associated with a Microsoft Office 365
account, enter the user name for that account in
this field.

Password Specifies the system password for registering with

Microsoft Exchange Server 2013/Skype for
Business 2015. This can be the system password
or an individual's password.
If you want the Calendaring Service to use the
calendar associated with a Microsoft Office 365
account, enter the password for that account in this
field.

Auto Discover Using Specifies how the system obtains the Microsoft
Exchange Server/Skype for Business 2015
address. If you select Email Address, the system
uses the value provided in the Email field. If you
select SIP Server, the system uses the registered
SIP server domain name configured for the system.
When using this feature, you must provide values
in the Email, User Name, and Password fields that
correspond to the Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft
Office 365 individual or system account you want
the system to use for the Calendaring Service. The
system may prompt you to confirm the password.
If after configuring the Calendaring Service a
message displays that the system was unable to
discover the service, ensure the information you
provided is correct. For example, make sure the
email address is in a valid <username@domain>
format.
You can also use an API command to automatically
discover the Microsoft Exchange Server address.
For more information, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Guide.

Polycom, Inc. 52
Calendaring Service

Setting Description

Microsoft Exchange Server Specifies the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)
of the Microsoft Exchange Client Access Server/
Skype for Business 2015. If your organization has
multiple servers behind a network load balancer,
this is the FQDN of the server's Virtual IP Address.
If required, an IP address can be used instead of
an FQDN, but Polycom recommends using the
same FQDN that is used for Outlook clients.
Provide a value in this field only if you want to
manually provide connection information to
Microsoft Exchange Server/Skype for Business
2015. Otherwise, use the Auto Discover Using
setting that allows the system to automatically
determine the connection information for Microsoft
Exchange Server/Skype for Business 2015 and
populate this field.

Secure Connection Protocol Specifies the connection protocol to use to connect

to the server. Select Automatic or TLS 1.0.

Meeting Reminder Time in Minutes Specifies the number of minutes before the
meeting that a reminder will display on the system.

Play Reminder Tone When Not in a Call Specifies whether to play a sound along with the
text reminder when the system is not in a call.

Show Information for Meetings Set to Private Specifies whether to display details about meetings
marked private.

For more information about using the calendar, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User
Guide .

Join Scheduled Meetings

If your RealPresence Group Series system is configured to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server/
Skype for Business 2015, you can join a scheduled meeting from the Calendar screen. If the home
screen does not display calendar information, the system is not registered with the Microsoft Exchange
Server. If no meetings are scheduled, a “No Meetings Today” message is displayed.

Procedure
1. With your remote control, select a meeting on the home screen.
2. Select Join to call into the meeting.
For more information about joining scheduled meetings, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide . For more information about setting up Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 accounts to use the
calendaring service, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution
Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.

Polycom, Inc. 53
Configuring Network Settings
Topics:

• Connecting to a LAN
• LLDP and LLDP-MED Support
• IP Network Settings
• AS-SIP Settings
• Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)
• Configure Network Quality Settings

Before you begin configuring network settings, make sure your network is ready for video conferencing.
Polycom offers contract high-definition readiness services. For more information, contact your Polycom
distributor.
The following topics cover network types used worldwide, but note that not all network types are available
in all countries.

Connecting to a LAN
You must connect the RealPresence Group Series system to a LAN to do any of the following with your
system:
• Make H.323 or SIP calls
• Use a Global Directory Server
• Register with a management system
• Access the system web interface
• Use People+Content IP
• Connect to a RealPresence Touch device
• Connect to a Polycom Touch Control

LAN Status Lights

The LAN connector on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, and 700 systems has two lights to
indicate connection status and traffic.

Indicator Light Connection Status

Left light off No 1000Base-T connection.

Left light green 1000Base-T connection.

Right light off No 10/100 Base-T connection and no network traffic

with 1000 Base-T connection.

Polycom, Inc. 54
Configuring Network Settings

Indicator Light Connection Status

Right light on 10/100 Base-T connection and blinks with network

traffic.

Right light blinking Network traffic.

Configure LAN Properties

You can configure LAN properties for your RealPresence Group Series system in the local or system web
interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
2. Configure the following LAN Options settings in the system web interface at Admin Settings >
Network > LAN Properties > LAN Options.

Setting Description

Host Name Indicates the system's name. If the system

discovers a valid System Name during the software
(system web interface only)
installation process, a Host Name is automatically
created. However, if an invalid system name is
found, such as a System Name with a space, the
system creates a Host Name with the following
format: SystemType-XXXXXX, where XXXXXX is a
set of random alphanumeric characters.
IPv4 networks: The system sends the host name
to the DHCP server to enable it to register the host
name with the local DNS server, or it looks up the
domain where the endpoint is registered (if
supported).
IPv6 networks: This function is not supported, so
you can leave this field blank. However, configuring
the field to contain the registered host name is
recommended.

Domain Name Displays the domain name currently assigned to

the system.
(system web interface only)
If the system does not automatically obtain a
domain name, enter one here.

Autonegotiation Specifies whether the system should automatically

negotiate the LAN speed and duplex mode per
(under General Settings in local interface)
IEEE 802.3 autonegotiation procedures. If this
setting is enabled, the LAN Speed and Duplex
Mode settings become read only.
Polycom recommends that you use autonegotiation
to avoid network issues.

Polycom, Inc. 55
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

LAN Speed Specifies whether to use 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or

1000 Mbps for the LAN speed. Note that the speed
(under General Settings in local interface)
you choose must be supported by the switch.

Duplex Mode Specifies the duplex mode to use. Note that the
Duplex mode you choose must be supported by the
(under General Settings in local interface)
switch.

Ignore Redirect Messages Enables the system to ignore ICMP redirect

messages.
(system web interface only)
You should enable this setting under most
circumstances.

ICMP Transmission Rate Limit (millisec) Specifies the minimum number of milliseconds
between transmitted packets. Enter a number
(system web interface only)
between 0 and 60000. The default value of 1000
signifies that the system sends 1 packet per
second. If you enter 0, the transmission rate limit is
disabled.
This setting applies only to “error” ICMP packets.
This setting has no effect on “informational” ICMP
packets, such as echo requests and replies.

Generate Destination Unreachable Messages Generates an ICMP Destination

(system web interface only) Unreachable message if a packet cannot be
delivered to its destination for reasons other than
network congestion.

Respond to Broadcast and Multicast Echo Sends an ICMP Echo Reply message in
Requests response to a broadcast or multicast Echo
(system web interface only) Request, which is not specifically addressed to the
system.

IPv6 DAD Transmit Count Specifies the number of Duplicate Address

Detection (DAD) messages to transmit before
(system web interface only)
acquiring an IPv6 address. The system sends DAD
messages to determine whether the address it is
requesting is already in use.
Select whether to transmit 0, 1, 2, or 3 DAD
requests for an IPv6 address.

Enable PC LAN Port This setting appears only for RealPresence Group
700 systems.
Specifies whether the PC LAN port is enabled on
the back of the system. Disable this setting for
increased security.

Enable LLDP Specifies whether Link Layer Discovery Protocol

(LLDP) is enabled.
(under General Settings in the system local
interface)

Polycom, Inc. 56
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Enable EAP/802.1X Specifies whether EAP/802.1X network access is

enabled. The following authentication protocols are
(under EAP 802.1X in the system local interface)
supported:
• EAP-MD5
• EAP-PEAPv0 (MSCHAPv2)
• EAP-TTLS
• EAP-TLS

EAP/802.1X Identity Specifies the system's identity used for 802.1X

authentication. This setting is available only when
(under EAP 802.1X in local interface)
EAP/802.1X is enabled. The field cannot be blank.

EAP/802.1X Password Specifies the system's password used for 802.1X

authentication. This setting is required when EAP-
(under EAP 802.1X in local interface)
MD5, EAP-PEAPv0 or EAP-TTLS is used.

Enable 802.1p/Q Specifies whether VLAN and link layer priorities are
enabled.
(under 802.1p/Q in local interface)

VLAN ID Specifies the identification of the Virtual LAN.This

setting is available only when 802.1p/Q is enabled.
The value can be any number from 1 to 4094.

Video Priority Sets the link layer priority of video traffic on the
LAN. Video traffic is any RTP traffic consisting of
video data and any associated RTCP traffic. This
setting is available only when 802.1p/Q is enabled.
The value can be any number from 0 to 7, although
6 and 7 are not recommended.

Audio Priority Sets the priority of audio traffic on the LAN. Audio
traffic is any RTP traffic consisting of audio data
and any associated RTCP traffic. This setting is
available only when 802.1p/Q is enabled. The
value can be any number from 0 to 7, although 6
and 7 are not recommended.

Polycom, Inc. 57
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Control Priority Sets the priority of control traffic on the LAN.

Control traffic is any traffic consisting of control
information associated with a call:
• 323—H.225.0 Call Signaling, H.225.0
RAS, H.245, Far End Camera Control
(FECC, which, for room systems, is the
Allow Other Participants in a Call to
Control Your Camera setting under
Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Video Inputs > General Camera
Settings)
• SIP—SIP Signaling, FECC, Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP)
This setting is available only when 802.1p/Q is
enabled. The value can be any number from 0 to 7,
although 6 and 7 are not recommended.

For more information about configuring LAN settings for Microsoft environments, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
Related Links
Configuring the Software on page 232

Configure IP Address (IPv4) Settings

You can configure IP address (IPv4) settings for RealPresence Group Series systems.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
2. Configure the following IPv4 settings on the LAN Properties screen.

Setting Description

IP Address Specifies how the system obtains an IP address.

• Obtain IP address automatically—
Select if the system gets an IP address
from a DHCP server on the LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if
the IP address will not be assigned
automatically.

Your IP Address is If the system obtains its IP address automatically,

this area displays the IP address currently assigned
to the system.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter
the IP address here.

Polycom, Inc. 58
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask currently assigned to the

system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a
subnet mask, enter one here.

Default Gateway Displays the gateway currently assigned to the

system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a
gateway IP address, enter one here.

Configure IP Address (IPv6) Settings

You can configure IP address (IPv6) settings for RealPresence Group Series systems.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
2. Configure the following IPv6 settings on the LAN Properties screen.

Setting Description

Enable IPv6 Enables the IPv6 network stack and makes the
IPv6 settings available.

IP Address Specifies how the system obtains an IP address.

• Obtain IP address automatically—
Select if the system gets an IP address
from a SLAAC or a DHCP server on the
LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if
the IP address will not be assigned
automatically.

Enable SLAAC Specifies whether to use stateless address

autoconfiguration (SLAAC) instead of DHCP to
automatically obtain an IP address.
Using DHCP to get the IP address requires a
DHCP server to get the address from the network,
but with SLAAC, existing routers help the system
get the IP address from the network.

Link-Local Displays the IPv6 address used for local

communication within a subnet.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP
Address Manually is selected.

Polycom, Inc. 59
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Site-Local Displays the IPv6 address used for communication

within the site or organization.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP
Address Manually is selected.

Global Address Displays the IPv6 internet address.

This setting is configurable only when Enter IP
Address Manually is selected.

Default Gateway Displays the gateway currently assigned to the

system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a
gateway IP address, enter one here.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP
Address Manually is selected.

Configure DNS Server Settings

You can configure DNS Server settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
2. Configure the following DNS Servers settings on the LAN Properties screen.

Setting Description

DNS Servers Displays the DNS servers currently assigned to the

system.
(in the local interface DNS and is not editable)
When the IPv4 or IPv6 address is obtained
automatically, the DNS Server addresses are also
obtained automatically. You can specify IPv4 DNS
server addresses only when the IPv4 or IPv6
address is entered manually.

Server 1 AddressServer 2 Address Server 3 If the system does not automatically obtain a DNS
Address Server 4 Address (read-only in the local server address, you can enter one here. Up to four
interface) DNS server addresses are allowed. If all four
address fields show addresses, you cannot add
another.

LLDP and LLDP-MED Support

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery
(LLDP-MED) are supported on RealPresence Group Series systems. LLDP is a vendor-neutral link layer
protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices to advertise their identity and capabilities
on an IEEE 802 local area network (LAN). This protocol runs over the data-link layer only, allowing

Polycom, Inc. 60
Configuring Network Settings

connected systems running different network layer protocols to discover information about each other.
LLDP-MED is an extension of LLDP.
Examples of applications that use information discovered by LLDP include:
• Network topology - A network management system (NMS) can accurately represent a map of the
network topology.
• Inventory - A management system can query a switch to learn about all the devices connected to
that switch. The LLDP protocol is formally specified in standards document IEEE 802.1AB.

LLMP-MED Information Discovery

LLDP-MED enables the following information discovery for RealPresence Group Series systems:
• Auto discovery of LAN policies enabling plug and play networking
• Inventory management, which allows network administrators to track their network devices.

Behavior When LLDP is Enabled

When LLDP is enabled on a RealPresence Group Series system, it discovers VLANs advertised by the
network switch and automatically configures the system for one of the VLANs. If the room system
discovers any of the following VLAN types in LLDP data from the network switch, the system
automatically configures itself for one of them. The chosen VLAN type is based on the order of
precedence, as follows:
• Video Conferencing VLAN
• Voice VLAN
• Voice Signaling VLAN
If none of the above VLAN types are found, the room system configures itself for the default or native
LAN of the switch port to which it is connected.
LLDP packets are transmitted regularly so that the network switch (and the neighboring endpoints) are
aware of the system presence on the network.

Enable LLDP Using a USB Storage Device

When you install a new RealPresence Group Series system on a network (or reset the system), you can
enable LLDP just before the setup wizard process using a USB storage device.

Procedure
1. Create a usbprovisioning.properties file with the following text string:
lldpenable=true
2. Copy the usbprovisioning.properties file to a USB storage device into the root folder.
3. Ensure that the system is powered off.
4. Insert the USB storage device into the system USB drive.
5. Power on the system.
After the room system detects the file, you cannot interact with the
system while it detects and places it into the VLAN network. Once the
LLDP detection process is complete, you can continue the setup wizard
process.

Polycom, Inc. 61
Configuring Network Settings

Enable LLDP in the Web Interface

If you have already used the setup wizard and do not want to reset your RealPresence Group Series
system to run the setup wizard again, you can configure LLDP in the system web interface.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
Select the check box at Enable LLDP and click Save.

IP Network Settings
You can configure the following IP network protocols in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
• H.323
• SIP

Configure H.323 Settings

If your network uses a gatekeeper, the RealPresence Group Series system can automatically register its
H.323 name and extension. This allows others to call the system by entering the H.323 name or
extension instead of the IP address.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings to
configure the following settings:

Setting Description

Enable IP H.323 Allows the H.323 settings to be displayed and

configured.

H.323 Name Specifies the name that gatekeepers and gateways

use to identify this system. You can make point-to-
point calls using H.323 names if both systems are
registered to a gatekeeper.
The H.323 Name is the same as the System
Name, unless you change it. Your organization's
dial plan might define the names you can use.

H.323 Extension (E.164) Lets users place point-to-point calls using the
extension if both systems are registered with a
gatekeeper, and specifies the extension that
gatekeepers and gateways use to identify this
system.
Your organization's dial plan might define the
extensions you can use.

Polycom, Inc. 62
Configuring Network Settings

Configure the System to Use a Gatekeeper

A gatekeeper manages functions such as bandwidth control and admission control. The gatekeeper also
handles address translation, which allows RealPresence Group Series system users to make calls using
static aliases instead of IP addresses that can change.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings.
2. Configure the following settings.

Setting Description

Use Gatekeeper Select this setting to use a gatekeeper. Gateways

and gatekeepers are required for calls between IP
and ISDN.
• Off—Calls do not use a gatekeeper.
• Auto—System attempts to automatically
find an available gatekeeper.
• Specify—Calls use the specified
gatekeeper. This setting must be
selected to enable H.235 Annex D
Authentication.
When you select a setting other than Off, the
Registration Status is displayed below the Enable
IP H.323 setting.

Require Authentication Enables support for H.235 Annex D Authentication.

When H.235 Annex D Authentication is enabled,
the H.323 gatekeeper ensures that only trusted H.
323 endpoints are allowed to access the
gatekeeper.
This setting is available when Use Gatekeeper is
set to Specify.

User Name When authentication is required, specifies the user

name for authentication with H.235 Annex D.

Enter Password When authentication is required, specifies the

password for authentication with H.235 Annex D.

Current Gatekeeper IP Address If you chose Off for the Use Gatekeeper field, the
Current Gatekeeper IP Address field is not
displayed.
Displays the IP address that the gatekeeper is
currently using.

Polycom, Inc. 63
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Primary Gatekeeper IP Address • If you chose Off for the Use

Gatekeeper field, the Primary
Gatekeeper IP Address field is not
displayed.
• If you chose to use an automatically
selected gatekeeper, this area displays
the gatekeeper's IP address.
• If you chose to specify a gatekeeper,
enter the gatekeeper's IP address or
name (for example, 10.11.12.13 or
gatekeeper.companyname.usa.co
m).
The primary gatekeeper IP address contains the
IPv4 address the system registers with. As part of
the gatekeeper registration process, the
gatekeeper might return alternate gatekeepers. If
communication with the primary gatekeeper is lost,
the system registers with the alternate gatekeeper
but continues to poll the primary gatekeeper. If the
system reestablishes communications with the
primary gatekeeper, the system unregisters from
the alternate gatekeeper and reregisters with the
primary gatekeeper.

SIP Settings
If your network supports the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), you can use SIP to connect IP calls on your
RealPresence Group Series system.
The SIP protocol has been widely adapted for voice over IP communications and basic video
conferencing; however, many of the video conferencing capabilities are not yet standardized. Many
capabilities also depend on the SIP server.
The following are examples of features that are not supported using SIP:
• Cascaded multipoint in SIP calls.
• Meeting passwords. If you set a meeting password, SIP endpoints will be unable to dial in to a
multipoint call.
For more information about SIP compatibility issues, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Release Notes .

Configure SIP Settings

You can configure SIP settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
2. Configure the following settings.

Polycom, Inc. 64
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Enable SIP Allows the SIP settings to be displayed and

configured.

Enable AS-SIP Allows the SIP settings to be displayed and

configured.

SIP Server Configuration Specifies whether to automatically or manually set

the SIP server's IP address.
If you select Auto, the Transport Protocol,
Registrar Server, and Proxy Server settings cannot
be edited. If you select Specify, those settings are
editable.

Transport Protocol Indicates the protocol the system uses for SIP
signaling. The SIP network infrastructure
determines which protocol is required for the room
system.
Auto—Enables an automatic negotiation of
protocols in the following order: TLS, TCP, UDP.
This is the recommended setting for most
environments.
TCP—Provides reliable transport via TCP for SIP
signaling.
UDP—Provides best-effort transport via UDP for
SIP signaling.
TLS—Provides secure communication of the SIP
signaling. TLS is available only when the system is
registered with a SIP server that supports TLS.
When you choose this setting, the system ignores
TCP/UDP port 5060. Select TLS if you want to
encrypt SVC calls.

Force Connection Reuse This setting is disabled by default (recommended).

When disabled, it causes the system to use an
ephemeral source port for all outgoing SIP
messages. When enabled, it causes the system to
use the active SIP listening port as the source port
(5060 or 5061, depending on the negotiated SIP
transport protocol in use). This can be useful to
establish correct operation with remote SIP peer
devices, which require that the source port match
the contact port in SIP messages.

Polycom, Inc. 65
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

BFCP Transport Preference Controls the negotiation behavior for content

sharing using the Binary Floor Control Protocol
(BFCP). Establishes the relationship between the
floor control server and its clients, while the
available settings determine how network traffic
flows between the server and clients.
TCP is typically known as the older, slightly slower,
and more reliable method, but is not supported
under some circumstances, such as with session
border controllers (SBCs).
Prefer UDP—Starts resource sharing using UDP,
but fall back to TCP if needed. This is the default
value when SIP is enabled.
Prefer TCP—Starts resource sharing using TCP,
but fall back to UDP if needed.
UDP Only—Shares resources only through UDP. If
UDP is unavailable, content sharing in a separate
video stream is not available.
TCP Only—Shares resources only through TCP. If
TCP is unavailable, content sharing in a separate
video stream is not available.

Sign-in Address Specifies the SIP address or SIP name of the

system, for example,
[email protected]. If you
leave this field blank, the system's IP address is
used for authentication.

User Name Specifies the user name to use for authentication

when registering with a SIP Registrar Server, for
example, marySmith. If the SIP proxy requires
authentication, this field and the password cannot
be blank.

Password Specifies the password associated with the User

Name used to authenticate the system to the
Registrar Server. The password can be up to 47
characters in length.

Polycom, Inc. 66
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Registrar Server Specifies the IP address or DNS name of the SIP

Registrar Server. The address can be specified as
either an IP address or a DNS fully qualified
domain name (FQDN). If registering a remote
system with an Edge Server, use the FQDN of the
edge server.
By default for TCP, the SIP signaling is sent to port
5060 on the registrar server. By default for TLS, the
SIP signaling is sent to port 5061 on the registrar
server.
Enter the address and port using the following
format:
• <IP_Address>:<Port>
• <IP_Address> can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address, or a DNS FQDN such as
servername.company.com:6050.
Syntax Examples:
• To use the default port for the protocol
you have selected: 10.11.12.13
• To specify a different TCP or UDP port:
10.11.12.13:5071

Proxy Server Specifies the DNS FQDN or IP address of the SIP

Proxy Server. If you leave this field blank, the
address of the Registrar Server is used. If you
leave both the SIP Registrar Server and Proxy
Server fields blank, no Proxy Server is used.
By default for TCP, the SIP signaling is sent to port
5060 on the proxy server. By default for TLS, the
SIP signaling is sent to port 5061 on the proxy
server.
The syntax used for this field is the same as for the
Registrar Server field.

Registrar Server Type Specifies the registrar server type. Select

Microsoft or Unknown.

If you have entered specific server addresses into the address fields Registrar server and Proxy server at
Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP, before you change the SIP Server Configuration setting
from Specify to Auto, you must clear the address fields and then click Save. If the server fields are not
cleared, SIP registration might fail.
For more information about this and other Microsoft interoperability considerations, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.

Configuring SIP Settings for Integration with the Telepresence Interoperability

Protocol (TIP)
When SIP is enabled on a RealPresence Group Series system that has the TIP option key code, the
system can interoperate with TIP endpoints. You cannot configure TIP without purchasing and installing a

Polycom, Inc. 67
Configuring Network Settings

Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP) option key code. For more information about Polycom
support for the TIP protocol, refer to Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide for Cisco
Environments at Polycom Support.

RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support

Real-time video (RTV) provides higher resolutions during video calls when integrated with Skype for
Business Server 2015. To use RTV in a Skype-hosted conference, you must have the Skype for Business
Interoperability License key enabled on your RealPresence Group Series system.
For more information about configuring your Skype for Business Server 2015 video settings for RTV, refer
to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at
Polycom Support.

AS-SIP Settings
RealPresence Group Series systems support the Assured Services Session Initiation Protocol (AS-SIP),
as defined by the Unified Capabilities Requirements (UCR) technical standards for telecommunication
switching equipment developed by the DoD and Defense Information Systems Agency (DISA). AS-SIP is
the term used to describe the DoD version of SIP used as part of its initiative to build a reliable and
secure IP communications network. AS-SIP incorporates Multilevel Precedence and Preemption, Secure
Signaling and Media, Quality of Service (QoS), and IPv6 support.

Enable the AS-SIP Setting

The AS-SIP settings define service codes, network domains, and precedence levels for MLPP. You must
enable AS-SIP settings on your RealPresence Group Series system before you can configure the settings
for MLPP.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
2. Select the Enable AS-SIP setting.

Configure AS-SIP Settings for MLPP

You can configure AS-SIP settings for MLPP in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > AS-SIP.
2. Configure the following settings.

Setting Description

Service Code Defines one or more of the US Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) N11 special
services dialing codes or worldwide special dialing
codes.

Polycom, Inc. 68
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Outbound Precedence Call Defaults Defines the Default Domain (network domain) and
the Default Precedence level used when dialing a
call.

MLPP Network Domains Defines the MLPP network domains your network
uses.

Add an AS-SIP Service Code

You can add an AS-SIP service code in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. To add a Service Code, click .
2. In the text field of the new line that appears, enter the numbers.
3. Click another line in the list to create the service code.

Delete an AS-SIP Service Code

You can delete an AS-SIP service code in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
You can delete an AS-SIP service code in the system web interface.

Procedure
» Click .

Defining AS-SIP Outbound Precedence Call Defaults

You can define AS-SIP outbound precedence call default settings for your RealPresence Group Series
system.
To define AS-SIP outbound precedence call defaults:
1. Select the Default Domain to use for outbound calls, that is, the default network domain.
RealPresence Group systems come preconfigured for use on the uc and dsn network domains,
but you can add others. You can choose any defined network domain as the default domain to use
for outbound calls. The network domains uc and dsn are preconfigured and uc is the default
network domain for this setting.
2. Select the Default Precedence to use for outbound calls.This setting accepts one of the defined
precedence levels from the configured default domain. The setting defaults to ROUTINE, which is
the lowest precedence level defined in the default network domain uc.
Although uc and dsn are preconfigured on the system, you can edit their settings or create other
network domains.

Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)

Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP) provides call prioritization over network resources and far-
end system access. Authorized users place precedence calls to elevate the priority of the call through the

Polycom, Inc. 69
Configuring Network Settings

AS-SIP network. RealPresence Group Series systems already in a call can be preempted by an incoming
call with a higher priority. In addition, precedence call signaling and media packets are marked with
DSCP values associated with the precedence level to ensure network QoS commensurate with the call
precedence level.
Systems provide support for placing precedence calls through the use of precedence prefix codes in the
dial string. Calls can be placed at any of the precedence levels defined within the network domain
configured as the default domain for outbound calls. The default network domains uc and dsn define five
precedence levels: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, or Flash Override. The system signals the
precedence level according to the standards in UCR 2008, Change 3, and provides appropriate feedback
to the user placing the call.
Incoming calls are announced with the appropriate precedence level, and the authorized user can select
one of the following ways to handle the call:
• Answer directly
• Join into conference
• Hang up current call and answer

Define MLPP Network Domains

You can define MLPP network domain names for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. To edit a domain, click .
2. If needed, edit the Network Domain Name or change the Allow Incoming Calls setting.
Disabling the Allow Incoming Calls setting causes the system to reject any calls from this
network domain.
3. Select a Precedence Level.
You can define a total of 10 precedence levels.
4. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

Precedence Level The name associated with the precedence level.

You can click Add Precedence Level to create a
level and you can click to remove a level.

Dial Digit A single numeric field (0-9) that represents the

dialing digit used to indicate the requested call
precedence.
The precedence dial string is indicated by a leading
'9' followed by the Dial Digit, followed by the 7- or
10-digit number.

Resource Priority Header Represents the value in the SIP Resource Priority
Header used to signal the precedence level. This
field accepts a single UTF-8 character.

Polycom, Inc. 70
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Audio DSCP Indicates the DSCP value used for audio RTP/
SRTP packets sent in calls using this precedence
level. The field accepts an integer value range from
0-63.

Video DSCP Indicates the DSCP value used for video RTP/
SRTP packets sent in calls using this precedence
level. The field accepts an integer value range from
0-63.

5. Click Save.

Add an MLPP Network Domain

You can add an MLPP network domain for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. To add a network domain, click and then configure the same settings for the new network
domain in the define MLPP network domains task above.
2. Click Save when you are finished configuring the settings to save your changes.

Alternative Network Address Type (ANAT)

ANAT signaling is used for IPv4 and IPv6 support in AS-SIP and is only useful in AS-SIP environments.
When AS-SIP is enabled, and dual stack (IPV4 and IPV6) is enabled, ANAT signaling is enabled.
Consider the following best practices when you enable AS-SIP on a RealPresence Group Series system:
• Be sure to register the system only to AS-SIP-aware proxy/registrar servers, because AS-SIP
signaling can be incompatible with other types of proxy/registrar servers.
• If the Cisco Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP) software option is installed, turn off TIP
signaling on the RealPresence Group Series endpoint by going to Admin Settings > Network >
Dialing Preference > Dialing Options and disabling the TIP setting. TIP signaling is incompatible
with AS-SIP signaling.

Configure Network Quality Settings

You can specify how your RealPresence Group Series system responds to network quality issues by
configuring the Network Quality settings; these settings control how your network handles IP packets
during video calls.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Network Quality.
2. Configure the following settings.

Polycom, Inc. 71
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Automatically Adjust People/Content Specifies whether the system should automatically

Bandwidth adjust the bandwidth necessary for the People
stream or Content stream depending on the relative
complexity of the people video, content video, or
both. If this setting is enabled, the Quality
Preference setting is not available.

Quality Preference Specifies which stream has precedence when

attempting to compensate for network loss:
• Both People and Content streams
• People streams
• Content streams
The stream defined to have precedence
experiences less quality degradation during
network loss compensation than the stream not
having precedence. Choosing Both People and
Content streams means that both streams
experience roughly equal degradation.
This setting is not available when the
Automatically Adjust People/Content
Bandwidth setting is enabled.

Type of Service Specifies your service type and lets you choose
how to set the priority of IP packets sent to the
system for video, audio, FECC, and OA&M:
• IP Precedence—Represents the priority
of IP packets sent to the system. The
value can be between 0 and 7.
• DiffServ—Represents a priority level
between 0 and 63.
Note: If AS-SIP is enabled and you select
DiffServ, the DSCP values for audio and video
defined for the negotiated call precedence level in
the default network domain that was configured for
outbound calls override the Video and Audio
settings defined on this screen of the system web
interface. If you have not enabled AS-SIP, the
Video and Audio values defined here are used.

Video Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for

video RTP traffic and associated RTCP traffic.

Audio Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for

audio RTP traffic and associated RTCP traffic.

Polycom, Inc. 72
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Control Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for

control traffic on any of the following channels:
• 323—H.225.0 Call Signaling, H.225.0
RAS, H.245, Far End Camera Control
(FECC, which, for room systems, is the
Allow Other Participants in a Call to
Control Your Camera setting under
Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Video Inputs > General Camera
Settings)
• SIP—SIP Signaling, FECC, Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP)

OA&M Specifies the IP Precedence or Diffserv value for

traffic not related to video, audio, or FECC.

Maximum Transmission Unit Size Specifies whether to use the default Maximum
Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IP calls or select
a maximize size.

Maximum Transmission Unit Size Bytes Specifies the MTU size, in bytes, used in IP calls. If
the video becomes blocky or network errors occur,
packets might be too large; decrease the MTU. If
the network is burdened with unnecessary
overhead, packets might be too small; increase the
MTU.

Enable Lost Packet Recovery Allows the system to use LPR (Lost Packet
Recovery) if packet loss occurs. For more details.

Enable RSVP Allows the system to use Resource Reservation

Setup Protocol (RSVP) to request that routers
reserve bandwidth along an IP connection path.
Both the near site and far site must support RSVP
in order for reservation requests to be made to
routers on the connection path.

Dynamic Bandwidth Specifies whether to let the system automatically

find the optimum call rate for a call.

MRC Bandwidth Allocation Adjusts media bit stream bandwidth, reducing

packet loss. Specifically designed for SVC-based
calls.

Maximum Transmit Bandwidth Specifies the maximum transmit call rate between
64 kbps and the system's maximum line rate. This
setting can be useful when the system is connected
to the network using an access technology that
provides different transmit and receive bandwidth
(such as cable or DSL access).

Polycom, Inc. 73
Configuring Network Settings

Setting Description

Maximum Receive Bandwidth Specifies the maximum receive call rate between
64 kbps and the system's maximum line rate. This
setting can be useful when the system is connected
to the network using an access technology that
provides different transmit and receive bandwidth
(such as cable or DSL access).

Note: When a RealPresence Group 500 or RealPresence Group 700 system is hosting a multipoint call,
the total call rate for all sites in the call is 6 Mbps.

Related Links
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings on page 74
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings on page 74

Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings

You can handle video quality issues on your RealPresence Group Series system by enabling the Enable
Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) setting, the Dynamic Bandwidth setting, or both settings.
If both settings are enabled, Dynamic Bandwidth adjusts the video rate to reduce packet loss to 3% or
less. When packet loss drops to 3% or less, LPR cleans up the video image on your monitor. The
additional processing power required might cause the video rate to drop while the system is using LPR. If
this happens, the Call Statistics screen shows the Video Rate Used as lower than the Video Rate. If
Packet Loss is 0 for at least 10 minutes, LPR stops operating and the Video Rate Used increases to
match the Video Rate.
If only LPR is enabled and the system detects packet loss, LPR attempts to clean the image but the video
rate is not adjusted. If only Dynamic Bandwidth is enabled and the system detects packet loss of 3% or
more, the video rate is adjusted but LPR does not clean the image.
You can view percent Packet Loss, Video Rate, and Video Rate Used on the Call Statistics screen.
Related Links
Configure Network Quality Settings on page 71
Configure Network Quality Settings on page 71
General Troubleshooting on page 261

Polycom, Inc. 74
Securing the System
Topics:

• Configure Security Profiles

• Managing System Access
• Detecting Intrusions
• View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List
• Secure API Access
• Port Lockout
• Whitelist
• Encryption
• System Configuration with a Firewall or NAT
• Security Certificates
• Set Up a Security Banner
• Set a Meeting Password
• Visual Security Classification
• Enable Room and Call Monitoring

For detailed information about configuring security settings, see the following topics.

Configure Security Profiles

System security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your RealPresence Group Series
system. The security profile your system uses provides the basis for secure access within the system and
determines how users can operate the system.
The security profile is selected during system setup with the setup wizard, but this setting is configurable
through Admin Settings in the system web interface. The default values and ability to change some
settings are affected by which security profile your system uses.
Consider each security profile as a set of default values for all configuration settings that affect product
security and that achieves some level of base product security. You can choose from four profiles—
Maximum, High, Medium and Low. Each profile provides a basic security posture, ranging from the most
secure to the least secure, which allows you to select a level of security that is appropriate for the
deployment of the system in your environment.
Because you can change most of the individual configuration settings regardless of the security profile
you chose, Polycom recommends that you select the profile that is closest to the level of security you
want in your environment and then customize the settings from there, as needed. In the higher profiles,
however, some settings are either not changeable at all or have restricted ranges of values.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2. Determine which of the following Security Profile settings your system uses.

Polycom, Inc. 75
Securing the System

Setting Description

Maximum Configures the system to be compliant with U.S.

DoD security requirements. Some configuration
settings are made read-only in this profile; other
settings have restricted ranges of values. This
profile represents the highest level of security.

High Configures the system with most security controls

enabled, but does not mandate the use of some
controls that are mandated in Maximum profile.
Some configuration settings are not changeable in
this profile; other settings have restricted ranges of
values. This profile is most appropriate for
enterprise deployments that demand high security.

Medium Configures the system with some of the basic

security controls enabled, but not all. Most settings
are changeable in this profile.

Low Configures the system with no mandated security

controls, although all controls can be enabled as
needed. This is the default profile.

3. To change the profile setting, select the Security Profile you want to use.
You can increase or decrease the level of security.
4. Follow the prompts in the Security Profile Change wizard.
Related Links
Security Profile Default Settings on page 302
The system security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your system. Default settings for
each security profile type vary. See the following topics for details.
Changing Medium Security Profile Default Values on page 336

Maximum Security Profile Requires Default Value Changes

When you configure the RealPresence Group Series system to use the Maximum Security Profile, the
system forces you to change the following settings from their default values:
• Admin account User Id
• User account User Id
• Admin room password
• Admin remote access password
• User room password
• User remote access password

Managing System Access

An administrator can configure RealPresence Group Series systems to grant access using network
accounts that are authenticated through an Active Directory (AD) server such as the Microsoft Active

Polycom, Inc. 76
Securing the System

Directory server. In this case, the account information is stored on the AD server and not on the room
system. The AD administrator assigns accounts to AD groups, one for the room system admin access
and one for user access. For this reason, external authentication is also referred to as Active Directory
authentication.
The room system administrator configures the external authentication settings on the system to specify
the address of an AD Server for authenticating user logins, AD group for user access, and AD group for
admin access on the room system. The system can map only one Active Directory group to a given role.
Users can enter their network account credentials to access the system on the following interfaces:
• Web interface (admin access only)
• Local interface (user and admin role accounts when Require Login for System Access is
enabled; admin accounts when admin-only areas of the local interface are accessed)
When External Authentication is enabled in PKI environments where Always Validate Peer Certificates
from Server is enabled on the system, configure the Active Directory Server Address on the system using
the address information that is in the Active Directory Server identity certificate. This allows the system to
validate the identity certificate. As an example, if the Active Directory Server identity certificate contains its
DNS name only, and no specific IP address, configuring the Active Directory Server Address on the
system using the server's IP address results in certificate validation failure, and consequently
authentication failure. The system configuration would have to specify the server by DNS name, in this
case, to successfully match the server certificate data.
The system local user account is disabled when Enable Active Directory External Authentication is
enabled. The admin account is active and usable, however.

Enable External Authentication

You can enable external authentication for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security >
Authentication.
2. Configure these settings on the Authentication screen, then click Save.

Setting Description

Enable Active Directory External Authentication Specifies whether to authenticate users through the
Active Directory server. When Active Directory
authentication is enabled, users are allowed to log
in with their network account credentials, using this
format:
domain\user
With this format, users can have accounts on
multiple domains.

Polycom, Inc. 77
Securing the System

Setting Description

Active Directory Server Address Specifies the DNS fully qualified domain name
(FQDN) or IP address of the Active Directory server
(ADS). If you are using subdomains, append port
number 3268 as follows:
ad.domain.com:3268
Note: Systems can use the RealPresence
Resource Manager system as an ADS. If one is
deployed in your environment, enter its address
here. Otherwise, enter the address of an ADS.

Active Directory Admin Group Specifies the Active Directory group whose
members should have admin access to the system.
This name must exactly match the name in the
ADS for authentication to succeed.

Active Directory User Group Specifies the Active Directory group whose
members should have user access to the system.
This name must exactly match the name in the
ADS for authentication to succeed.

3. If external authentication is not active after completing these steps, go to Admin Settings >
Network > LAN Properties > LAN Options and ensure that the Domain Name setting contains
the name of your Active Directory domain.
Use the local system admin credentials to pair the system with a touch device, such as the RealPresence
Touch.

Configure Local Access

You can configure local access so that users can reach a RealPresence Group Series system through
the local interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Login
Credentials.
2. Configure the following settings.
The order in which the settings are displayed differs between the interfaces.

Setting Description

Admin ID Specifies the ID for the administrator account. The

default Admin ID is admin.
Admin IDs are not case sensitive.

Polycom, Inc. 78
Securing the System

Setting Description

Admin Room Password Specifies the password for the local administrator
account used when logging in to the system locally.
When this password is set, you must enter it to
configure the system Admin Settings using the
remote control. The password cannot contain
spaces or be more than 40 characters. Passwords
are case sensitive.
The default Admin Room Password is the 14-digit
system serial number from the System
Information screen or the back of the system.

Use Room Password for Remote Access Specifies whether the room password used for
local login is also used for the remote login. When
this setting is disabled, the remote access
password settings are displayed.

Admin Remote Access Password Specifies the password for the local administrator
account used when logging in to the system
remotely using the system web interface or a telnet
session.
When this password is set, you must enter it to
update the software or manage the system from a
computer. The password cannot contain spaces or
more than 40 characters.

Require User Login for System Access Specifies whether the system automatically
prompts users to log in when the system comes out
of sleep mode or completes the startup process.
Enabling this setting requires a login to use the
local interface.
Note: This setting is supported for systems only
and is not supported for the Polycom touch
devices.

User ID Specifies the ID for the user account. The default

User ID is user.
User IDs are not case sensitive.

User Room Password Specifies the password for the local user account
used when logging in to the system locally.
The password cannot contain spaces or more than
40 characters. Passwords are case sensitive.

User Remote Access Password Specifies the password for the local user account
used when logging in to the system remotely.
The password cannot contain spaces or more than
40 characters. Passwords are case sensitive.

Polycom, Inc. 79
Securing the System

Configure Remote Access

You can configure, manage, and monitor Polycom systems from a computer using the RealPresence
Group Series system web interface. You can also use RealPresence Resource Manager, SNMP, or the
API commands.
• The system web interface requires only a web browser.
• RealPresence Resource Manager requires the management application to be installed on your
network.
• SNMP requires network management software on your network management station.
For more information about the API commands, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Integrator Reference Guide.
Remote access means reaching a system in some way other than through the local interface, such as by
using the web, a serial port, or telnet. A session is an instance of a user connected to the system through
one of these interfaces. Sessions include an indication of how you are logged on to the system, such as
the local interface, web interface, telnet, or serial API.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2. Configure the following settings.
Not all settings are available on both interfaces. The visibility of some settings is affected by the
type of security profile your system uses.

Setting Description

Enable Network Intrusion Detection System Activates the ability to log entries to the security log
(NIDS) when the system detects a possible network
intrusion. This setting is enabled or disabled by
(system web interface only)
default based on the security profile, but can be
changed.

Enable Web Access Specifies whether to allow remote access to the

system by using the system web interface.

Allow Access to User Settings Specifies whether the User Settings screen is
accessible to users through the local interface.

Restrict to HTTPS Specifies that the web server is accessible only

over a secure HTTPS port. Enabling this setting
closes the HTTP port and so disables redirects of
sessions from HTTP to HTTPS (all access must be
initiated as HTTPS).

Polycom, Inc. 80
Securing the System

Setting Description

Web Access Port (HTTP) Specifies the port to use when accessing the
system using the system web interface using
HTTP.
If you change this from the default (port 80), specify
a port number of 1025 or higher, and make sure
the port is not already in use. You will need to
include the port number with the IP address when
you use the system web interface to access the
system. This makes unauthorized access more
difficult.
If Restrict to HTTPS is enabled, the Web Access
Port setting is unavailable.

Enable Telnet Access Specifies whether to allow remote access to the

system by telnet.

Enable SSH Access Specifies whether to allow SSH access.

API Port Specifies the port for API access. Select port 23 or
24.
If you set the API port to port 23, the diagnostics
port changes to port 24.

Enable Diagnostics Port Idle Session Timeout Specifies whether to allow the diagnostics port to
time out at the configured time interval or not. The
timeout setting is set under Idle Session Timeout
in Minutes.

Enable API Port Idle Session Timeout Specifies whether to allow the API port to time out
at the configured time interval or not. The timeout
setting is set under Idle Session Timeout in
Minutes.

Enable SNMP Access Specifies whether to allow remote access to the

system by SNMP.

Allow Video Display on Web Specifies whether you can use the system web
interface to view the room where the system is
(local interface only)
located, or video of calls in which the system
participates.
Note: This feature activates both near site and far
site video displays in Web Director.

Lock Port after Failed Logins Temporarily locks the login port after a configurable
number of unsuccessful login attempts have been
made.

Enable Whitelist Specifies whether to enable a whitelist.

Polycom, Inc. 81
Securing the System

Setting Description

Idle Session Timeout in Minutes Specifies the number of minutes your system web
interface session can be idle before the session
(system web interface only)
times out.

Maximum Number of Active Sessions Specifies the maximum number of users who can
be logged in to and using your system through
(system web interface only)
telnet or the system web interface at the same
time.

Related Links
Port Lockout on page 89
Secure API Access on page 87
Detecting Intrusions on page 86

Local Accounts
Managing access to the RealPresence Group Series system is essential for security. Two roles are
supported for accessing the system, an admin role and a user role. Admins can perform administrator
activities such as changing configuration, as well as user activities such as placing and answering calls.
Users can perform only user-type activities.
Two local accounts are provided, one for the user role (by default named user) and one for the admin
role (by default named admin). The IDs and passwords for these local accounts are stored on the system
itself.

Configure Password Policy Settings

You can configure password policies for Admin, User, Meeting, Remote Access, and SNMP passwords.
These password settings can ensure that strong passwords are used. Polycom strongly recommends that
you create an Admin password for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Password
Requirements.
2. Configure the following settings for Admin Room, User Room, Meeting, Remote Access, or
SNMP passwords.
Click Save.

Setting Description

Minimum Length Specifies the minimum number of characters

required for a valid password.

Require Lowercase Letters Specifies whether a valid password must contain

one or more lowercase letters.

Require Uppercase Letters Specifies whether a valid password must contain

one or more uppercase letters.

Polycom, Inc. 82
Securing the System

Setting Description

Require Numbers Specifies whether a valid password must contain

one or more numbers.

Require Special Characters Specifies whether a valid password must contain

one or more special characters. Supported
characters include:@ - _ ! ; $ , \ / & . # *

Reject Previous Passwords Specifies the number of most recent passwords

that cannot be reused. If set to Off, all previous
passwords can be reused.

Minimum Password Age in Days Specifies the minimum number of days that must
pass before the password can be changed.

Maximum Password Age in Days Specifies the maximum number of days that can
pass before the password must be changed.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting and
SNMP passwords.

Minimum Changed Characters Specifies the number of characters that must be

different or change position in a new password. If
this is set to 3, 123abc can change to 345cde
but not to 234bcd.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting and
SNMP passwords.

Maximum Consecutive Repeated Characters Specifies the maximum number of consecutive

repeated characters in a valid password. If this is
set to 3, aaa123 is a valid password but
aaaa123 is not.

Password Expiration Warning Specifies how many days in advance the system
displays a warning that the password will soon
expire, if a maximum password age is set.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting and
SNMP passwords.

Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Specifies whether the associated ID or the reverse
of the ID can be part of a valid password. If this
setting is enabled and the ID is admin, passwords
admin and nimda are allowed.
Note: This setting is unavailable for Meeting
passwords.

Changes to most password policy settings do not take effect until the next time the password is changed.
Changes take effect immediately for Minimum Password Age in Days, Maximum Password Age in
Days, and Password Expiration Warning. Changing Minimum Length from Off to some other value
also takes effect immediately.

Polycom, Inc. 83
Securing the System

Preventing Account Unauthorized System Access

RealPresence Group Series systems provide access controls that prevent unauthorized use. One way
someone might try to discover valid user names and passwords is by exhaustively attempting to log in,
varying the user name and password data in a programmatic way until discovering a combination that
succeeds. Such a method is called a “brute-force” attack.
To mitigate the risk of such an attack, two access control mechanisms are available on the system. The
first type of access control, account lockout, protects local accounts from being vulnerable to brute-force
attacks, while the second, port lockout, protects login ports themselves from being vulnerable to brute-
force attacks.
Account lockout temporarily locks a local account from accepting logins after a configurable number of
unsuccessful attempts to log in to that account. It protects only the local system's Admin and User local
accounts. When external authentication is used, the Active Directory Server protects Active Directory
accounts.
The systems provide separate account lockout controls for each of their local accounts, which are named
Admin and User. The account lock can be invoked due to failed logins on any of the following login ports:
• Local interface
• Web interface
• Telnet interface
For examples of how the account lockout feature works, see the following scenarios.
• Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Lock Admin Account after
Failed Logins is set to 4.
• Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Admin Account Lock
Duration is set to 1 Minute.
• Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Reset Admin Account
Lock After is set to 1 Hour.
Scenario 1 - Admin account locked due to excessive failed logins
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the system web interface, and the same or another
user fails to log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have
been made to the Admin account so far. If the next attempt to log in to the Admin account on any login
port is unsuccessful, which would mean 4 failed logins, further attempts to access the Admin account are
locked out for 1 Minute (the expiration of the Admin Account Lock Duration period). After the 1 Minute
account lock duration has past, logins will once again be allowed. As this example illustrates, the failed
login attempts made to an account accumulate across any login port.
Scenario 2 - Successful login resets the failed login attempts counter
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the system web interface, and the same or another
user fails to log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have
been made to the Admin account so far. If the next login attempt is successful, then the failed login
attempts counter for the Admin account is reset to zero and now once again 4 failed attempts can be
made before the Admin account would be locked.
Scenario 3 - Failed attempts counter resets after failed login window closes
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the system web interface, and the same or another
user fails to log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have
been made to the Admin account so far. If no more failed attempts are made within 1 Hour of the first
failed attempt (which is the value of the Reset Admin Account Lock Counter After setting), the failed

Polycom, Inc. 84
Securing the System

login attempts counter for the Admin account is reset to zero, and 4 failed attempts are allowed again
before the Admin account is locked.

Configure Account Lockout

You can configure account lockout to prevent unauthorized access on your RealPresence Group Series
system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account
Lockout.
2. Configure these settings for the appropriate account on the Account Lockout screen, then click
Save.
You can configure account lock for the admin account, user account, or both accounts.

Setting Description

Lock Admin/User Account after Failed Logins Specifies the number of failed login attempts
allowed before the system locks the account. If set
to Off, the system does not lock the account due to
failed login attempts.

Admin/User Account Lock Duration Specifies the amount of time that the account
remains locked due to failed login attempts. After
this time period has expired, the failed login
attempts counter is reset to zero and logins to the
account are once again allowed.

Reset Admin/User Account Lock Counter After Specifies the “failed login window” period of time,
starting with the first failed login attempt, during
which subsequent failed login attempts will be
counted against the maximum number allowed
(Lock Admin/User Account after Failed Logins).
If the number of failed login attempts made during
this window does not reach the maximum number
allowed, the failed login attempts counter is reset to
zero at the end of this window.
Note: The failed login attempts counter is always
reset to zero anytime a user successfully logs in.

Related Links
Port Lockout on page 89

Enable Access to User Settings

You might want to enable user access to User Settings in the RealPresence Group Series system local
interface. These settings allow users to control some aspects of cameras and meetings; for example, to
allow other people in a call to control your camera, or to enable auto answer for point-to-point or
multipoint calls.
User Settings contains the following selections, most of which are also available to administrators under
Admin Settings. These settings are not available in the Maximum Security Profile unless otherwise
noted.

Polycom, Inc. 85
Securing the System

• Meeting Password (available in the Maximum Security Profile)

• Backlight Compensation (available in the Maximum Security Profile)
• Mute Auto-Answer Calls
• Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera
• Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
• Auto Answer Multipoint Video
• Allow Video Display on Web

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2. Enable the Allow Access to User Settings setting.
If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control, selecting Allow
Access to User Settings makes the RealPresence Group Series system tab available on the Touch
Control User Settings screen.
Related Links
Port Lockout on page 89
Secure API Access on page 87

Restrict Access to User and Administrative Settings

You can restrict access to User Settings and Administration settings in the RealPresence Group Series
system local interface, making them available only through the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings > Home Screen Icons, disable
the Show Icons on the Home Screen setting.
2. Click Save.
If the following conditions are met, the ability to show icons is automatically enabled and read only:
• Speed Dial is disabled in the Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings.
• The Calendar is not displayed because the system is not connected to the Microsoft Exchange
Server.
• Remote access through the web, telnet, and SNMP are disabled in Security > Global Security >
Access.

Detecting Intrusions
When the RealPresence Group Series system detects a possible network intrusion, it logs an entry to the
security log. This logging is controlled by the Enable Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS)
setting. The security log prefix identifies the type of packet detected, as shown in the following table.

Prefix Packet Type

SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_tcp Packet that attempts to connect or probe a closed TCP

port

Polycom, Inc. 86
Securing the System

Prefix Packet Type

SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_udp Packet that probes a closed UDP port

SECURITY: NIDS/invalid_tcp TCP packet in an invalid state

SECURITY: NIDS/invalid_icmp ICMP or ICMPv6 packet in an invalid state

SECURITY: NIDS/unknown Packet with an unknown protocol number in the IP

header

SECURITY: NIDS/flood Stream of ICMP or ICMPv6 ping requests or TCP

connections to an opened TCP port

Following the message prefix, the security log entry includes the timestamp and the IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP,
or ICMPv6 headers. For example, the following security log entry shows an “unknown_udp” intrusion:

2009-05-08 21:32:52 WARNING kernel: SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_udp IN=eth0

OUT= MAC=00:e0:db:08:9a:ff:00:19:aa:da:11:c3:08:00 SRC=172.18.1.80
DST=172.18.1.170 LEN=28 TOS=0x00 PREC=0x00 TTL=63 ID=22458 PROTO=UDP
SPT=1450 DPT=7788 LEN=8

For information on the Enable Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS) setting, see the following
topic.
Related Links
Configure Remote Access on page 80

View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List

You can view a sessions list to see information about everyone logged in to a RealPresence Group
Series system including:
• Type of connection, for example, Web
• ID associated with the session, typically Admin or User
• Remote IP address (addresses of people logged in to the system from their computers)

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > Sessions.

Secure API Access

You can access a RealPresence Group Series system using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol. Secure
API access is authenticated for local and Active Directory (AD) accounts.

Note: When a password is empty, SSH will not validate credentials and allow a user to log in.
Polycom recommends that you consistently use passwords for secure access.

Polycom, Inc. 87
Securing the System

Secure API access using SSH is enabled by default. The sshenable API command and Enable SSH
Access system web interface setting have been added to enable or disable the feature.
Related Links
Configure Remote Access on page 80
Enable a Whitelist on page 91
Enable Access to User Settings on page 85

Enable Secure API Access

You can enable SSH for secure API access in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface or in
an API session.

Procedure
» Do one of the following:
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access
and enable the Enable SSH Access setting.
• In a system API session, enter sshenable true.

Disable Secure API Access

You can disable SSH for secure API access in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface or
in an API session.

Procedure
» Do one of the following:
• In the system web interface of the system, select Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access and disable the Enable SSH Access setting.
• In a system API session, enter sshenable false.

Access the API with SSH

To obtain secure access to the API, you must use an SSH client and connect to the IP address
configured for the RealPresence Group Series system on port 22. The system allows three attempts to
enter correct login credentials. The SSH client program closes after the third failed attempt.
To access the API with SSH:

Procedure
1. Enable remote access.
2. If necessary, enable external authentication.
3. Enable the SSH feature.
4. Start an SSH session using the system IP address and port 22.
5. When prompted, enter the remote access credentials.
For information on accessing the API, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Guide at Polycom Support.

Polycom, Inc. 88
Securing the System

Port Lockout
Port lockout protects against brute-force attacks by temporarily locking the login port after a configurable
number of unsuccessful login attempts have been made, regardless of which account was used. Port
lockout is supported only on the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, and only Admin users
are allowed to log in to the system web interface. If external authentication is not in use, users can
successfully log in to the system web interface only by using the local Admin account credentials.
However, when external authentication is in use, any number of external accounts can be considered to
be Admin users on the system. Failed logins to any of these accounts, or to an unknown account, are all
counted against the configured number allowed failed login attempts to the system web interface.
The following is an example of how the port lockout feature works.
A system web interface is configured with these settings:
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Authentication > Enable Active Directory
External Authentication is enabled, a valid Active Directory Server Address is configured, as
are both the Active Directory Admin Group and Active Directory User Group settings.
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Lock Port after Failed Logins is set to
4.
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Port Lock Duration is set to 1 Minute.
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Reset Port Lock Counter After is set
to 1 Hour.
Scenario 1: Web interface locked due to excessive failed logins
A user fails to log in to the local Admin account two times on the system web interface, and another user
fails to log in to the external Active Directory ‘SuperUser' account in a separate system web interface
session. The ‘SuperUser' account is defined as part of the Active Directory Admin Group on the Active
Directory Server.
This means that three failed attempts have been made on the system web interface port—two by one
user and one by a second user. If the next attempt to log in to the system web interface by either user or
some other user is successful, the failed login counter for the system web interface port is reset to zero,
allowing 4 more failed attempts to occur on the system web interface.
On the other hand, if after the third failed login attempt, any user makes a fourth unsuccessful attempt to
any account on the system web interface, further attempts to access the system web interface using any
account credentials from any user are locked out for 1 Minute, the value of the Port Lock Duration
period. After the 1 Minute port lock period has past, logins will once again be allowed. As this example
illustrates, the failed login attempts made to the system web interface accumulate across any attempts to
any account and/or by any user.
Scenario 2: Failed attempts counter resets after failed login window closes
A user fails to log in to the local Admin account two times on the system web interface, and another user
fails to log in to the external Active Directory ‘SuperUser' account in a separate system web interface
session. The ‘SuperUser' account is defined as part of the Active Directory Admin Group on the Active
Directory Server.
This means that three failed attempts have been made on the system web interface port—two by one
user and one by a second user. If no more failed attempts are made within 1 Hour of the first failed
attempt (which is the value of the Reset Port Lock Counter After setting), the failed login attempts
counter is reset to zero, and 4 failed attempts are allowed again before the system web interface is
locked.

Polycom, Inc. 89
Securing the System

Related Links
Configure Remote Access on page 80
Enable a Whitelist on page 91
Enable Access to User Settings on page 85
Configure Account Lockout on page 85

Configure the Port Lockout Setting

You can configure the port lockout settings to limit the number of failed logins to your RealPresence
Group Series system. The telnet port has a port lock feature that is enabled regardless of the state of the
port lock feature configuration. Specifically, the telnet server disconnects a telnet login session after 5
failed login attempts. If a new session is started, another 5 attempts are allowed.
If the number of failed login attempts made during this window does not reach the maximum number
allowed, the failed login attempts counter is reset to zero at the end of this window.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2. Configure these settings and click Save.

Setting Description

Lock Port after Failed Logins Specifies the number of failed login attempts
allowed before the system locks the system web
interface from accepting logins. If set to Off, the
system does not lock the system web interface due
to failed login attempts.

Port Lock Duration Specifies the amount of time that a system web
interface remains locked due to failed login
attempts. After this time period expires, the failed
login attempts counter is reset to zero and logins to
the system web interface are once again allowed.

Reset Port Lock Counter After Specifies a “failed login window” period of time,
starting with the first failed login attempt, during
which subsequent failed login attempts will be
counted against the maximum number allowed
(Lock Port after Failed Logins).
Note: The failed login attempts counter is always
reset to zero anytime a user successfully logs in.

Whitelist
When a whitelist is enabled, the RealPresence Group Series system web interface and SNMP ports
accept connections only from specified IP addresses. The whitelist supports both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses. You can only configure this feature in the system web interface. The system can accept up to
30 IP address entries for the whitelist.

Polycom, Inc. 90
Securing the System

Note: If you use dynamic IP address assignment, ensure that you keep the whitelist up to date
with the latest assigned addresses for computers authorized to access the system. Failing
to update the whitelist means these computers cannot connect to the system.

Enable a Whitelist
You can enable a whitelist so that you can add specific IPv4 and IPv6 addresses to the approved list for
your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
2. Select Enable Whitelist.
Related Links
Port Lockout on page 89
Secure API Access on page 87
Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist on page 91

Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist

You can edit and add specific IP addresses to a whitelist for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. Click the Edit Whitelist link.
2. Select address type IPv4 or IPv6.
3. In the address text field, enter the IP address of the system you want to allow.
Follow the format suggested by the address type you selected. Select Add.
Repeat this step for all the IP addresses you want to add. You can add web server and SNMP
addresses.
If you entered an address in error, highlight the address in the list and select Clear.
Related Links
Enable a Whitelist on page 91
IPv4 Address Formats on page 91
IPv6 Address Formats on page 92

IPv4 Address Formats

The whitelist configuration requires single IP addresses, a range of addresses, or an IP and netmask. The
netmask represents the number of valid bits of the IPv4 address to use. The following are valid IPv4
formats for your RealPresence Group Series system:
• 10.12.128.7
• 172.26.16.0/24
Related Links
Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist on page 91

Polycom, Inc. 91
Securing the System

IPv6 Address Formats

For IPv6 addresses, you can use a Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation to represent a range
of IP addresses. The following are valid IPv6 formats for your RealPresence Group Series system:
• ::1
• 2001:db8:abc:def:10.242.12.23
• 2001:db8::/48
• 2001:db8:abcd:0012::0/64
• 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:1234:0abc:cdef
Related Links
Add IP Addresses to a Whitelist on page 91

Encryption
AES encryption is a standard feature on all RealPresence Group Series systems. When it is enabled, the
system automatically encrypts calls to other systems that have AES encryption enabled.
If encryption is enabled on the system, a locked padlock icon appears on the monitor when a call is
encrypted. If a call is unencrypted, an unlocked padlock appears on the monitor. In a multipoint call, some
connections might be encrypted while others are not. The padlock icon might not accurately indicate
whether the call is encrypted if the call is cascaded or includes an audio-only endpoint. To avoid security
risks, Polycom recommends that all participants communicate the state of their padlock icon verbally at
the beginning of a call.
Keep in mind the following points regarding AES encryption:
• AES encryption is not supported on systems registered to an Avaya H.323 gatekeeper.
• For systems with a maximum speed of 6 Mbps for unencrypted calls, the maximum speed for
encrypted SIP calls is 4 Mbps.
The following AES cryptographic algorithms ensure flexibility when negotiating secure media transport:
• H.323 (per H.235.6)
◦ AES-CBC-128 / DH-1024
◦ AES-CBC-256 / DH-2048
• SIP (per RFCs 3711, 4568, 6188)
◦ AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32
◦ AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80
◦ AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_32
◦ AES_CM_256_HMAC_SHA1_80
The systems also support the use of FIPS 140 validated cryptography, which is required in some
instances, such as when used by the U.S. federal government. When the Require FIPS 140
Cryptography setting is enabled, all cryptography used on the system comes from a software module
that has been validated to FIPS 140-2 standards. You can find its FIPS 140-2 validation certificate here:
http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/documents/140-1/140val-all.htm#1747.

Polycom, Inc. 92
Securing the System

Configure Encryption
You can configure encryption settings on your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Encryption.
2. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

Require AES Encryption for Calls Specifies how to encrypt calls with other sites that
support AES encryption.
• Off—AES encryption is disabled.
When Available—AES encryption is
used in calls with systems that support
it. Calls without encryption are allowed
when connecting to systems that don't
support it. For multipoint calls, this
means that some systems might be
connected with AES encryption while
others are connected without it.
Required for Video Calls Only—AES
encryption is used in all video calls.
Calls with systems that do not support it
are disconnected. Audio calls using an
attached SoundStation IP 7000 are
allowed to connect.
Required for All Calls—AES
encryption is used in all calls. Calls with
systems that do not support it are
disconnected. Audio calls using an
attached SoundStation IP 7000 are not
allowed to connect, since these calls are
not encrypted.

Require FIPS 140 Cryptography(system web Enables the exclusive use of the FIPS 140-2-
interface only) validated software cryptography module for
cryptographic functions. Also disables all “weak”
protocols and ciphers, including:
• SSLv2
• SSLv3
• Non-FIPS 140-2 approved TLS cipher
suites

Disable TLS v1.0 Disables the TLS v1.0 application; by default, TLS
v1.0 is enabled.

Polycom, Inc. 93
Securing the System

Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls

You must complete two tasks to enable encryption for SVC calls on your RealPresence Group Series
system:
• Set the transport protocol.
• Set AES encryption.
Related Links
Set the Transport Protocol for SVC Calls on page 94
Set Up AES Encryption for SVC Calls on page 94
Setting Call Preferences for SVC on page 113

Set the Transport Protocol for SVC Calls

You can set up the transport protocol for SVC calls for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network.
2. Click SIP to expand the section.
3. In the Transport Protocol list, select TLS.
4. Click Save.
Related Links
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls on page 94

Set Up AES Encryption for SVC Calls

You can set up AES encryption for SVC calls for the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2. Click Encryption to expand the section.
3. In the Require AES Encryption for Calls list, select When Available, Required for Video Calls
Only, or Required for All Calls.
4. Click Save.
Related Links
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls on page 94

Verify H.323 Media Encryption

To provide extra security for encrypted H.323 calls, the RealPresence Group Series system provides an
encryption check code. Both parties in a call can use this check code to verify that their call is not being
intercepted by a 3rd party.
The check code is a 16-digit hexadecimal number that is calculated so that the number is the same at
both sites in the call. The numbers are identical if, and only if, the key generation algorithm is performed
between the two sites in the call and is not intercepted and modified by a 3rd party.

Procedure
1. Establish an encrypted H.323 call between two sites.

Polycom, Inc. 94
Securing the System

2. At each site, locate the Call Statistics information on the Place a Call screen of the system web
interface.
The check code also displays under Diagnostics > System > Call Statistics in the Transmit
column of the Call Encryption section.
3. Verbally verify that the code is the same at both sites.
4. Do one of the following:
• If the codes match, the call is secure. Proceed with the call.
• If the codes do not match, then there is a possibility that the key exchange is compromised.
Hang up the call. Next, check the network path from the local system to the far-end system
to determine if the systems are experiencing a Man in the Middle attack. This occurs when a
foreign device tricks the local system into creating an encryption key using information from
the imposter. Then, the imposter can decode the data sent by the local system and
eavesdrop on the call.

System Configuration with a Firewall or NAT

You can configure RealPresence Group Series systems to use standards-based H.460.18 and H.460.19
firewall traversal, which allows video systems to more easily establish IP connections across firewalls.
The following illustration shows how a service provider might provide H.460 firewall traversal between two
enterprise locations. In this example the Polycom Video Border Proxy™ (VBP®) firewall traversal device is
on the edge of the service provider network and facilitates IP calls between systems behind different
firewalls.

Ref. Number Description

1 Polycom Video Border Proxy

2 Gatekeeper

3 IP network

Polycom, Inc. 95
Securing the System

Ref. Number Description

4 Firewall

5 RealPresence Group Series system

6 Firewall

7 RealPresence Group Series system

Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal Connectivity

Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal Connectivity allows RealPresence Group Series systems to connect to the
SIP-based RealPresence solutions using the Acme Packet Net-Net family of Session Border Controllers
(SBC). A system connects to the Acme Packet Net-Net SBC as a remote enterprise endpoint. The remote
enterprise endpoint is registered to the enterprise's SIP infrastructure and connects to an internal
enterprise endpoint through the enterprise firewall.
For details about the use and configuration of the Acme Packet Net-Net SBC used in conjunction with this
feature, refer to Deploying Polycom Unified Communications in an Acme Packet Net-Net Enterprise
Session Director Environment.
Polycom systems also provide full mutual TLS support for SIP and XMPP Presence connections. Full
mutual TLS support gives administrators the ability to identify and authenticate devices attempting to join
conferences from outside the enterprise network.

Configure the H.460 NAT Firewall Traversal

You can enable and configure the H.460 NAT firewall traversal on your RealPresence Group Series
system.

Procedure
1. Enable firewall traversal on the system.
a) In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Firewall.
b) Select Enable H.460 Firewall Traversal.
2. Register the system to an external Polycom VBP device that supports the H.460.18 and H.460.19
standards.
3. Ensure that firewalls to be traversed allow the system to open outbound TCP and UDP
connections.
• Firewalls with a stricter rule set should allow the systems to open at least the following
outbound TCP and UDP ports: 1720 (TCP), 14085-15084 (TCP) and 1719 (UDP),
16386-25386 (UDP).
• Firewalls should permit inbound traffic to TCP and UDP ports that have been opened earlier
in the outbound direction.
4. Configure the following settings.

Polycom, Inc. 96
Securing the System

Setting Description

Fixed Ports Lets you specify whether to define the TCP and
UDP ports.
• If the firewall is not H.323 compatible,
enable this setting. The system assigns
a range of ports starting with the TCP
and UDP ports you specify. The system
defaults to a range beginning with port
3230 for both TCP and UDP.
Note: You must open the corresponding ports in
the firewall. For H.323, you must also open the
firewall's TCP port 1720; for SIP you must open
either UDP port 5060, TCP 5060, or TCP 5061
depending on whether you are using UDP, TCP, or
TLS as the SIP transport protocol.
• If the firewall is H.323 compatible or the
system is not behind a firewall, disable
this setting.
For IP H.323 you need 2 TCP and 8 UDP ports per
connection. For SIP you need TCP port 5060 and 8
UDP ports per connection.
Range of UDP Ports: Because systems support
ICE, the range of fixed UDP ports is 112. The
system cycles through the available ports from call
to call. After the system restarts, the first call begins
with the first port number, either 49152 or 3230.
Subsequent calls start with the last port used, for
example, the first call uses ports 3230 to 3236, the
second call uses ports 3236 to 3242, the third call
uses ports 3242 through 3248, and so on.
Fixed Ports Range and Filters:
You might notice that the source port of a SIP
signaling message is not in the fixed ports range.
When your firewalls are filtering on source ports, in
the system web interface, go to Admin Settings >
Network > IP Network > SIP and enable the
Force Connection Reuse checkbox. When this
setting is enabled, the system uses port 5060/5061
for the source port and for the destination port.
These ports are required to be open in the firewall.

TCP Ports Specifies the beginning value for the range of TCP
and UDP ports used by the system. The system
UDP Ports
automatically sets the range of ports based on the
beginning value you set.
Note: You must also open the firewall's TCP port
1720 to allow H.323 traffic.

Enable H.460 Firewall Traversal Allows the system to use H.460-based firewall
traversal for IP calls.

Polycom, Inc. 97
Securing the System

Setting Description

NAT Specifies whether the system should determine the

NAT Public WAN Address automatically.
• If the system is not behind a NAT or is
connected to the IP network through a
Virtual Private Network (VPN), select
Off.
• If the system is behind a NAT that
allows HTTP traffic, select Auto.
• If the system is behind a NAT that does
not allow HTTP traffic, select Manual.

NAT Public (WAN) Address Displays the address that callers from outside the
LAN use to call your system. If you chose to
configure the NAT manually, enter the NAT Public
Address here.
This field is editable only when NAT Configuration
is set to Manual.

NAT is H.323 Compatible Specifies that the system is behind a NAT that is
capable of translating H.323 traffic.
This field is visible only when NAT Configuration
is set to Auto or Manual.

Address Displayed in Global Directory Lets you choose whether to display this system's
public or private address in the global directory.
This field is visible only when NAT Configuration
is set to Auto or Manual.

Enable SIP Keep-Alive Messages Specifies whether to regularly transmit keep-alive

messages on the SIP signaling channel and on all
RTP sessions that are part of SIP calls. Keep-alive
messages keep connections open through NAT/
Firewall devices that are often used at the edges of
both home and enterprise networks.
When a system is deployed or registered in an
Avaya SIP environment, Polycom recommends that
you disable this setting to allow calls to connect
fully.

In environments set up behind a firewall, firewall you can choose to limit access to TCP connections only.
Although TCP is an accurate and reliable method of data delivery that incorporates error-checking, it is
not a fast method. For this reason, real-time media streams often use UDP, which offers speed but not
necessarily accuracy. Within an environment behind a firewall, where firewall administrator has restricted
media access to TCP ports, calls can be completed using a TCP connection instead of UDP.

Note: Caution: Systems deployed outside a firewall are potentially vulnerable to unauthorized
access. Visit the Polycom Security section of the Knowledge Base at Polycom Support for
timely security information. You can also register to receive periodic email updates and
advisories.

Polycom, Inc. 98
Securing the System

Security Certificates
If your organization has deployed a public key infrastructure (PKI) for securing connections between
devices on your network, Polycom recommends that you have a strong understanding of certificate
management and how it applies to your RealPresence Group Series system before you integrate these
products with the PKI.
Systems can use certificates to authenticate network connections to and from the system. Other web
applications also use certificates, as you might notice when you navigate the Internet. The system uses
configuration and management techniques typical of PKI to manage certificates, certificate signing
requests, and revocation checking. ANSI X.509 standards regulate the characteristics of certificates and
revocation.
Related Links
Enable PKI Certificates on page 102

How Certificates are Used

RealPresence Group Series systems can generate requests for certificates (CSRs) that are then sent to a
certificate authority (CA) for official issuance. The CA is the trusted entity that issues, or signs, digital
certificates for others. Once signed by the CA, you can install the certificate on the system for use in all
TLS connections used by the system.
Systems support, and typically require, the generation and use of two separate certificates when used in
an environment that has a fully deployed PKI:
1. A Server certificate—the system's web server presents this certificate after receiving connection
requests from browsers attempting to connect to the system web interface.
2. A Client certificate—the system presents this certificate to a remote server when challenged to
provide a certificate as part of authenticating the identity of the system before allowing it to
connect to the remote server. Examples of remote servers include the RealPresence Resource
Manager system, a SIP proxy/registrar server, or an LDAP directory server.
When systems are deployed in an environment that does not have a fully deployed PKI, you do not need
to install these certificates because all systems automatically generate self-signed certificates that can be
used to establish secure TLS connections. However, when a full PKI has been deployed, self-signed
certificates are not trusted by the PKI and so signed certificates must be used. The following sections
describe how to generate and use certificates by using the system web interface.
Related Links
Configure Certificate Validation Settings on page 103
Install Certificates on page 104

Certificate Signing Requests

The RealPresence Group Series system allows you to install one client and one server certificate for
identification of the system to network peers. In order to obtain these certificates you must first create a
Certificate Signing Request (CSR) for each certificate. This request, also known as an unsigned
certificate, must be submitted to a CA so that it can be signed, after which the certificate can be installed
on the system.

Polycom, Inc. 99
Securing the System

Certificate Signing Request Requirements

Whether you need to generate a client-type CSR, a server-type CSR, or both depends on which features
and services you intend to use, and whether your network environment supports certificate-based
authentication for those services. In most cases, both certificates are needed for RealPresence Group
Series systems.
For example, if your system is configured to use any of the following features, and the servers providing
those services perform certificate-based authentication before allowing access to them, you must create a
client-type CSR and add the resulting certificate signed by the CA:
• RealPresence Resource Manager system Provisioning
• RealPresence Resource Manager system Monitoring
• RealPresence Resource Manager system LDAP Directory
• RealPresence Resource Manager system Presence
• Calendaring
• SIP
• 802.1X
The system web server uses the server-type CSR and resulting certificate whenever a user attempts to
connect to the system web interface. The web server does so by presenting the server certificate to the
browser to identify the system to the browser as part of allowing the browser to connect to the system.
The browser's user needs the server certificate if he or she wants to be certain about the identity of the
system he or she is connecting to. Settings in the web browser typically control the validation of the
server certificate, but you can also validate the certificate manually.
To obtain a client or server certificate, you must first create a CSR. You can create one client and one
server CSR and submit each to the appropriate CA for signing. After the CSR is signed by a CA, it
becomes a certificate you can add to the system.

Create a Certificate Signing Request

You can create server and client CSRs to identify your RealPresence Group Series system to your
network peers.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Certificate
Options.
2. Click Create for the type of CSR you want to create, Signing Request Server or Signing
Request Client.
The procedure is the same for server and client CSRs.
3. Configure these settings on the Create Signing Request screen and click Create.

Setting Description

Hash Algorithm Specifies the hash algorithm for the CSR. You may
select SHA-256 or keep the default SHA-1.

Polycom, Inc. 100

Securing the System

Setting Description

Common Name (CN) Specifies the name that the system assigns to the
CSR.
Polycom recommends the following guidelines for
configuring the Common Name:
• For systems registered in DNS, use the
Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of
the system.
• For systems not registered in DNS, use
the IP address of the system.Maximum
Characters: 64; truncated if necessary.
Default is blank

Organizational Unit (OU) Specifies the unit of business defined by your

organization. Default is blank.Maximum
Characters: 64
Note: The system supports only one OU field. If
you want the signed certificate to include more than
one OU field, you must download and edit the CSR
manually.

Organization (O) Specifies your organization's name. Default is

blank.Maximum Characters: 64

City or Locality (L) Specifies the city where your organization is

located. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 128

State or Province (ST) Specifies the state or province where your

organization is located. Default is blank.
Maximum Characters: 128

Country (C) Displays the country selected in Admin Settings >

General Settings > My Information. Not editable.

SAN: FQDN: Specifies the FQDN assigned to the system. This is

the same as the Common Name (CN), but is not
truncated. Default is blank.Maximum Characters:
253

SAN: Additional Name: Specifies an additional name. Default is

blank.Maximum Characters: 253

SAN: IPv4 Address: Default is the IPv4 address of system. Maximum

Characters: 15

SAN: IPv4 Address (DNS): Default is the IPv4 address of system. This field
provides the IPv4 address in ASCII format, which is
sometimes needed for MSFT server
interoperability.Maximum Characters: 15

Polycom, Inc. 101

Securing the System

Setting Description

SAN: IPv6 Global Address: Default is the IPv6 Global Address of system.
Maximum Characters: 40

SAN: IPv6 Site Local Address: Default is the IPv6 Site Local Address of system.
Maximum Characters: 40

SAN: IPv6 Link Local Address: Default is the IPv6 Link Local Address of system.
Maximum Characters: 40

After you create the CSR, a message indicating that the CSR has been created displays. Two links
appear next to the signing request that you just created (Signing Request Server or Signing Request
Client).
• Download Signing Request enables you to download the CSR so that it can be sent to a CA for
signature.
• Create enables you to view the fields of the CSR as they are currently set in the CSR. If you
change any of the values you previously configured, you can click Create to generate a new CSR
that can then be downloaded.

Note: Only a single outstanding CSR of either type can exist at a time. After the CSR is
generated, it is important to get it signed and installed before attempting to generate
a different CSR of the same type. For example, if you generate a client CSR and
then, prior to having it signed and installed on the system, another client CSR is
generated, the previous CSR is discarded and invalidated, and any attempt to
install a signed version of it will result in an error.

Related Links
Configure Certificate Validation Settings on page 103

RealPresence Server Address Configuration in PKI-enabled Environments

You can configure server addresses for services listed in Certificate Validation Settings that need a
client-type CSR, such as SIP, LDAP directory, etc. If the server address is contained in the server
certificate that it presents during a connection, you might need to use a particular address format for your
RealPresence Group Series system. In this case, use the following guidance to configure server
addresses:
• If the certificate contains the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the server, use the FQDN when
configuring the server address.
• If the certificate contains the IP address of the server, use the IP address when configuring the
server address.
• If the certificate does not contain any the server's address in any form, you can use either the
FQDN or the IP address of the server when configuring the server address.
Related Links
Configure Certificate Validation Settings on page 103

Enable PKI Certificates

If your RealPresence Group Series system will be provisioned by the RealPresence Resource Manager
and you plan to use PKI certificates, you must ensure that you configure the Host Name setting.

Polycom, Inc. 102

Securing the System

Procedure
1. On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties > LAN
Options.
2. At Host Name, use the same name that the RealPresence Resource Manager uses to provision
the system.
This name must be the same so that certificate signing requests (CSRs) generated during
certificate installation have the correct host name information.
Related Links
Security Certificates on page 99
Using a Provisioning Service on page 35

Configure Certificate Validation Settings

Certificates are authorized externally when they are signed by the CA. The certificates can be
automatically validated when they are used to establish an authenticated network connection. To perform
this validation, the RealPresence Group Series system must have certificates installed for all CAs that are
part of the trust chain. A trust chain is the hierarchy of CAs that have issued certificates from the device
being authenticated, through the intermediate CAs that have issued certificates to the various CAs,
leading back to a root CA, which is a known trusted CA. The following sections describe how to install
and manage these certificates.
A certificate exchange is between a server and a client, both of which are peers. When a user is
accessing the system web interface, the system is the server and the web browser is the client
application. In other situations, such as when the system connects to LDAP directory services, the system
is the client and the LDAP directory server is the server.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Certificate
Options.
2. Configure these settings on the Certificates screen and click Save.

Setting Description

Maximum Peer Certificate Chain Depth Specifies how many links a certificate chain can
have. The term peer certificate refers to any
certificate sent by the far-end host to the system
when a network connection is being established
between the two systems.

Always Validate Peer Certificates from Browser Controls whether the system requires a browser to
present a valid certificate when it tries to connect to
the system web interface.

Always Validate Peer Certificates from Server Controls whether the system requires the remote
server to present a valid certificate when
connecting to it for services for client-type CSRs,
such as provisioning, directory, and SIP. See the
following topic for examples.

Installed Certificates Allows the administrator to either view installed

certificates or to add a new certificate.

Polycom, Inc. 103

Securing the System

Setting Description

Signing Request Server Allows the administrator to create a new server

request certificate.

Signing Request Client Allows the administrator to create a new client

request certificate.

Related Links
How Certificates are Used on page 99
RealPresence Server Address Configuration in PKI-enabled Environments on page 102
Create a Certificate Signing Request on page 100
Certificate Revocation Settings on page 105

Install Certificates
After you have downloaded a CSR and it has been signed by a CA, the resulting certificate is ready to
install on the RealPresence Group Series system. The following section outlines how to do this, and the
procedure is the same to install the client certificate, server certificate, and any required CA-type
certificates.

Procedure
1. To open the certificate section, at Installed Certificates, click View and Add.
2. Next to Add Certificate, click Browse to search for and select a certificate.
You might be installing a client or server certificate that has been signed by a CA after having
been previously generated as a CSR, or installing a CA certificate needed by the system to
validate a certificate it receives from another system.
3. Click Open.
The system checks the certificate data and adds it to the list. If you don't see the certificate in the
list, the system was unable to recognize the certificate. This process is sometimes referred to as
installing a certificate.
You can select a certificate in the list to view its contents. You can also remove a certificate from
the list by clicking Remove.
4. If needed, click Close to close the certificate section of the screen.
5. Click Save.
When you add a CA certificate to the system, the certificate becomes trusted for the purpose of
validating peer certificates.

Note: If you do not add the server certificate for the system before using the system web
interface, you might receive error messages from your browser stating that the
security certificate for the web site “Polycom” cannot be verified. Most browsers
allow the user to proceed after this warning is displayed. See the Help section of
your browser for instructions on how to do this.

Related Links
How Certificates are Used on page 99

Polycom, Inc. 104

Securing the System

Certificate Revocation Settings

When certificate validation is enabled, the RealPresence Group Series system tries to validate the peer
certificate chain on secure connection attempts for the applicable network services.
Part of the validation process includes a step called revocation checking. This type of check involves
consulting with the CA that issued the certificate in question to see whether the certificate is still active or
has been revoked for some reason. Revoked certificates are considered invalid because they might have
been compromised in some way or improperly issued, or for other similar reasons. The CA is responsible
for maintaining the revocation status of every certificate that it issues. The system can check this
revocation status by using either of the following methods:
• Certificate revocation lists (CRLs). A CRL is a list of certificates that have been revoked by the CA.
A CRL must be installed on the system for each CA whose certificate has been installed on the
system.
• The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP). OCSP allows the system to contact an OCSP
responder, a network server that provides real-time certificate status through a query/response
message exchange.

Note: The systems automatically download CRLs from the Certificate Authorities (CAs)
that make CRLs available for retrieval by HTTP. However, for CAs that do not allow
HTTP retrieval of CRLs, the system administrator is responsible for manually
installing and updating CRLs ahead of their expiration. It is extremely important that
CRLs be kept up to date.

Related Links
Configure Certificate Validation Settings on page 103

Configure the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Method

You can configure the CRL revocation method settings on the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Revocation.
2. Configure these settings on the Revocation screen and click Save.

Setting Description

Revocation Method To enable the CRL revocation method, select CRL.

Allow Incomplete Revocation Checks When this field is enabled, a certificate in the chain
is verified without a revocation status check if no
corresponding CRL for the issuing CA is installed.
If the system cannot locate an installed CRL, it
determines that the certificate is not revoked. If a
CRL is installed, the system performs a revocation
check when validating the certificate.

Add CRL • Click Browse to search for and select a

CRL.
• Click Open to add the CRL to the list.

Polycom, Inc. 105

Securing the System

3. You can also view automatically and manually downloaded CRLs on this screen.
To remove a CRL from the list, click Remove.

Note: If the Always Validate Peer Certificates from Browsers setting is enabled and
the expired CRL is for a CA that is part of the trust chain for the client certificate
sent by your browser, you can no longer connect to the system web interface
because the revocation check always fails. In this case, unless the system web
interface can be accessed by a user whose client certificate's trust chain does not
include the CA with the expired CRL, you must delete all certificates and CRLS
from the system and then reinstall them.

Related Links
Remove a Certificate and CRL on page 106

Remove a Certificate and CRL

In some cases, expired certificates or CRLs might prevent you from accessing the RealPresence Group
Series system web interface. You can use the local interface to reset your system without certificates, to
restore access to the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System.
2. If needed, enter the Admin ID and Password.
3. Enable the Delete Certificates field.
4. Select Reset System.
The system restarts after deleting all installed certificates and CRLs.
Related Links
Configure the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Method on page 105

Set Up a Security Banner

Security banners consist of text that displays on the Login screen and in a window when you log in
remotely to your RealPresence Group Series system. The security banner is not supported on the
Polycom Touch Control.
The following is an example of banner text:

This machine is the property of Polycom, Inc., and its use is governed by
company guidelines. You have NO right of privacy when using this machine.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Security Banner.
2. Configure these settings and click Save.

Setting Description

Enable Security Banner Specifies whether to display a security banner.

Polycom, Inc. 106

Securing the System

Setting Description

Banner Text Custom—Allows you to enter text to use for the

banner.
DoD—Specifies that the system displays a default
U.S. Department of Defense security banner. You
cannot view or change this text on the local
interface, but you can change the text on the
system web interface.

Local System Banner Text If you enable the security banner on the system
web interface, enter up to 2,408 single-byte or
1,024 double-byte characters. The text wraps to the
next line as you type, but you can press Enter
anywhere in a line to force a line break at a specific
place.

Remote Access Banner Text This field is visible only when you use the system
web interface. You can type or paste a maximum of
2,408 single-byte or 1,024 double-byte characters.
The text wraps to the next line as you type, but you
can press Enter anywhere in a line to force a line
break at a specific place.

Set a Meeting Password

If you set up a meeting password, users must supply the password to join multipoint calls on the
RealPresence Group Series system when the call uses the internal multipoint option instead of a bridge.
Remember the following points about meeting passwords:
• Do not set a meeting password if multipoint calls include audio-only endpoints. Audio-only
endpoints are unable to participate in password-protected calls.
• Microsoft Office Communicator clients are unable to join password-protected multipoint calls.
• SIP endpoints are unable to connect to password-protected multipoint calls.
• If a meeting password is set for a call, People+Content™ IP clients must enter the password before
joining the meeting.
• Meeting passwords cannot contain spaces or be more than 32 characters.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Meeting Password.
2. Enable and configure the Meeting Password setting.

Visual Security Classification

This feature helps the call participants remain conscious of the security classification when in a
BroadWorks managed call on the RealPresence Group Series system. During and throughout a call, the
Visual Security Classification (VSC) provides a visual indication to the system user of the calls security
level which is dynamically calculated using the lowest security rating of all users and gateways within the

Polycom, Inc. 107

Securing the System

call. During a call, you can override the security classification and assign a lower security classification
level.
Keep the following points in mind:
• Each BroadSoft-registered endpoint in the conference has a security classification level.
• BroadSoft Application Server determines the default security classification level for a BroadWorks
conference, and that default is the lowest of the levels involved in the conference. VSC is only
supported on BroadWorks conferencing systems which are VSC aware and which have visibility of
all participants in the call. VSC is not supported on Polycom VMRs, as BroadWorks does not have
visibility of the callers on the Polycom MCU.
• The security classification level is shared with all the endpoints that support the Visual Security
Classification feature.
• The security classification level of a conference call is re-evaluated whenever an endpoint enters or
leaves a conference or when a user modifies the security classification level of an endpoint.
Any user who joins the call from an outside or unknown network is designated an “Unclassified” security
classification level.
The Visual Security Classification feature is disabled by default. Enable it with a provisioning server or
through the system web interface. Before enabling this feature, ensure the following:
• Register the system to a BroadSoft R20 call server.
• Disable the Multipoint Video Conferencing option key.
• Disable AS-SIP.
Related Links
Enable Visual Security Classification on page 108

Enable Visual Security Classification

You can enable Visual Security Classification on your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. From the system web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2. Under Visual Security Classification, select Enable Visual Security Classification and click
Save.
3. Click the Adjust SIP Settings link or navigate to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
4. Under Registrar Server Type, select Unknown.
Related Links
Visual Security Classification on page 107

Enable Room and Call Monitoring

Before you can use room and call monitoring, you must enable the feature in the RealPresence Group
Series system local interface.

Procedure
1. In the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Security > Remote Access.
2. To allow the room or call to be viewed remotely, enable Allow Video Display on Web.

Polycom, Inc. 108

Securing the System

Monitor a Room or Call

The monitoring feature in the system web interface allows system administrator to view a call or the room
where the system is installed.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Tools > Remote Monitoring.
2. You can perform the following tasks out of a call:
• To wake the system, click Wake the system.
• To adjust system volume, click Volume.
• To share content, click Show Content.
• To adjust the near camera, click Near Camera.
• To view camera presets, click Near Camera or Far Camera and click Presets.
3. You can perform this additional task in a call:
• To adjust the far camera, click Far Camera.

Send a Message to a System

If you are experiencing difficulties with connectivity or audio, you might want to send a message to the
system that you are managing. Only the near-end site can see the message; it is not broadcast to all the
sites in the call.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Send a Message.
2. On the Send a Message screen, enter a message (up to 100 characters in length), then click
Send.
The message is displayed for 15 seconds on the screen of the system that you are managing.

Configure the OCSP Revocation Method

You can configure the OSCP revocation method settings in the system web interface. For validation of
the OCSP response message, if you use OCSP, you might need to install one or more additional CA
certificates on the system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Revocation.
2. Configure these settings on the Revocation screen and click Save.

Setting Description

Revocation Method To enable the OSCP revocation method, select

OSCP.

Polycom, Inc. 109

Securing the System

Setting Description

Allow Incomplete Revocation Checks When this field is enabled, the system treats the
following response from the OCSP responder as a
successful revocation check:
• If the OCSP responder responds that
the status is unknown or if no response
is received, the system treats this as a
successful revocation check.
Regardless of the state of this setting, the following
statements apply:
• If the OCSP responder indicates a
known revoked status, the room system
treats this as a revocation check failure
and does not allow the connection.
• If the OCSP responder indicates a
known good status, the room system
treats this as a successful revocation
check and allows the connection.

Global Responder Address Specifies the URI of the responder that services
OCSP requests, for example, http://
responder.example.com/ocsp. This responder is
used for all OCSP validation when Use Responder
Specified in Certificate is disabled, and is
sometimes used even when Use Responder
Specified in Certificate is enabled. Polycom
therefore recommends that you always enter a
Global Responder Address regardless of the
value chosen for the Use Responder Specified in
Certificate setting.

Use Responder Specified in Certificate In some cases, the certificate itself includes the
responder address. When this field is enabled, the
system attempts to use the address in the
certificate (when present) instead of the Global
Responder Address specified in the previous
field.
Note: The system supports only the use of HTTP
URLs in the AIA field of a certificate when Use
Responder Specified in Certificate is enabled.

Polycom, Inc. 110

Configuring Call Settings
Topics:

• Configure Call Settings

• Setting Call Preferences for SVC
• Set Preferred Call Speeds
• Configure the Recent Calls List
• Set Call Answering Mode
• Set the Maximum Call Length
• Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode
• Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts
• Setting Up Audio-Only Calls

The following topics describe how to configure call settings for your system.

Configure Call Settings

You can configure Call Settings in the system web interface on your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2. Configure the settings in the following table.

Setting Description

Maximum Time in Call Enter the maximum number of hours allowed for
call length.
When that time has expired, you see a message
asking you if you want to hang up or stay in the
call. If you do not answer within one minute, the call
automatically disconnects. If you choose to stay in
the call at this time, you will not be prompted again.
Selecting Off removes any limit.
This setting also applies when you are viewing the
Near video screen or showing content, even if you
are not in a call. If the maximum time is reached
while viewing Near video, the system automatically
returns to the Home screen. If content is being
shown, the content stops.

Polycom, Inc. 111

Configuring Call Settings

Setting Description

Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video Sets the answer mode for when the system is not
in a call. This setting has three choices:
Yes—Instructs the system to automatically answer
the incoming point-to-point call.
No—Instructs the system to force manual
answering of the incoming call.
Do Not Disturb—Instructs the system to reject the
incoming call with no notification to the user.

Auto Answer Multipoint Video Sets the answer mode for when the system is
already in a call, regardless of whether the system
has multipoint capability. This setting has three
choices:
Yes—Instructs the system to automatically answer
the incoming multipoint call.
No—Instructs the system to force manual
answering of the incoming call.
Do Not Disturb—Instructs the system to reject the
incoming call with no notification to the user.

Multipoint Mode Sets the multipoint viewing mode that applies when
the system is the host of a multipoint call. The
available settings are as follows:
Auto
Full Screen
Discussion
Presentation

Display Icons in a Call Specifies whether to display all on-screen graphics,

including icons and help text, during calls.

Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification Specifies whether the incoming call notification
flashes.

Polycom, Inc. 112

Configuring Call Settings

Setting Description

Preferred ‘Place a Call' Navigation Specifies the default icons that display on the local
interface of the Place a Call screen. The available
settings are as follows:
Dial Pad—Displays a list of recently dialed
numbers and a dial pad for entering a number to
call.
Contacts—Displays a screen for searching the
entire global network directory. The multi-tiered
directory (LDAP) root entry displays at the top of
the Contacts list. The Contact list combines your
search and favorite entries.
Recent Calls—Lists phone numbers, in
chronological order, that have been dialed from the
system.

Automatic Self View Control Specifies whether the Self View setting is visible in
the local interface.
• If Automatic Self View Control is
enabled, the Self View setting is not
displayed in the local interface, and the
system automatically chooses when to
display the self view window. Whether
the self view window is displayed is
dependent on available display space,
the display mode, and so on.
• If Automatic Self View Control is not
enabled, the user can turn Self View on
and off from the local interface.

Related Links
Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode on page 118

Setting Call Preferences for SVC

Scalable Video Coding (SVC) conferencing for RealPresence Group Series systems provides the
following benefits:
• Fewer video resource requirements
• Better error resiliency
• Lower latency
• More flexibility with display layouts
You can make and receive SVC multipoint calls when the system is connected to an SVC-compatible
bridge through the Polycom® Distributed Media Application (DMA™). In an SVC-based conference, each
SVC-enabled endpoint transmits multiple bit streams, called simulcasting, to the Polycom RealPresence
Collaboration Server (RMX). The RealPresence Collaboration Server sends or relays selected video
streams to the endpoints without sending the entire video layout. The streams are assembled into a

Polycom, Inc. 113

Configuring Call Settings

layout by the SVC-enabled endpoints according to each of their different display capabilities and layout
configurations.
To make SVC point-to-point calls, the system must be registered to a Skype for Business 2015 server. In
a Skype for Business 2015 hosted multipoint or point-to-point call, you can view multiple far-end sites in
layouts. RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems display up to five far-end sites on Skype for Business
2015 hosted (SVC) multipoint calls.
For more information on the features, limitations, and layouts of SVC-based conferencing, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence SVC-Based Conferencing Solutions Deployment Guide available at Polycom
Support.
Related Links
Configure SVC Dialing Options on page 114
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls on page 94

Configure SVC Dialing Options

Dialing preferences help you manage the network bandwidth used for calls and establish an SVC call
configuration on RealPresence Group Series systems. You can specify the default and optional call
settings for outgoing calls. You can also limit the call speeds of incoming calls.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing
Options.
2. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) Specifies whether to use scalable or advanced
video coding:
• SVC then AVC—Use SVC when
possible; otherwise, use AVC.
• AVC Only—This setting disables SVC.
This setting is not applicable to Skype-hosted calls,
since SVC is negotiated automatically by Skype for
Business Server 2015 or the Skype for Business
2015 client.

Enable H.239 Specifies standards-based People+Content data

collaboration. Enable this setting if you know that
H.239 is supported by the far -end sites you call.

Enable Audio-Only Calls Specifies one additional outbound audio-only call

from the system. This occurs when a multipoint
conference call hits the maximum number of calls
allowed for the license type.

TIP Specifies that TIP is enabled on a RealPresence

Group Series system and that the system can
interoperate with TIP endpoints.

Polycom, Inc. 114

Configuring Call Settings

Setting Description

Video Dialing Order Specifies how the system places video calls to
directory entries that have more than one type of
number.
• IP H.323
• SIP
This setting also specifies how the system places
video calls from the Place a Call screen when the
call type selection is either unavailable or set to
Auto. If a call attempt does not connect, the
system tries to place the call using the next call
type in the list.

Audio Dialing Order Preference 1 Specifies the first audio preference for calls. The
choices are:
• IP H.323
• SIP
Preference 1 will be attempted first, while
Preference 2 will be attempted second.

Audio Dialing Order Preference 2 Specifies the second audio preference for calls.
The choices are:
• IP H.323
• SIP
Preference 2 will be attempted second, while
Preference 1 will be attempted first.

Related Links
Setting Call Preferences for SVC on page 113

Enable SVC Preference (H.264) for Calls

You can enable the order preference for SVC and AVC calls in the RealPresence Group Series system
web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing
Options.
2. From the Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) list, select SVC then AVC.

Enable Automatic Answering of SVC Point-to-Point Calls

A RealPresence Group Series system registered to a Skype for Business 2015 server and connected to
an SVC-compatible bridge can automatically answer incoming SVC calls. To enable this feature,
complete the following tasks on the system:
• Enable Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
• Enable Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264)

Polycom, Inc. 115

Configuring Call Settings

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2. From the Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video list, select Yes.

Set Preferred Call Speeds

You can configure call speeds in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Preferred
Speeds.
2. Configure the following settings.

Setting Description

Preferred Speed for Placed Calls Determines the speeds to use for IP or SIP (TIP)
calls from this system when either of the following
IP CallsSIP (TIP) Calls
statements is true:
• The call speed is set to Auto on the
Place a Call screen
• The call is placed from the directory
If the far-site system does not support the selected
speed, the system automatically negotiates a lower
speed.
Users cannot specify a call speed when placing
calls from the Polycom Touch Control.
The SIP (TIP) Calls setting is available only when
the TIP setting is enabled.

Maximum Speed for Received Calls Allows you to restrict the bandwidth used when
receiving IP or SIP (TIP) calls.
IP CallsSIP (TIP) Calls
If the far site attempts to call the system at a higher
speed than selected here, the call is renegotiated
at the speed specified in this field.
The SIP (TIP) Calls setting is available only when
the TIP setting is enabled.

For point-to-point calls, the RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems use a maximum of 3 Mbps of
bandwidth; the RealPresence Group 500 system use a maximum of 6 Mbps.

Configure the Recent Calls List

You can configure a Recent Calls list to display on the Place a Call screen in the RealPresence Group
Series system web interface. The list includes the following information:
• Site name or number

Polycom, Inc. 116

Configuring Call Settings

• Whether call was placed or received

• Date and time

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Recent Calls.
2. To enable a Recent Calls list, configure these settings.

Setting Description

Call Detail Report Specifies whether to collect call data for the Call
Detail Report. When selected, information about
calls can be viewed through the system web
interface and downloaded as a .csv file. When this
setting is not selected, the system stops writing
calls to the report.

Enable Recent Calls Specifies whether to show Recent Calls on the

local and system web interfaces.

Maximum Number to Display Specifies the maximum number of calls to display

in the Recent Calls list.

3. To start a new list of recent calls, click Clear Recent Calls.

4. Click Save.
If you need more details about calls, view or download the Call Detail Report (CDR) from the system web
interface.

Set Call Answering Mode

You can configure how your users answer calls when they use the local interface on RealPresence Group
Series systems.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2. Select Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video to set the answer mode for calls with one site, or
select Auto Answer Multipoint Video to set the mode for calls with two or more other sites, and
then select one of the following:
• Yes-Answers calls automatically.
• No-Enables users to answer calls manually.
• Do Not Disturb-Disables incoming calls from being processed and routed to the user.

Set the Maximum Call Length

You can set the maximum call length for calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 117

Configuring Call Settings

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2. At Maximum Time in Call, select a time limit from the drop down list.

Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode

What the far-end site sees during a multipoint call can vary depending on how the RealPresence Group
Series system is configured, the number of sites participating, the number of monitors being used, and
whether content is shared. When you change a layout, you are changing the far-end site layouts only.
Video images from multiple sites can be automatically combined on one monitor in a display known as
continuous presence.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Call Settings.
2. Select a viewing mode from the Multipoint Mode list.
The following table describes the available multipoint viewing modes.

Setting Description

Auto The view switches between continuous presence

and full screen, depending on the interaction
between the sites.
If multiple sites are talking at the same time,
continuous presence is used. If one site speaks
uninterrupted for at least 15 seconds, that site
appears in full screen on the monitor.

Discussion Multiple sites are displayed in continuous presence.

The current speaker's image is highlighted.

Presentation The speaker sees continuous presence while the

other sites see the speaker in full screen on the
monitor.

Full Screen The site that is speaking is shown in full screen to

all other sites. The current speaker sees the
previous speaker.

Related Links
Configure Call Settings on page 111

Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts

For hearing-impaired users, an attention-getting message displays when an incoming call is received by a
RealPresence Group Series system. When a call is received, the system displays a message asking if the
user wants to answer the call.

Polycom, Inc. 118

Configuring Call Settings

For greater visibility, you can have the message text flash between white and yellow. Flashing text is off
by default. The incoming call alert settings persists after powering the system off and on.
If a RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control and is configured with
Auto Answer Point-to-Point set to Yes, users do not see the flashing message on the system or on the
Touch Control screen.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Call Settings.
2. Select the Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification checkbox.

Turn Off Flashing Alerts

You can turn off flashing alerts when the visual cue is not necessary in the RealPresence Group Series
system web interface.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Call Settings.
Clear the Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification checkbox.

Setting Up Audio-Only Calls

You can enable and disable audio-only calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Enable Audio-Only Calls

You can enable audio-only calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing
Options > and select Enable Audio-Only Calls.
Click Save.

Disable Audio-Only Calls

You can disable audio-only calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing
Options and clear the Enable Audio-Only Calls checkbox.
Click Save.

Select the Call Type Order for Audio-Only Calls

When Audio-Only Calls is enabled on your RealPresence Group Series system, you can choose the
audio order and dialing preference.

Polycom, Inc. 119

Configuring Call Settings

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing
Options > Call Type Order.
2. Select Phone then Video.
3. For the Audio Dial Preference 1 and Audio Dial Preference 2 settings, choose from the
following call types:
• IP H.323
• SIP
• Speakerphone (displays only when system is paired with SoundStation IP 7000 conference
phone)If the Enable Audio-Only Calls checkbox is cleared, the Audio Dial Preference 1
and Audio Dial Preference 2 settings are not displayed.
4. Click Save.

Place an Audio-Only Call from the System Web Interface

You can place audio-only calls from the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Place a Call > Manual Dial.
2. Select audio.
3. To place the call, do one of the following:
4. Enter the number and click Call.
5. Under Recent Calls, click the desired audio call.

Polycom, Inc. 120

Setting Up a Directory
Topics:

• Enable H.323
• Configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server
• Configure the LDAP Directory Server
• Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups
• Setting Up Speed Dial
• Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers

These topics describe how to manage and configure directory settings in the RealPresence Group Series
system web interface.
Having groups in the directory can help users find calling information quickly and easily. Polycom systems
support global groups and Favorites groups.
Systems support up to 2,000 favorite contacts that users create within Favorites. They can also support
one of the following:
• Up to 200 additional contacts with presence, which appear in Favorites, when registered with Skype
for Business 2015
• Up to 4,000 contacts from a Polycom GDS server
• An unlimited number of contacts when the system is registered with Skype for Business 2015
Up to 200 Favorites groups that users create within Favorites are supported. If the system is connected to
a global directory server, it can also support up to 64 additional groups from the Skype for Business
Server 2015, which appear in the Favorites group.

Note: Assistance from Polycom is mandatory for Skype for Business 2015 integrations. For
details, please refer to Polycom Collaboration Solutions or contact your local Polycom
representative.

Enable H.323
To use GDS in your environment, you must have H.323 enabled and registered on your RealPresence
Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings
and select the checkbox at Enable IP H.323.
2. Enter the required registration information as follows.

Polycom, Inc. 121

Setting Up a Directory

Setting Description

Enable IP H.323 Allows the H.323 settings to be displayed and

configured.

H.323 Name Specifies the name that gatekeepers and gateways

use to identify this system. You can make point-to-
point calls using H.323 names if both systems are
registered to a gatekeeper.
The H.323 Name is the same as the System
Name, unless you change it. Your organization's
dial plan might define the names you can use.

H.323 Extension (E.164) Lets users place point-to-point calls using the
extension if both systems are registered with a
gatekeeper, and specifies the extension that
gatekeepers and gateways use to identify this
system.
Your organization's dial plan might define the
extensions you can use.

Use Gatekeeper Turn the gatekeeper off or make it automatic.

Require Authentication Require authentication for IP H.323 connections.

Current Gatekeeper IP Address The IP address for the current gatekeeper.

Primary Gatekeeper IP Address The IP address for the primary gatekeeper.

Related Links
Configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server on page 122

Configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server

You can configure the Polycom GDS Directory Server in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface. But first, ensure that H.323 is enabled before you configure the Polycom GDS directory server.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and select the
Polycom GDS Service Type.
2. Configure these settings on the Directory Servers screen.

Setting Description

Server Address Specifies the IP address or DNS address of the

Global Directory Server. You can enter up to five
addresses.

Password Lets you enter the global directory password, if one

exists.

Polycom, Inc. 122

Setting Up a Directory

Related Links
Enable H.323 on page 121

Configure the LDAP Directory Server

You can configure the LDAP Directory Server in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and select the
LDAP Server Type.
2. Configure these settings on the Directory Servers screen.

LDAP Setting Description

Server Address Specifies the address of the LDAP directory server.

With Automatic Provisioning, this setting is
configured by the server and appears as read only.

Server Port Specifies the port used to connect to the LDAP

server. With Automatic Provisioning, this setting is
configured by the server and appears as read only.

Base DN (Distinguished Name) Specifies the top level of the LDAP directory where
searches will begin. With Automatic Provisioning,
this setting is configured by the server and appears
as read only.

Multitiered Directory Default Group DN Specifies the top level group of the LDAP directory
required to access the hierarchical structure. With
Automatic Provisioning, this setting is configured by
the server and appears as read only.

Authentication Type Specifies the protocol used for authentication with

the LDAP server: NTLM, BASIC, or Anonymous.

Use SSL (Secure Socket Layer) Enables SSL for securing data flow to and from the
LDAP server.

Domain Name Specifies the domain name for authentication with

the LDAP server.

User Name Specifies the user name for authentication with

LDAP server.

Password Specifies the password for authentication with the

LDAP server.

Polycom, Inc. 123

Setting Up a Directory

Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups

RealPresence Group Series system local interface users can select Contacts from the menu to view
favorites and the directory. Users can add favorites from the directory, create new favorite contacts, and
create favorite groups.
Related Links
Call a Favorite Contact on page 210

Types of Favorites Contacts

The RealPresence Group Series web system interface displays the following favorite contact types.

Directory Server Registration Types of Contacts Presence State Displayed

Polycom GDS • Directory entries created Unknown

locally by the user.

• References to Polycom Online/Offline

GDS entries added to
Favorites by the user.
These entries are available only if
the system is successfully
registered with Polycom GDS.
Users can delete these entries from
Favorites. Users can copy these
entries to other Favorites and
remove them from those groups.
Users cannot edit these entries.

LDAP with H.350 or Active • Directory entries created Unknown

Directory locally by the user
• References to LDAP
directory entries added to
Favorites by the user.
These entries are available only if
the system can successfully access
the LDAP/Active Directory server.
Users can delete these entries from
Favorites. Users can copy these
entries to other Favorites and
remove them from those groups.
Users cannot edit these entries.

Polycom, Inc. 124

Setting Up a Directory

Directory Server Registration Types of Contacts Presence State Displayed

Microsoft • Skype for Business Server Real-time presence

2015 directory entries are
saved as Contacts by the
user and stored on the
Skype server.
Users cannot edit or delete these
entries from Favorites using the
system. Users can copy these
entries to other Favorites and
remove them from those groups.

Create a Favorites Contact

You can create a Favorites contact in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2. Click Create New Favorite.
3. Enter the contact call information and click Save.

Create a Favorites Group

You can create a Favorites group in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2. Click Create New Group.
3. Enter a Name for the group and click Save.
A success message is displayed.
4. To add contacts to the group, click Add Contacts on the success message.
5. Enter a contact name in the search box and click Search.
6. In the entry you want to add to the group, click Add.
7. Repeat the above steps to add more contacts to the group.
8. Click Done.

Edit a Favorites Group

You can edit a Favorites group in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2. Find the group name in the list of contacts.
3. Next to the group contact name, click Edit Group.
Do one of the following:

Polycom, Inc. 125

Setting Up a Directory

• To add contacts to the group, click Search to add contacts to this group, enter a contact
name, click Search, and then Add to add a contact.
• To remove contacts from a group, next to a contact name, click Remove.
4. Repeat the above steps to continue adding or removing contacts.
5. Click Done.

Delete a Favorites Group

You can delete a Favorites group in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2. Next to the group or contact name, click Delete.
3. When a message asks you to confirm the delete, select Delete or Cancel.

Importing and Exporting Favorites

The Import/Export Directory feature enables you to download Favorites from a RealPresence Group
Series system to local devices, such as computers and tablets, in XML file format. It also allows you to
upload Favorites from a device to your system.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer
• Mozilla Firefox
For a list of supported browser versions, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release
Notes .
Keep the following points in mind when performing these tasks:
• The size of the uploaded XML file cannot exceed 3 megabytes.
• You can import favorites groups and entries both when you are in a call and when you are not in a
call.
• When the uploaded XML file includes favorites groups or entries already on the room system, the
duplicate files are added as separate directory entries.

Export Favorites Groups and Contacts

You can export Favorites groups and contacts from a RealPresence Group Series system to your local
device.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites > Import/Export > Download.
2. Save the downloaded directory.xml file on your local device.

Import Favorites Groups and Contacts

You can import Favorites groups and contacts and upload the directory file to your RealPresence Group
Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites > Import/Export > Choose File.
2. In the dialog box, select the directory.xml file you want to import and click Open.

Polycom, Inc. 126

Setting Up a Directory

3. Select Upload to upload the directory.xml file to the system.

Setting Up Speed Dial

You use speed dialing to quickly call an IP address designated as a Favorite. Speed Dial contacts are
displayed on the RealPresence Group Series system's local interface and on a paired RealPresence
Touch device. Speed dial entries do not appear when the RealPresence Group Series system is paired
with a Polycom Touch Control.
Related Links
Enable Kiosk Mode on page 128

Enable Speed Dial

You must enable the Speed Dial setting in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface before
users can use Speed Dial in the local interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Speed Dial.
2. Click Choose Favorites.
3. Search for contacts that you want to add to Speed Dial.
4. Select each contact and click Add.
5. After you have selected all of the contacts, click Save.

Add Speed Dial Contacts

You can add contacts from the system directory to the Speed Dial contacts list on the RealPresence
Group Series system's web interface and on a paired RealPresence Touch device.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2. Enter a contact name and click Search.
3. For the contact you want to add, click Add.
4. To save your changes, click Save.

Image File Requirements for Speed Dial Contacts

You can upload a photo or graphic for contacts in the Speed Dial list for the RealPresence Group Series
system and for a paired RealPresence Touch device. Note the following requirements for Speed Dial
images:
• JPEG format (.jpg or .jpeg extension)
• Image dimensions within a range of 300 to 2000 pixels (both width and height)
• File size less than 5 MB

Polycom, Inc. 127

Setting Up a Directory

Upload an Image File for Speed Dial Contacts

You can upload a photo or graphic for contacts in the Speed Dial list on your RealPresence Group Series
system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2. Click Choose File, navigate to the file, and click Open and Upload.
3. To save your changes, click Save.
The image is now displayed for the Speed Dial contact on the system Home screen and on a
paired RealPresence Touch.

Remove Speed Dial Contacts

You can remove contacts from the Speed Dial list in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2. For the contact you want to delete, click Remove.
3. To save your changes, click Save.
Related Links
Call a Speed Dial Contact on page 210

Kiosk Mode
In the RealPresence Group Series system local interface, Kiosk Mode simplifies the Home screen by
displaying only speed dial entries and calendar meetings (if enabled). In Kiosk Mode, therefore, users can
call speed dial numbers, join calendar meetings, and answer calls.
You must create your speed dial numbers before users can access Kiosk Mode.
Kiosk Mode is disabled by default. If Kiosk Mode is enabled, these conditions apply:
• The Home screen menu, Out of Call menu, and other icons are disabled.
• Alerts bring the local interface out of Kiosk Mode until you clear the alerts.
• You can still use the remote to adjust the volume, control the camera, and mute/unmute the
microphone when in calls.
• You can bring up the In a Call menu by pressing Menu on the remote during the call.

Enable Kiosk Mode

You must enable Kiosk Mode in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface before users can
use it in the system local interface. You also must either enable and configure Speed Dial or Calendaring
before Kiosk Mode is available.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, do one of the following:

Polycom, Inc. 128

Setting Up a Directory

• Enable and configure Speed Dial at Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings.
•Enable and configure the Calendaring Service at Admin Settings > Servers > Calendaring
Service.
2. Open Kiosk Mode, select Enable Kiosk Mode and click Save.
Related Links
Setting Up Speed Dial on page 127

Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers

The global directory provides a list of RealPresence Group Series systems that are registered with the
Global Directory Server and are available for calls. The other systems appear in the directory, allowing
users to place calls to participants by selecting their names.
Related Links
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation on page 38

Configuring a Directory Server

You can configure the RealPresence Group Series system to use one of the following directory servers in
standard operating mode.

Directory Servers Authentication Entry Calling

Supported Protocols Global Directory Groups Information

Microsoft NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:

distribution lists
Skype for Business • SIP address (SIP
Server 2015 URI)

LDAP Any of the following: Not Supported Might include:

with H.350 or Active • NTLM v2 only • H.323 IP address
Directory (raw IPv4
• Basic
address, DNS
• Anonymous name, H.323
dialed digits, H.
323 ID, or H.323
extension)
• SIP address (SIP
URI)
• ISDN number
• Phone number*

Polycom GDS Proprietary Not Supported Might include:

• H.323 IP address
(raw IPv4
address, DNS
name, or H.323
extension)
• ISDN number

Polycom, Inc. 129

Setting Up a Directory

Directory Servers Authentication Entry Calling

Supported Protocols Global Directory Groups Information

* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one of the
following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number

You can configure the system to use the following directory server when the system is automatically
provisioned by a RealPresence Resource Manager system.

Directory Servers Entry Calling

Supported Authentication Protocol Global Directory Groups Information

Skype for Business NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:
Server 2015 distribution lists
• SIP address (SIP
URI)

* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one of the
following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number

Polycom, Inc. 130

Configuring Audio Settings
Topics:

• Configure General Audio Settings

• Configure Audio Input Settings
• Audio Output Settings
• Stereo Settings
• Test StereoSurround
• Acoustic Fence Technology
▪ USB Headset Support

Configure General Audio Settings

You can configure audio settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. Some audio
settings are unavailable when a SoundStructure digital mixer is connected to a Polycom video
conferencing system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio.
2. At General Audio Settings, configure the Audio settings described in the following table.

Setting Description

Polycom StereoSurround Specifies that Polycom StereoSurround is used for

all calls.
To send or receive stereo audio, make sure your
RealPresence Group Series system is set up as
described in the following topics.

Sound Effects Volume Sets the volume level of the ring tone and user alert
tones.

Ringtone Specifies the ring tone used for incoming calls.

User Alert Tones Specifies the tone used for user alerts.

Audio Mute auto-answered Calls Specifies whether to mute incoming calls. Incoming
calls are muted until you press the Mute button on
the microphone or on the remote control.
Note: You must first enable Auto Answer Point-
to-Point Video or Auto Answer Multipoint Video.
These settings are in Admin Settings > General
Settings > System Settings > Call Settings.

Polycom, Inc. 131

Configuring Audio Settings

Setting Description

Enable MusicMode Specifies whether the system transmits audio using

a configuration that best reproduces interactive and
live performance music picked up by microphones.
This mode provides the highest possible bandwidth
for audio.
When MusicMode is enabled, even the faintest
musical notes come through clearly.
Note: Automatic noise suppression and automatic
gain control are disabled when MusicMode is
enabled.

Enable Keyboard Noise Reduction and Polycom Specifies whether the system mutes audio from the
NoiseBlock™ connected microphones when keyboard tapping
sounds or other extraneous noises are detected,
but no one is talking. NoiseBlock unmutes the
system when speech is detected, regardless of the
existence of background noise.
Note: Polycom MusicMode™ is disabled when this
setting is enabled. If an external echo canceller is
used, keyboard noise reduction is not available.

Transmission Audio Gain (dB) Specifies the audio level, in decibels, at which to
transmit sound. Unless otherwise advised, Polycom
suggests setting this value to 0 dB.

Enable Audio Mute Reminder Specifies whether to display a notification as a

reminder to unmute the connected microphone
when speaking is detected.

Enable Join and Leave Tones Plays an audible tone when a participant in a
multipoint call joins or leaves the call.
Note: This setting is available only when the
multipoint option key is installed.

Enable Acoustic Fence Specifies whether Acoustic Fence can be used or

not.

Acoustic Fence Sensitivity Specifies the microphone sensitivity for Acoustic

Fence Technology. You can set a value between 0
and 10, where 0 is the minimum sensitivity and 10
is the maximum sensitivity. Higher settings
increase the radius of the fence area around the
primary microphone.

Related Links
Acoustic Fence Technology on page 140
Audio Output Settings on page 137

Polycom, Inc. 132

Configuring Audio Settings

Configure Audio Input Settings

You can configure audio input settings for your RealPresence Group Series system type. The
RealPresence Group 300 system has no audio input settings, and the settings for the other RealPresence
Group Series systems are quite different.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
2. Configure the audio settings.
RealPresence Group 310 and 500 system Audio Input Settings are described in the following table.

Setting Description

Type Displays the 3.5mm connector for line-level stereo

audio input.

Audio Input Level Sets the 3.5 mm audio input level.

Playback Options Playback to All Locations

The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to all near
and far sites with no mute control and echo cancellation
for 3.5mm audio input. Default.

Playback to All Locations, Video Content

Associated
The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to near
and far sites when associated video content input has
active video input. There is no mute control and echo
cancellation for 3.5mm audio input.

Playback to Far Sites

The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call; there is no video content
association. Mute control and echo cancellation is not
supported for 3.5mm audio input. The near site does
not hear the 3.5mm audio input.

Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled

The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call. There is no video content
association. Muting the microphones also mutes the
3.5mm audio input. No echo cancellation is supported
for 3.5mm audio input. The near site does not hear the
3.5mm audio input.

Polycom, Inc. 133

Configuring Audio Settings

Setting Description

Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, Echo

Cancelled
The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call. There is no video content
association. Muting the microphones also mutes the
3.5mm audio input. The audio from the 3.5mm input is
echo cancelled. The near site does not hear the 3.5mm
audio input. This setting turns off EagleEye Acoustic
camera microphones.

Handset
The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call. There is no video content
association. Muting the microphones also mutes the
3.5mm audio input. The audio from 3.5mm input is
echo cancelled. The near site does not hear the 3.5mm
audio input. This setting does not turn off EagleEye
Acoustic camera microphones.

Echo Canceller Specifies whether to use the system's built-in echo

canceller for audio input. This setting is available only
when the Playback to Far sites, Mute Controlled,
Echo Cancelled setting is selected.

Associate with Video Content Ports When enabled, the 3.5 mm audio input is only heard
when the VGA or HDMI content video port is active.
When disabled, audio is not controlled by content video
port activities.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level for the 3.5 mm input port, left
and right channels.

Type Displays embedded audio from the HDMI connector.

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level for the HDMI input port, left
and right channels.

RealPresence Group 700 audio input settings are described in the following table.

Setting Description

Type Displays Line (dual RCA, auxiliary audio input).

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Polycom, Inc. 134

Configuring Audio Settings

Setting Description

Associate with Video Content Ports When enabled, the 3.5 mm audio input is only heard
when the VGA or HDMI content video port is active.
When disabled, audio is not controlled by content video
port activities.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right
channels.

Type Displays 3.5 mm (line-level stereo audio input,

associated with HD15/VGA video input 3).

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Playback Options Playback to All Locations

The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to all near
and far sites with no mute control and echo cancellation
for 3.5mm audio input. Default.

Playback to All Locations, Video Content

Associated
The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to near
and far sites when associated video content input has
active video input. There is no mute control and echo
cancellation for 3.5mm audio input.

Playback to Far Sites

The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call; there is no video content
association. Mute control and echo cancellation is not
supported for 3.5mm audio input. The near site does
not hear the 3.5mm audio input.

Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled

The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call. There is no video content
association. Muting the microphones also mutes the
3.5mm audio input. No echo cancellation is supported
for 3.5mm audio input. The near site does not hear the
3.5mm audio input.

Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, Echo

Cancelled
The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call. There is no video content
association. Muting the microphones also mutes the
3.5mm audio input. The audio from the 3.5mm input is
echo cancelled. The near site does not hear the 3.5mm
audio input. This setting turns off EagleEye Acoustic
camera microphones.

Polycom, Inc. 135

Configuring Audio Settings

Setting Description

Handset
The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far
sites if the system is in a call. There is no video content
association. Muting the microphones also mutes the
3.5mm audio input. The audio from 3.5mm input is
echo cancelled. The near site does not hear the 3.5mm
audio input. This setting does not turn off EagleEye
Acoustic camera microphones.

Echo Canceller Specifies whether to use the system's built-in echo

canceller for audio input. This setting is available only
when the Playback to Far sites, Mute Controlled,
Echo Cancelled setting is selected.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right
channels.

Type Displays HDMI 1 (HDMI connector embedded audio

input, associated with video input 1).

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right
channels.

Type Displays HDMI 2 (HDMI connector embedded audio

input, associated with video input 2).

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right
channels.

Type Displays HDMI 3 (HDMI connector embedded audio

input, associated with video input 3).

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right
channels.

Type Displays Component (dual RCA, associated with

component video input 4).

Audio Input Level Sets the audio input level.

Audio Meter (not labeled) Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right
channels.

Related Links
Acoustic Fence Technology on page 140

Polycom, Inc. 136

Configuring Audio Settings

Audio Output Settings on page 137

Stereo Settings on page 139

3.5mm Audio Input

You can select how to enable 3.5mm audio input from the RealPresence Group Series system 3.5mm
audio port in the system web interface.
In active calls, you can enable 3.5mm audio input on the near-end conference site. After you enable
audio 3.5mm input for use during active calls, 3.5mm audio input is heard during active calls from the
system speakers and from all far-end sites.
If you enable 3.5mm audio input for use when content sharing is active, 3.5mm audio input is only active
when either HDMI or VGA video input is active.
When HDMI or VGA video input is active and the system is in an active call, 3.5mm audio input is heard
from the system speakers and from all far-end sites. If audio is part of active HDMI or VGA content, the
3.5mm audio input mixes in with the HDMI or VGA audio input.

Audio Output Settings

You must connect at least one speaker to the RealPresence Group Series systems to hear audio. You
can use the speakers built into the main monitor, or you can connect an external speaker system, such
as the Polycom StereoSurround kit, to provide more volume and richer sound in large rooms.
When you connect a SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone to a RealPresence Group Series system,
the conference phone becomes another way to dial audio or video calls. The conference phone also
operates as a microphone, and as a speaker in audio-only calls.
Refer to your system setup sheet for connection details. Make sure that the system is powered off before
you connect devices to it.
Related Links
Configure Audio Input Settings on page 133
Configure Audio Output Settings on page 137
Configure General Audio Settings on page 131
Stereo Settings on page 139

Configure Audio Output Settings

You can configure the audio output settings for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Output.
2. Configure the Audio settings described in the following table.

Polycom, Inc. 137

Configuring Audio Settings

Setting Description

Master Audio Volume Sets the main audio output volume level going to
the speakers.

Bass Sets the volume level for the low frequencies

without changing the master audio volume.

Treble Sets the volume level for the high frequencies

without changing the master audio volume.

Type Displays the current audio output type. This setting

is read only.

Output Mode Specifies whether volume for a device connected to

the line out connectors is variable or fixed.
• Variable—Allows users to set the
volume with the remote control.
• Fixed—Sets the volume to the Audio
Level specified in the system interface.

Audio Output Meters Displays the output level meter for the left and right
outputs. This setting is read only.
Note: To disable HDMI audio output when using
3.5mm audio output, do the following. In the system
web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/
Video > Monitors and set the Monitor 1 Enable
setting to Manual. At Video Format, select DVI.

Related Links
Acoustic Fence Technology on page 140
Audio Output Settings on page 137

Set the Speaker Volume

You can set and test the volume of speakers connected to your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video Tests > Speaker Test.
2. Click Start to start the speaker test.
3. Adjust the volume of the speaker.
From the center of the room the test tone should be as loud as a person speaking loudly, about
80-90 dBA on a sound pressure level meter.
4. Click Stop to stop the speaker test.

Polycom, Inc. 138

Configuring Audio Settings

Stereo Settings
To send or receive stereo audio, make sure your RealPresence Group Series system equipment is set up
correctly. Then configure the room system to use Polycom StereoSurround, test the system configuration,
and place a test call.
If you are in a call with a far site that is sending audio in stereo mode, you can receive in stereo. In
multipoint calls where some sites can send and receive stereo and some sites cannot, any site that is set
up to send or receive stereo can do so. The following Stereo Settings are available.

Setting Description

Polycom Microphone Type Displays the type of Polycom microphone being used.

Stereo Positions the audio input within the left and right
channels. Left sends all of the audio to the left channel.
Right sends all of the audio to the right channel. For
Polycom digital microphone and ceiling microphone
arrays, Left+Right sends audio from one microphone
element to the left channel and audio from a second
element to the right channel.

Autorotation Specifies whether autorotation is used for Polycom

microphones. If this feature is enabled, the system
automatically assigns left and right channels for the
microphone based on sound it senses from the left and
right speakers.
Note: This feature does not work when headphones
are used.

Audio Meter (dB meter) Lets you see the peak input signal level for Polycom
microphones.

To ensure that your room system equipment is set up correctly, refer to the following topics.
Related Links
Configure Audio Input Settings on page 133
Audio Output Settings on page 137

Test StereoSurround
After you configure the RealPresence Group Series system to use Polycom StereoSurround, test the
system configuration and place a test call.

Procedure
1. Make sure the microphones are positioned correctly.
2. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
3. Gently blow on the left leg and right leg of each Polycom microphone while watching the bar
meters to identify the left and right inputs.

Polycom, Inc. 139

Configuring Audio Settings

4. Test the speakers to check volume and verify that audio cables are connected.
If the system is in a call, the far site hears the tone.
Exchange the right and left speakers if they are reversed.
Adjust the volume control on your external audio amplifier so that the test tone sounds as loud as
a person speaking in the room. If you use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, it should measure
about 80-90 dBA in the middle of the room.
5. Repeat the steps above for Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Output.

Acoustic Fence Technology

Polycom® Acoustic Fence Technology™ uses standard Polycom microphone arrays to build a virtual fence
around a user or multiple users. The audio is automatically muted when all sounds originate outside a
boundary. If a speaker is talking inside the fence, the volume is not altered, but sounds outside the fence
are lowered by 12 dB. Once the speaker leaves the fenced area, the audio is muted.
In addition to the primary Polycom microphone array, one or more fence microphone arrays are required.
You can use up to four microphones with RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems. Acoustic Fence
Technology is not supported on RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems. The boundary radius can be
two feet to several feet around the following Polycom peripherals:
The boundary radius can be two feet to several feet around the following Polycom peripherals:
• Polycom microphone array
• Desktop microphones
• Ceiling microphones
• EagleEye View camera
• Polycom® EagleEye Acoustic camera
This feature works in mono mode only. If StereoSurround is enabled when you enable the Acoustic
Fence feature, a notification is displayed. “Enabling Acoustic Fence will disable Polycom
StereoSurround.”
Related Links
Configure Audio Input Settings on page 133
Configure Audio Output Settings on page 137
Configure General Audio Settings on page 131

Configure the Acoustic Fence

Before you can use the Acoustic Fence, you must configure settings in the RealPresence Group Series
system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio.
2. Select the Enable Acoustic Fence checkbox.
3. Set Acoustic Fence Sensitivity from 0 to 10, where 0 is the minimum microphone sensitivity and
10 is the maximum microphone sensitivity.
Higher values increase the radius of the fence area around the primary microphone.

Polycom, Inc. 140

Configuring Audio Settings

For more details on the setup and the associated scenarios, search the Polycom Knowledgebase for
"acoustic fence" and a white paper is listed at http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/
knowledgebase/search.htm.

USB Headset Support

USB headsets, Bluetooth headsets with USB adapters, are supported as audio input/output devices with
RealPresence Group Series systems. The headset functions automatically without any required
configuration or intervention. After verifying the headset hardware and software is supported, plug in the
headset to an available USB port on the system, or enable pairing mode and plug in the USB adapter.
You can hear and control audio on your device while your headset is connected to the system. The USB
headset audio controls do not change the system audio functions such as mute or volume control.
Only a single headset can connect to the system at one time. Once connected, the headset is used as
the primary audio input and output device for the system. Headsets with these sampling rates are
supported: 8 kHz, 16 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz or 48 kHz.
The USB 2.0 ports support USB headsets.
RealPresence Group 700 systems also include a USB 3.0 port, which does not support USB headsets.
For a list of supported headsets, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes at
Polycom Support.

Polycom, Inc. 141

Configuring Video Settings
Topics:

• Monitor Resolution Rates for RealPresence Group Series Systems

• Full-Motion HD
• Maximize HDTV Video Display
• Monitor Profiles
• Prevent Monitor Burn-In
▪ Adjust Brightness for Room Lighting
• CEC Monitor Controls
▪ Configure Video Input Settings
• Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings
• Configuring Monitor Settings
• Third-Party Touch Panel Controls
• Configure Secondary Monitors for Content

The following topics describe how to configure video settings in the system web interface.

Monitor Resolution Rates for RealPresence Group

Series Systems
You might need to know the monitor resolutions for the particular RealPresence Group Series system that
you are using. The following tables provide resolution rates for the video standards NTSC and PAL for
Monitor 1, Monitor 2, and Monitor 3 (RealPresence Group 700 system only). The following table shows
the Monitor 1 Resolution Rates.

RealPresence Group System

Type NTSC Video Standard PAL Video Standard

RealPresence Group 300/500 HDMI/DVI:1080p60, 720p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50, 720p50,

1080i60 108050

RealPresence Group 700 HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, 720p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50, 720p50,

1080i60 108050

VGA: 1080p60, 720p60 VGA: 1080p60, 720p60

Component: 1080p60, 720p60, Component: 1080p50, 720p50,

1080i60 1080i50

Polycom, Inc. 142

Configuring Video Settings

The following table shows the Monitor 2 Resolution Rates.

RealPresence Group System

Type NTSC Video Standard PAL Video Standard

RealPresence Group 300/500 HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50,

1280x1024p60,720p60, 1080i60, 1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60 1024x768p60

RealPresence Group 700 HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50,

1280x1024p60,720p60, 1080i60, 1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60 1024x768p60

VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60, VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60,

720p60, 1024x768p60 720p60, 1024x768p60

Component: 1080p60, 720p 60, Component: 1080p50, 720p

1080i60 50,1080i50

The following table shows the Monitor 3 Resolution Rates.

Monitor 3 Resolution Rates

RealPresence Group System

Type NTSC Video Standard PAL Video Standard

RealPresence Group 700 HDMI/DVI 1080p60, 1280x1024p HDMI/DVI 1080p50,

1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
60,720p60, 1080i60, 1024x768p60
1024x768p60

VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60, VGA: 1080p50, 1280x1024p60,

720p60, 720p60, 1024x768p60
1024x768p60

Component: 1080p60, 720p 60, Component: 1080p50, 720p 50,

1080i60 1080i50

Full-Motion HD
With RealPresence Group Series systems, Polycom sets a higher bar for video and audio performance.
Seeing participants in full 1080p 60 fps, or full-motion HD, brings video to a new level of realism. Full-
motion HD provides those clear, vibrant visuals and flawless audio that are critical to replicating an “in the
same room” experience.
In group collaboration, the quality of content is as important as the quality of the people on video. Content
that is grainy, pixelated, or slow to update makes it hard to get the most out of your meetings. With
RealPresence Group Series systems, you share full-motion HD people and content at the same time,
which helps eliminate compromises when sharing across distances.

Polycom, Inc. 143

Configuring Video Settings

Maximize HDTV Video Display

When you use a television as your monitor, some HDTV settings might interfere with the video display or
quality of your calls. To avoid this potential problem, disable all audio enhancements in the HDTV menu,
such as SurroundSound.
In addition, many HDTVs have a low-latency mode called Game Mode, which could lower video and
audio latency. Although Game Mode is typically turned off by default, you might have a better experience
if you turn it on.
Before attaching your RealPresence Group Series system to a TV monitor, ensure the monitor is
configured to display all available pixels. This setting, also known as “fit to screen” or “dot by dot,” enables
the entire HD image to be displayed. The specific name of the monitor setting varies by manufacturer.

Monitor Profiles
Monitor Profiles set the preferences for which video layout panel views are shown on each monitor
connected to the system. You can customize the monitor configuration to match your environment or your
desired meeting experience. The Monitor Profile settings are just preferences. What you see can vary
depending on layout panel views, whether content is being shown, the number of active monitors, and so
on.
The layout view names provide hints on the priority of the panels. So, for example in the Content, then
Far, then Near layout view, the system displays the panels in this order: Content first, then any remote
speakers (Far), then the local camera (Near). The panel that is listed first is the largest panel. In this
example, the Content panel is larger than the far or the near panels.
Several multipoint layouts are supported, as well as dual-monitor compositing. When you use two
monitors of equal size, you have the capability of up to eight-way multipoint calling, depending on your
system configuration. When sharing content, one monitor is used for content and one for people, but the
configuration varies, depending on whether you have enabled Self View and how many people are
participating. When you do not share content, the configuration for both monitors is spread over both
monitors, again depending on whether Self View is enabled and how many participants are in the call.
Depending upon your system, the number of participant panels can vary, as shown in the following table.

Number of Panels in the Layouts Number of Panels in the Layouts

System Model on the Internal MCU on the Far-End Sites

RealPresence Group 700 8 (all participants are displayed) 8 (Up to 8 participants are
displayed, regardless of the latest
speakers)

RealPresence Group 500 6 (all participants are displayed) 4 (Up to 4 latest speakers)
RealPresence Group 310

Configure Monitor Profile Settings

You can configure monitor layout profile settings for each monitor connected to the RealPresence Group
Series system.

Polycom, Inc. 144

Configuring Video Settings

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors > Monitor Profile.
2. For each monitor connected to the system, you can configure the following settings.

Monitor 3
Monitor Profile (RealPresence
Name Description Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Group 700 only)

Content, then Sets Monitors 1 or Yes Yes No

Far, then Near 2 to share content.
The system
displays the
panels in this
order of priority:
Content first in the
largest panel, then
any remote
speakers (Far),
then the local
camera (Near).
Default for Monitor
1 if only one
monitor is
connected to the
system.
Default for Monitor
2 if 2 or more
monitors are
connected to the
system.

Far, then Near Sets Monitor 1 or Yes Yes No

2 to show the far-
end in the largest
panel, then the
near-end. Default
for Monitor 1 if
there are 2 or
more monitors
connected to the
system.

Far Only Sets Monitors 1, 2, Yes Yes Yes

or 3 to show the
far-end only.

Polycom, Inc. 145

Configuring Video Settings

Monitor 3
Monitor Profile (RealPresence
Name Description Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Group 700 only)

Content, then Sets Monitor 2 to No Yes No

Near display shared
content in the
larger panel. If no
content is
displayed, the
monitor shows the
person speaking
at the near-end.

Content, then Far Sets Monitors 1 or Yes Yes No

2 to display
shared content in
the larger panel. If
no content is
shared, the
monitor displays
the far-end
speaker panel
only.

Far, then Sets Monitors 1 or Yes No No

Content, then 2 to share content.
Near The system
displays the
panels in this
order of priority:
remote speakers
first (Far), then
any content in the
largest panel, and
then the local
camera (Near).

Content Only Sets Monitor 2 or No Yes Yes

3 to display
shared content as
the only panel. If
no content is
shared, the
monitor shows the
room background.

Near Only Sets Monitor 2 or No Yes Yes

3 to show the
near-end site only.
Another name for
this view is Self
View.

Polycom, Inc. 146

Configuring Video Settings

Monitor 3
Monitor Profile (RealPresence
Name Description Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Group 700 only)

Record Mode Sets Monitor 3 to No No Yes

display shared
content or the
person speaking.
Content sharing
takes priority over
displaying the
person speaking.
Select this setting
to record near, far,
and content audio.
If someone is
sharing content,
the video is
recorded in full
screen. If no one
is sharing content,
the speaker is
recorded in full
screen.
Available only on
RealPresence
Group 700
systems.

Record Mode Sets Monitor 3 to No No Yes

With Content show the current
person speaking,
regardless of the
speaker's location.
Select this setting
to record near, far,
and content audio.
Only the speaker
is recorded in full
screen.
Available only on
RealPresence
Group 700
systems.

The Automatic Self View setting can also affect what displays on the monitors.
Configure Call Settings
Related Links
Configure Monitor Settings on page 155

Polycom, Inc. 147

Configuring Video Settings

Prevent Monitor Burn-In

You can configure when you want a system to go to sleep after a period of inactivity. Monitors and
systems provide display settings to help prevent image burn-in. Plasma televisions can be particularly
vulnerable to this problem. Refer to your monitor's documentation or manufacturer for specific
recommendations and instructions. The following guidelines help prevent image burn-in:
• Ensure that static images are not displayed for long periods.
• Set the Time before system goes to sleep to 60 minutes or less.
• To keep the screen clear of static images during a call, disable the following settings:
◦ Display Icons in a Call (Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings)
◦ Show Time in Call (Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time in Call)
• Be aware that meetings that last more than an hour without much movement can have the same
effect as a static image.
• Consider decreasing the monitor's sharpness, brightness, and contrast settings if they are set to
their maximum values.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Sleep.
2. At Display, select whether you want to display black video or a no signal message.
3. At Time Before System Goes to Sleep, select the number of minutes the system can be idle
before it goes to sleep.
4. At Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Mode, select this checkbox to mute the system microphone during
sleep mode.

Adjust Brightness for Room Lighting

In certain environments, bright content from displays, windows, or light fixtures can cause the camera's
autoexposure setting to darken the exposure beyond what is preferred. To remedy the issue, you can
optimize the highlights and lowlights using the Brightness setting.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs > [Input
Name]Brightness.
2. Set Brightnessto the minimum value.
3. Move the camera so that only a few very dark portions are shown; include at least one portion with
an acceptable exposure.
4. If the setting needs more adjustment, increase the value at slight intervals.

CEC Monitor Controls

Consumer Electronics Control (CEC) monitor controls allow administrators to wake up monitors and place
the system on standby for power saving. You can enable CEC on external monitors connected via HDMI,
if they support the CEC protocol.

Polycom, Inc. 148

Configuring Video Settings

The following CEC features are available:

• One Touch Play-Use the system remote to wake up the monitors. All connected CEC-capable
monitors are powered on, and their displays are switched to room system input.
• System Standby-When the room system enters sleep mode, all connected CEC-capable monitors
are switched to standby mode for power saving. When waking up, the monitors are powered up
before they display system video.
Note the following points about using CEC controls with Polycom systems:
• If you connect to the monitor with an HDMI splitter, ensure the HDMI splitter is CEC-capable. Due
to HDMI splitter limitations, monitors behind a 1xM (one-input multiple-output) HDMI splitter powers
on, but might not switch to the correct input when it wakes up.
• The system does not respond to CEC commands issued by a television remote control.
• If a CEC-capable monitor is connected to a room system and another endpoint, the monitor
displays the active endpoint when the system is in standby mode.
CEC functionality is enabled by default on RealPresence Group Series systems. All connected monitors
must support CEC. Not all HDMI monitors support CEC commands. Refer to the following list of CEC-
enabled monitors: CEC-XBMC
To verify that CEC is enabled, navigate to your monitor CEC settings. Many monitors also have sub-
feature settings under the main CEC setting that control whether or not the monitor responds to CEC
commands. For example, CEC Auto Power Off controls whether or not the monitor powers off when
receiving a CEC standby command. Make sure to enable all CEC sub-features.
Each monitor brand might have different CEC feature and sub-feature settings. Ensure that all monitors
connected to the system are all enabled for CEC.
Note that on the HDMI channel, the system is identified as Polycom.

Enable CEC Controls

You can enable CEC settings in the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors > Consumer
Electronics Control.
2. At Enable Consumer Electronics Control, select the checkbox.

Disable CEC Controls

You can disable CEC settings in the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors > Consumer
Electronics Control.
2. At Enable Consumer Electronics Control, clear the checkbox.

Configure Video Input Settings

Settings for each video input connected to your room system are available in the system web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 149

Configuring Video Settings

Note: Settings that do not apply to the selected video input are not displayed. For example, if a
specific camera is not connected to your room system, the related settings are not
displayed.

Procedure
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs. Configure the
following settings as needed.
Configure Video input Settings

Setting Description

Model Displays the type of device using the video input port.

Name Displays the default name of the video input, or enter your own
name for the device.

Display as Specifies whether the video input is to be used for People or

Content. The selection you make here determines the available
settings for the device in the embedded interface. For example, a
People source has settings for PTZ and near/far camera control,
but a Content source has different settings.

Input format Specifies the source type of the device. This setting is read only
unless the system does not detect the device.

Optimized for Specifies Motion or Sharpness for the video input.

Motion— Gives preference to frames per second over resolution.
For the input from the connected source, selects 720p/60 over
1080p/30.
Sharpness— Gives preference to resolution over frames per
second. For the input from the connected source, selects 1080p/30
over 720p/60. The picture will be sharp and clear, but moderate to
heavy motion at low call rates can cause some frames to be
dropped. Sharpness is available in point-to-point H.263 and H.264
calls only. It is required for HD calls between 512 kbps and 2
Mbps.

Tracking Mode (Polycom EagleEye Director Specifies the type of camera tracking:
Camera)
• Voice—Locates and frames the speaker. When another speaker
starts talking, the view switches from the first speaker to the room,
then to the next speaker.
• Direct Cut—Tracks directly from speaker to speaker if silence
intervals are less than 3 seconds. You must recalibrate the left
camera when you select Direct Cut mode.
If camera tracking has not been calibrated, Tracking Mode is
unavailable.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Director camera.

Polycom, Inc. 150

Configuring Video Settings

Setting Description

Tracking Speed (Polycom EagleEye Determines how quickly the system finds someone new and
Director Camera) switches to that person. The room environment can have an
influence on the speed of locating new speakers in the room.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Director camera.

Backlight Compensation Specifies whether to have the camera automatically adjust for a
bright background. Backlight compensation is best used in
situations where the subject appears darker than the background.
Enabling this setting helps to relieve a bright background, which
can impact the tracking performance of the EagleEye Director II
camera.

White Balance Specifies how the camera compensates for variations in room light
sources. Select Auto, Manual, or a color temperature value.
Auto - Polycom recommends this setting for most situations. It
calculates the best white balance setting based on lighting
conditions in the room.
Manual - Use this setting for rooms where the Auto and fixed
values do not provide acceptable color reproduction.
After you set the White Balance to Manual, fill the camera’s field
of view with a flat white object, such as a piece of paper. For best
results, the object should be uniformly illuminated with light that is
representative of the room lighting that will be used in the
conference, rather than light from a display, another area, or a
shadow. After the object is in place, click Calibrate.
Color Temperature Value - The color temperature values,
measured in degrees Kelvin, correspond to the color of ambient
light in a room. Because the available color temperature values
vary by camera, this list is a sampling of some of the values you
might see in the interface:
3200 K (tungsten bulb)
3680 K (warm office fluorescent)
4160 K (cool office fluorescent)
5120 K (neutral daylight)
5600 K (cool daylight)

Brightness Provides a slider to adjust how bright the image is.

Color Saturation Provides a slider to adjust how saturated the color is.

Polycom, Inc. 151

Configuring Video Settings

Setting Description

Tracking Mode (Polycom EagleEye Specifies the tracking mode:

Producer Camera)
Frame Speaker - This is the default setting. During a conference,
this mode frames the active speaker, then when someone else
starts speaking, the camera view changes to frame the new
speaker. Note that when the tracking mode is set to Frame
Speaker and the local microphone is muted, the camera tracking
mode automatically switches to Frame Group.
Frame Group - Enables automatic locating and framing of
participants in the room without displaying camera motion between
frames.
Frame Group with Transition - Enables automatically identifying
and framing all individuals within the camera field of view and
framing of the participants in the room.
Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera control must be
handled manually.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Producer camera.

Tracking Speed (Polycom EagleEye Specifies the tracking speed. The room environment can have an
Producer Camera) influence on the speed of locating new speakers in the room.
Slow - Detects meeting participants at a slow speed rate.
Normal - This is the default tracking speed. Detects meeting
participants at a normal speed rate.
Fast - Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Producer camera.

Framing Size (Polycom EagleEye Producer Specifies the framing view:

Camera)
Wide - Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
Medium - This is the default group framing view. Establishes a
medium view of meeting participants.
Tight - Establishes a close-up view of meeting participants
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Producer camera.

Polycom, Inc. 152

Configuring Video Settings

Setting Description

Tracking Mode (Polycom EagleEye Director Specifies the tracking mode:

II Camera)
Frame Speaker - This is the default setting. During a conference,
this mode frames the active speaker, then when someone else
starts speaking, the camera view changes to frame the new
speaker. Note that when the tracking mode is set to Frame
Speaker and the local microphone is muted, the camera tracking
mode automatically switches to Frame Group.
Frame Group - Enables automatic locating and framing of the
group participants in the room without displaying the camera
motion between frames.
Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera control must be
handled manually.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Director II camera system.

Tracking Speed (Polycom EagleEye Specifies the tracking speed:

Director II Camera)
Slow - Detects meeting participants at a slow speed rate.
Normal - This is the default locating and framing speed. Detects
meeting participants at a normal speed rate.
Fast - Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Director II camera system.

Framing Size (Polycom EagleEye Director II Specifies the framing view:

Camera)
Wide - Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
Medium - This is the default group framing view. Establishes a
medium view of meeting participants.
Tight - Establishes a close-up view of meeting participants
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Director II camera system.

Picture in Picture (Polycom EagleEye Specifies the picture in picture:

Director II Camera)
Checked: When the camera in the EagleEye Director II base is
turned on, the group view displays in the bottom right corner, along
with the speaker view.
Unchecked: No room view.
The Default option is On.
Note: Setting is available only when you have installed an
EagleEye Director II camera system.

Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings

You can configure RS-232 serial port settings in the system web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 153

Configuring Video Settings

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
2. Configure the following settings in the sections on the Serial Ports screen.

Setting Description

RS-232 Mode Specifies the mode used for the serial port.
Available settings depend on the system model.
• Off—Disables the serial port.
• Pass Thru—Passes data to an RS-232
device, such as a serial printer or certain
types of medical devices, connected to
the serial port of the far-site system.
Only available in point-to-point calls.
• Closed Caption—Receives closed
captions from a dial-up modem or a
stenographer machine through the
RS-232 port.
• Camera Control—Passes data to and
from a third-party camera.
• Control—Receives control signals from
a touch-panel control. Allows any device
connected to the RS-232 port to control
the system using API commands.
Note: If you have a RealPresence Group 300, 310,
or 500 system, use only the Polycom serial cable
with part number 2457-63542-001 to connect
devices to the RS-232 serial port.

Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits Set these to the same values that they are set to on
the serial device.

RS-232 Flow Control This setting works with RS-232 modes that are not
currently available. The setting is not currently
configurable.

Polycom, Inc. 154

Configuring Video Settings

Setting Description

Login Mode Specifies the credentials necessary for a control

system to connect to the RS-232 port.
• Admin password only—Requires the
admin password, if one has been set,
when the control system connects.
(default)
• Username/Password—Requires the
user name and the admin password, if
one has been set, when the control
system connects.
• None—No user name or password is
required when the control system
connects.
Note: This setting only displays when RS-232
Mode is set to Control.

Related Links
Third-Party Touch Panel Controls on page 156

Configuring Monitor Settings

The RealPresence Group Series system constantly detects any monitors connected to it. You choose
which monitors with the Enable setting. You can also add a Monitor Profile to manage a group of monitor
settings.

Note: Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect any devices.

Configure Monitor Settings

You might need to configure monitor settings for the monitors connected to your system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2. Configure these settings on the Monitors screen.
The settings for Monitor 1, Monitor 2, and Monitor 3 are nearly the same, although the available
features can be different. Monitor 3 is available for RealPresence Group 700 systems only.

Polycom, Inc. 155

Configuring Video Settings

Setting Description

Enable Specifies the monitor setting:

• Auto-This is the default setting.
Specifies that the Video Format and
Resolution settings are automatically
detected and disables those settings.
• Manual-Enables you to select the Video
Format and Resolution settings.
Resolution settings are filtered based
on the Video Format you selected.
• Off-Disable this monitor (not available
for Monitor 1)

Monitor Profile Specifies which profile to use for this monitor. The
choices depend on how many monitors the system
uses and which monitor you are configuring.

Video Format Specifies the monitor's format. Depending on which

RealPresence Group Series system and monitor
you configure, the choices are:
• HDMI
• DVI
• Component
• VGA
This setting is unavailable when you select Auto
for the Enable setting.
Note: To disable HDMI output when using 3.5mm
audio output, do the following. In the system web
interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Monitors and set the Monitor 1 Enable setting to
Manual. At Video Format, select DVI.

Resolution Specifies the resolution for the monitor.

Note: This setting is unavailable when you select
Auto for the Enable setting.

Related Links
Configure Monitor Profile Settings on page 144

Third-Party Touch Panel Controls

As part of a custom room installation, you can connect an AMX or Crestron control panel to a
RealPresence Group Series system RS-232 serial port. To get started, complete these two main tasks:
• Program the control panel. Refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Guide for information about the API commands.
• Set the desired Login Mode for the control panel on the RealPresence Group Series system.

Polycom, Inc. 156

Configuring Video Settings

Related Links
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings on page 153

Configure Secondary Monitors for Content

If you have a multiple monitor setup with more than one touch monitor, and you want to use touch to
control content on secondary monitors, you must configure settings on both the local and system web
interfaces. The primary touch monitor is the one that you use to control the system's local interface.
Secondary monitors are any additional monitors connected to the system. If only one touch monitor is
connected to the system, the following configuration steps are not necessary.

Procedure
1. In the local interface, use a remote control to navigate to Settings > Administration > Touch
Monitor > Configure.
2. Under Enable touch interaction on this monitor, click Start.
3. Click the screen on the area indicated.
The system recognizes the monitor as a touch monitor.
4. In the system's web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
5. For Monitor 1 at Enable, select Auto or Manual.
At Monitor Profile, select Far, Then Near or Far Only.
6. For Monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, select Content Only or one of the other content profiles.
If you have 3 monitors, follow the steps above for monitors 1 and 2 and select Far Only, Content
Only, or Near Only for monitor 3.
Now you can use the primary monitor to control the system's local interface, and a secondary
monitor to show content.

Polycom, Inc. 157

Configuring a Camera or Camera
Control System
Topics:

• Configure Camera Settings

• Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye IV Camera
• EagleEye Acoustic Camera Indicator Lights
• Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye Producer System
▪ Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System
• Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Director
• Camera Presets

If you connect a supported PTZ camera, the system detects the camera type and sets the appropriate
configuration. Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it.
Refer to your system setup sheet and to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Guide for connection details. Refer to the release notes for a list of supported PTZ cameras.
RealPresence Group 700 systems provide inputs for multiple PTZ cameras. RealPresence Group 310
and 500 systems can support a second non-PTZ camera, but do not support camera control for a second
camera.
All Polycom cameras can receive IR signals. RealPresence Group Series systems have built-in IR
receivers to receive signals from the remote control. Point the remote control at the system or your
Polycom camera to control it.
The system can provide power to the EagleEye III and EagleEye IV cameras through an HDCI connector.
The cameras do not require any additional power supply or IR extender.
The RealPresence Group 700 system supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the
camera when the system is powered off. So, if the camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI
connector attached to the system, it does not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the
system using the handheld remote.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the remote
control, use one of these solutions:
• Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the elective EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain powered on, so that the
camera is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
• Position the system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system has a line-of-sight to the
remote control.
• Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the system.
Sleep and wake states are supported, where the system provides power to the EagleEye IV or EagleEye
III camera. This allows the cameras to wake from a Sleep state through a signal received by the camera's
IR sensor. The camera does not require any additional power supply or IR extender.

Polycom, Inc. 158

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Configure Camera Settings

You can configure camera settings for cameras connected to your system. Although you can connect
devices that are not automatically discovered, the available choices in the interface might not be the
same as they would for automatically discovered devices. For example, if you connect an unsupported
camera, the system attempts to show video. Polycom does not guarantee that the results will be optimal
or that you can set up the camera the same as for a supported camera.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs.
Configure the following settings as needed:

Setting Description

Allow Other Participants In a Call to Control Specifies whether the far site can pan, tilt, or zoom
Your Camera the near-site camera. When this setting is selected,
a user at the far site can control the framing and
angle of the camera for the best view of the near
site. This is sometimes also called Far End Camera
Control (FECC).

Power Frequency Specifies the power line frequency for your system.
In most cases, the system defaults to the correct
power line frequency, based on the video standard
used in the country where the system is located.
This setting allows you to adapt the system in
areas where the power line frequency does not
match the video standard used. You might need to
change this setting to avoid flicker from the
fluorescent lights in your conference room.

Make This Camera Your Main Camera Specifies which is the primary camera. You specify
the main camera when you set up the system, but
you can change that selection here.
Input 1 is typically your main camera.

Enable People+ContentIP™ Enables the ability to use the People+Content IP

application.

Polycom, Inc. 159

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Setting Description

Enable Camera Preset Snapshot Icons Enables the use of snapshot icons that represent
camera preset configurations. The default setting is
controlled by the Security Profile, but you can
change the default here.
If you change your security profile setting from Low
or Medium to High or Maximum, or if you disable
the setting, the system replaces each preset image
with a blue, striped box. Presets that have not been
configured show as empty rectangles.
When you disable the Enable Camera Preset
Snapshot Icons setting in the system web
interface, the blue, striped boxes in the local
interface show you which presets are configured,
but enabling the setting does not redisplay the
snapshot icons. You can see snapshot icons that
represent preset configuration images only when
you configure a preset with the Enable Camera
Preset Snapshot Icons setting enabled.

Camera Sleep Mode Specifies a sleep mode for your camera.

Fast Wake Up: Provides an image from the
camera as soon as the monitor is awake. In a sleep
condition, the camera faces forward and has power
so that it is held in that position. Set the Sleep
Display mode to Black for a quicker video image
on the display, but be aware that this mode uses
maximum power. Setting the Sleep Display mode
to No Signal requires the display to synchronize
with the video output; this can take a few seconds,
but depending upon the monitor, this could
conserve energy, since this is low power mode.
Save Energy: Removes power from the camera; it
spins to the rear and faces down, but the camera
can still move. When the Sleep Display mode is
set to No Signal, by the time the display
synchronizes with the system, the camera is
sending an image. When Sleep Display mode is
set to Black, it takes a few seconds for the camera
to send an image. Save Energy applies only when
a camera is connected to the system, but not when
the EagleEye Producer or EagleEye Director is
connected to the system.

Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye IV Camera

The Polycom EagleEye IV cameras are digital with a 4k sensor that is specifically designed to work with
RealPresence Group Series systems. These cameras have an available privacy cover, wide-angle lens,
and digital extender.

Polycom, Inc. 160

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

For information about setting up these cameras, refer to Installing the Polycom EagleEye IV Wide Angle
Lens, Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye IV Cameras, Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye IV Camera
Privacy Cover, and Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye Digital Extender which are available at Polycom
Support.

EagleEye IV Camera Orientation

After you have connected your EagleEye IV camera, you might want to change the camera's orientation.
EagleEye IV cameras can be mounted upside down to accommodate special video conferencing
situations. The orientation of the video display and pan/tilt functions work transparently so that the
inverted position is transparent to end users. The default orientation is normal, or not inverted.

Enable an Inverted Camera Position for the EagleEye IV Camera

You might want to invert the EagleEye IV camera in your environment.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and choose
EagleEye IV camera.
2. At Orientation, select Inverted and click Save.

Enable a Normal Camera Position

You might want to disable the inverted camera position in your environment.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and choose
EagleEye IV camera.
2. At Orientation, select Normal and click Save.

EagleEye Acoustic Camera Indicator Lights

The following figure shows the location of the LED on the front of the EagleEye Acoustic camera.

Ref. Number Description

1 IR Sensor

2 System Status

Polycom, Inc. 161

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

The system status light provides the following information.

Indicator Light System Status

Steady blue light System is on and awake.

Blinking blue light Camera firmware is being updated.

Steady amber light System is asleep.

Steady green light System is in a call.

Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye Producer System

The Polycom® EagleEye™ Producer system is an add-on for the EagleEye cameras that enables
participant counting. Position the EagleEye Producer system on a level surface, ideally on top of a
monitor. You can mount the Polycom® EagleEye™ III, the Polycom® EagleEye™ IV and the Polycom®
EagleEye™ Director cameras on top of the EagleEye Producer.
The EagleEye Producer system is a camera-peripheral technology that works with Polycom® EagleEye™
III and IV cameras to provide room framing and participant counting. Using facial recognition technology,
the device continually scans the room and commands the movable camera to pan, tilt, and zoom.
EagleEye IV cameras are available with either 4x or 12x zoom capability. The EagleEye Producer
includes a ‘bunk bed' mount for use with the universal camera mounting solution. Available accessories
include the EagleEye Digital Extender and the Digital Breakout Adapter.
Ensure that the EagleEye Producer field of view includes the all conference participants. For more
information on positioning the EagleEye Producer refer to the Set Up the Polycom Eagle Eye Producer
document on Polycom Support.
Information on required cables and how to set up EagleEye Producer are included in Set Up the Polycom
EagleEye Producer.
You can connect one EagleEye Producer to a RealPresence Group Series system at a time. Multiple
EagleEye Producer connections are not supported.
Additional information is available in the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Manual. Both documents are located at Polycom Support.

Calibration
The EagleEye Producer internal camera is aligned with the EagleEye camera. If the alignment changes,
group framing is not accurate.

Automatically Calibrate the Room View

Deviations in tracking results can occur when the EagleEye Producer is being installed or moved. In
these instances, EagleEye Producer attempts to perform automatic calibration by automatically detecting
deviations and adjusting itself to display the best views. To automatically calibrate the room view, no
movement can be detected during the calibration period.

Polycom, Inc. 162

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Procedure
1. From the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/
Video > Video Inputs > General Camera Settings and select the input used by the EagleEye
Producer.
Select the Automatic Image Calibration checkbox.
2. Enable Tracking.
3. Have one person sit so they are framed in a webcam view.

Manually Calibrate
You can realign the EagleEye Producer camera and EagleEye camera to display the best view of the
room for group framing by manually calibrating the room view.

Note: If you are using a touch panel, you need a RealPresence Group Series remote control to
manually calibrate the room view.

Before you manually calibrate the room view ensure that the EagleEye camera is properly attached to the
EagleEye Producer as shown in Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Producer.

Procedure
1. Ensure that the Make This Camera Your Main Camera video input setting in administration
settings in the Group system web interface specifies the EagleEye Producer as the main camera.
2. Turn Self View on in the local interface of the system to view the room in the self view window.
3. Press the Home button on the system remote control for five seconds to get to the Home
screen.
The EagleEye Producer LED changes to a fast blue blink when on the Home screen.
4. Press the Up and Down arrow buttons on the remote control to align the webcam with the
EagleEye camera to show the best room view when group framing.
5. To exit the Home screen, press any key on the remote control except the Up or Down arrow
button.
If no action is taken for five seconds, the system will automatically the Home screen. The LED
turns to blue.

Camera Tracking
The Polycom EagleEye Producer detects the people in the room and provides framing during a
conference. Frame Speaker with a Normal tracking speed and Medium view is enabled by default. When
an EagleEye Producer is connected to a RealPresence Group Series system, camera tracking starts
automatically when you initiate a call and stops automatically when you hang up from a call. You can also
manually start camera tracking in the local interface of the system. EagleEye Producer detects the people
in the room and sets up framing. You can set the tracking mode and speed, and specify the type of group
framing, which enables automatic tracking of group participants in the room and frames the active
speaker.
Polycom recommends calibrating the Polycom EagleEye Producer before adjusting camera features. For
instructions on how to calibrate the Polycom EagleEye Producer, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
EagleEye Producer User Guide at Polycom Support.

Polycom, Inc. 163

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Change Camera Tracking Settings

You can change camera tracking settings in the system web interface.
• In the system web interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Admin Settings >
Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General Camera Settings and select the input used by the
Polycom EagleEye Producer.
Configure the following settings.

Setting Description

Tracking Mode Specifies the tracking mode:

◦ Frame Speaker - This is the default
setting. During a conference, this mode
frames the active speaker, then when
someone else starts speaking, the
camera view changes to frame the new
speaker. Note that when the tracking
mode is set to Frame Speaker and the
local microphone is muted, the camera
tracking mode automatically switches to
Frame Group.
◦ Frame Group - Enables automatic
tracking and framing of the group
participants in the room without
displaying the camera motion between
frames.
◦ Frame Group with Transition - Enables
automatic tracking and framing of the
group of participants in the room.
◦ Off - Disables automatic tracking. All
camera control must be handled
manually.

Tracking Speed Specifies the tracking speed:

◦ Slow - Detects meeting participants at a
slow speed rate.
◦ Normal - This is the default tracking
speed. Detects meeting participants at a
normal speed rate.
◦ Fast - Detects meeting participants at a
fast speed rate.

Framing Size Specifies the framing view:

◦ Wide - Establishes a wide view of
meeting participants.
◦ Medium - This is the default group
framing view. Establishes a medium
view of meeting participants.
◦ Tight - Establishes a close-up view of
meeting participants.

Polycom, Inc. 164

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Enable Camera Tracking

You can enable EagleEye Producer camera tracking in the local interface. If camera tracking is enabled,
when you start a call, camera tracking starts automatically; when you end a call, camera tracking stops
automatically and group framing is disabled.

Procedure
» In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Camera and select Camera
Tracking On.

Disable Camera Tracking

You can disable camera tracking in the local interface.

Procedure
» In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Camera and select Camera
Tracking Off.

Change the EagleEye Camera

You can change the EagleEye camera attached to the EagleEye Producer to another EagleEye camera.
You must power off the EagleEye Producer before changing cameras.

Procedure
1. Power off the EagleEye Producer.
2. Disconnect and remove the existing EagleEye camera.
3. Connect in the new EagleEye camera.
For information about how to connect an EagleEye camera, see the Set Up the Polycom EagleEye
Producer.
4. Power on the EagleEye Producer.

Update EagleEye Producer Software

Updates to the EagleEye Producer software are included with RealPresence Group Series system
software updates. No license number or key code is required to update the EagleEye Producer. Software
for an EagleEye IV camera is automatically updated when the camera is attached to the system with an
EagleEye Producer.

Procedure
» Connect the EagleEye Producer to the system.
The system detects the EagleEye Producer and updates it, if necessary.

Update the EagleEye Producer System Image

If you are unable to automatically update the EagleEye Producer system software by connecting to a
RealPresence Group Series system, you can update EagleEye Producer system manually by updating
the system image.
To update the EagleEye Producer system image, use a USB device with at least 200MB of space and
make sure the USB file system is in FAT32 format to perform a full system update.

Polycom, Inc. 165

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Note: Do not unplug the USB drive during the update process.

Procedure
1. Create a folder named plcm-eep-cmd in the USB root directory.
2. Create a subfolder named update in the plcm-eep-cmd folder.
3. Copy the EagleEye Producer update image (polycom-eagleeyeproducer-xxx-1.0.0.xx-
xxxx.img) into the update folder.
4. Plug in the EagleEye Producer power cable to power it on and allow it to fully boot up.
The LED turns solid blue.
5. Plug the USB drive into EagleEye Producer.
The LED blinks amber and then turns solid blue in a few seconds.
6. Unplug the EagleEye Producer power cable, but leave the USB drive plugged in.
7. Plug in the EagleEye Producer power cable and allow it to boot up.
The LED turns solid blue. The EagleEye Producer starts the image update and the LED blinks
blue and amber. The image update takes approximately ten minutes to complete. The EagleEye
Producer automatically reboots when the image update is complete. The camera tilts up and then
down during the reboot and the LED returns to solid blue.
8. Remove the USB drive.
The update log is saved in [USB root directory]/eepout/[EEP SN]/log.

EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights

A light-emitting diode (LED) is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Producer device. These LED
lights emit colors that refer to various system states and allow you to identify the current state for the
EagleEye Producer system. Detailed LED and system states mappings are shown in the following table.

LED System State

Blue Power On, EagleEye Producer normal state

Blinking Blue On, not in a call, receive IR

EagleEye Producer boot up

Fast Blinking Blue Calibrate webcam room view

Amber Standby - asleep

Alternate Amber and Blue Software update, Factory restore, USB image update

Blinking Amber USB disk plugged in

Green On, In a call

Blinking Green On, in a call, receive IR in a call

Fast Blinking Red System error

Polycom, Inc. 166

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

LED System State

Blink Needs attention, receive IR

Download System Logs and Configurations

EagleEye Producer system logs and configurations are not uploaded to RealPresence Group Series .
You must use an empty USB drive and make sure the USB file is in FAT32 format to download the
EagleEye Producer system logs and configurations. You can use logs and configurations to troubleshoot
EagleEye Producer system software issues.

Procedure
1. Create a folder named plcm-eep-cmd in the USB root directory.
2. Create a subfolder named log in the plcm-eep-cmd folder.
3. Create a blank text file named downloadlogflg in the log folder.
4. Plug the USB drive into the EagleEye Producer.
The LED blinks amber and then turns solid blue.
5. Remove the USB drive.
The downloaded files are located in the following locations.
• The application logs and system information are in the [USB root directory]/
eepout/[EEP SN]/log/ folder.
• Configuration files are in the [USB root directory]/eepout/[EEP SN]/config/
folder.
• The system current running status is recorded in a file called sysstatus and is in the [USB
root directory]/eepout/[EEP SN]/ folder. The system status file includes current
CPU/memory usage and current running process information.

Participant Count CDR Details

When used with a RealPresence Group Series system and an EagleEye camera, the camera system
tracks the number of conference participants in a room. Call information is collected in a Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager Call Detail Report (CDR) and provides detailed data to system
administrators.

Note: To get the most accurate result of participant count data, the number of participants in a
single room should be 10 people or less.

Participant Count

Participant Description

People Minutes The total people count for each minute of the call. For example, if
there are ten people in the meeting and the meeting lasts for ten
minutes, the total People Minutes will be 100 minutes.

Polycom, Inc. 167

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Participant Description

People Count (call begin) Number of people on the call during the first minute of the call,
tracked with EagleEye Director II camera system.

People Count (peak value) Peak number of people participating in the call, tracked with the
EagleEye Director II camera system.

People Count (call end) Number of people participating on the call during the last minute of
the call, tracked with the EagleEye Director II camera system.

Related Links
Call Detail Report (CDR) on page 274

Perform a Factory Restore

You can use the hardware restore button on the EagleEye Producer system to perform a factory restore
of the RealPresence Group Series system. A factory restore completely erases the system and restores it
to the software version and default configuration stored in its factory partition. During a factory restore, the
LED indicator on the front of the system blinks blue and amber.

Procedure
1. While the EagleEye Producer system is powered off, insert a straightened paper clip through the
pinhole and press and hold the Restore button.
2. While holding the Restore button, plug in the power cable to power on the EagleEye Producer.
3. Hold the Restore button for five additional seconds, and then release it when the LED alternates
amber and blue.
The EagleEye Producer enters factory restore mode. The factory restore takes approximately
eight minutes to complete. The EagleEye Producer automatically reboots when the process is
complete.
4. Calibrate the room view when the reboot is complete.
Note: Keep the Polycom EagleEye Producer powered on during the factory restore process.

Polycom, Inc. 168

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System

The Polycom® EagleEye™ Director II camera system is the next version of the Polycom EagleEye Director
camera; it combines the functionality of the EagleEye Producer camera and EagleEye Director camera to
enrich the video conference experience.
This automatic camera positioning system works in conjunction with a RealPresence Group Series
system to provide accurate close-up views of the person who is speaking. The EagleEye Director II
camera system also provides smooth transitions between the close-up view of the person who is
speaking and the group view when there is no active speaker.
When the EagleEye Director II camera system is in tracking mode or when the analytics camera is in tilt
position, the analytics camera captures group view video only. At the same time, the two EagleEye IV
cameras in active state have a display a LED light. In any state, the analytics camera does not send video
to RealPresence Group Series system.

Note: The Polycom EagleEye Director II camera system is compatible with Polycom EagleEye
IV cameras.

The EagleEye Director II camera uses a dual-camera system. Initially, the current view is captured by one
camera, while the other camera will be searching and tracking the next target. If two persons speak
alternately, the camera will track the person who is speaking, while the other camera will be tracking the
other person who is speaking. By providing automatic and intelligent views in various speaking scenarios
during a conference, the EagleEye Director II camera system delivers a user experience similar to a
newscast video production.

Position the Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System

Follow these guidelines when you use the EagleEye Director II camera system with your RealPresence
Group Series system.
▪ Make sure the EagleEye Director II camera system is on a level surface or mounting bracket.
▪ The camera’s viewing angle is approximately 9 degrees above and 30 degrees below its direct line
of sight as shown below.

Polycom, Inc. 169

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

▪ To ensure the optimal performance of the EagleEye Director II camera system facial recognition
feature, follow these suggestions:
◦ Provide ample lighting on faces of participants. This allows the EagleEye Director II camera
system to correctly frame faces, using the eyes, noses, and mouths as guidelines.
◦ Allow only minimal backlighting.
▪ To ensure the best view from the EagleEye Director II camera system voice-tracking feature, follow
these suggestions:
◦ Make sure ambient room noise is quiet enough to allow the EagleEye Director II camera
system to locate the participant who is speaking.
◦ Be sure to set up the audio connection from the RealPresence Group Series system to the
EagleEye Director II camera system, whether you connect it directly to the audio output of the
RealPresence Group Series system or to an audio processor managing the room audio.
◦ Set the EagleEye Director II camera system on top of a monitor. Ideally, place the camera
between 5.5 and 7 feet from the ground.
The following figure shows placement of EagleEye Director II camera system:

Polycom, Inc. 170

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Ensure that people are sitting within the viewing range of between 3 and 33 feet from the device. The
following figure shows the viewing range of EagleEye Director II camera system.

Note: Before powering on the EagleEye Director II camera system, connect the camera system
to the RealPresence Group Series system using a HDCI cable. This will prevent the
camera system from automatically entering sleep mode after three minutes.

Change the EagleEye Camera

If you want to change the EagleEye camera attached to the EagleEye Director II camera system to
another EagleEye camera, perform the following steps.
The RealPresence Group Series system will not detect the new camera unless you power off the
EagleEye Director II camera system.

Polycom, Inc. 171

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Procedure
1. Power off the EagleEye Director II camera system.
2. Disconnect and remove the existing EagleEye camera.
3. Connect the new EagleEye Camera. For more information about how to connect an EagleEye
camera, see the Polycom EagleEye Director II Set Up Sheet.
4. Power on the EagleEye Director II camera system.

Note: The cameras on the EagleEye Director II camera system must be an EagleEye IV
camera.

Configure Camera and Video Settings

You can configure the EagleEye Director II camera system that is connected to your RealPresence Group
Series system.

Procedure
» In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs. Configure the
following settings as needed.
Configure General Camera Settings

Setting Description

Allow Other Participants In a Call to Control Specifies whether the far site can pan, tilt, or zoom the near-site
Your Camera camera. When this setting is selected, a user at the far site can
control the framing and angle of the camera for the best view of the
near site. This is sometimes also called Far End Camera Control
(FECC).

Power Frequency Specifies the power line frequency for your system. In most cases,
the system defaults to the correct power line frequency, based on
the video standard used in the country where the system is
located. This setting allows you to adapt the system in areas where
the power line frequency does not match the video standard used.
You might need to change this setting to avoid flicker from the
fluorescent lights in your conference room.

Make This Camera Your Main Camera Specifies the primary camera. You specify the main camera when
you set up the system, but you can change that selection here.
Input 1 is typically your main camera.

Enable People+Content IP™ Enables the ability to use the People+Content IP application.

Polycom, Inc. 172

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Setting Description

Enable Camera Preset Snapshot Icons Enables the use of snapshot icons that represent camera preset
configurations. The default setting is controlled by the Security
Profile, but you can change the default here.
If you change your security profile setting from Low or Medium to
High or Maximum, or if you disable the setting, the system
replaces each preset image with a blue, striped box. Presets that
have not been configured show as empty rectangles.
When you disable the Enable Camera Preset Snapshot Icons
setting in the system web interface, the blue, striped boxes in the
local interface show you which presets are configured, but
enabling the setting does not redisplay the snapshot icons. You
can see snapshot icons that represent preset configuration images
only when you configure a preset with the Enable Camera Preset
Snapshot Icons setting enabled.

Change Camera Tracking Settings

The EagleEye Director II camera system detects the participants in the room and provides framing during
a conference. Frame Speaker with a Normal tracking speed and Medium view are enabled by default. To
change camera tracking settings, follow the steps below:

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
a) In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Settings >
Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
b) In the web interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Admin Settings >
Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General Camera Settings and select the input used by
the EagleEye Director II camera system.
2. Configure the following settings:

Polycom, Inc. 173

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Setting Description

Tracking Mode Specifies the tracking mode:

Frame Speaker - This is the default setting. During a conference,
this mode frames the active speaker, then when someone else
starts speaking, the camera view changes to frame the new
speaker.

Note: When the tracking mode is set to Frame

Speaker and the local microphone is muted,
the camera tracking mode automatically
switches to Frame Group.

Frame Group - Enables automatic tracking and framing of the

group participants in the room without displaying the camera
motion between frames.
Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera control must be
handled manually.

Tracking Speed Specifies the tracking speed:

Slow - Detects meeting participants at a slow speed rate.
Normal - This is the default tracking speed. Detects meeting
participants at a normal speed rate.
Fast - Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.

Framing Size Specifies the framing view:

Wide - Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
Medium - This is the default group framing view. Establishes a
medium view of meeting participants.
Tight - Establishes a close-up view of meeting participants.

Picture in Picture Specifies the picture in picture:

Checked: When turned on, the room view from the analytics
camera is shown in the bottom right corner along with the speaker
view.
Unchecked: No room view.
The default option is ON.

Note: Setting is available only when you have

installed an EagleEye Director II camera
system.

Improve Camera Tracking Performance

Tracking performance can be affected by room lighting. If the room is too bright for camera tracking to
work properly, you can improve the tracking performance by adjusting the Backlight Compensation
setting on the Cameras screen.

Polycom, Inc. 174

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

To change the Backlight Compensation setting, follow the steps below:

Procedure
1. In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video.
2. Click on Video Inputs and select the appropriate input.

EagleEye Director II Camera System Group Framing

The RealPresence Group Series system continuously scans the room and commands the movable
camera to pan, tilt, and zoom, framing users with facial recognition technology.

Participant Count CDR Details

When used with a RealPresence Group Series system and an EagleEye camera, the camera system
tracks the number of conference participants in a room. Call information is collected in a Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager Call Detail Report (CDR) and provides detailed data to system
administrators.

Note: To get the most accurate result of participant count data, the number of participants in a
single room should be 10 people or less.

Participant Count

Participant Description

People Minutes The total people count for each minute of the call. For example, if
there are ten people in the meeting and the meeting lasts for ten
minutes, the total People Minutes will be 100 minutes.

People Count (call begin) Number of people on the call during the first minute of the call,
tracked with EagleEye Director II camera system.

People Count (peak value) Peak number of people participating in the call, tracked with the
EagleEye Director II camera system.

People Count (call end) Number of people participating on the call during the last minute of
the call, tracked with the EagleEye Director II camera system.

Related Links
Call Detail Report (CDR) on page 274

Update Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System Software

Updates to Polycom EagleEye Director II camera system are included with RealPresence Group Series
system software updates. No license number or key is needed to update the system.
To update your EagleEye Director II camera system, use a USB drive with at least 200MB of available
space. Make sure the file system is in FAT32 format.

Polycom, Inc. 175

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Procedure
1. Create a folder named plcm-eed2-cmd in the USB root directory.
2. Create a subfolder named update in the plcm-eed2-cmd folder.
3. Copy the EagleEye Director II update image
(polycom-eagleeyedirector II-xxx-1.0.0.xx-xxxx.img) into the update folder.
4. Plug in the EagleEye Director II camera system power cable to power it on and allow it to fully boot
up.
The LED turns solid blue.
5. Plug the USB drive into EagleEye Director II camera system.
The LED blinks amber and then turns solid blue in a few seconds.

Note: Do not unplug the USB drive during the software update process.

6. Unplug the EagleEye Director II camera system power cable, but leave the USB drive plugged in.
7. Plug in the EagleEye Director II camera system power cable and allow it to boot up.
The LED turns solid blue. The EagleEye Director II camera system starts the image update and
the LEDs blink blue and amber. The image update takes approximately ten minutes to complete.
The EagleEye Director II camera system automatically reboots when the image update is
complete. The camera tilts up and then down during the reboot and the LED returns to solid blue.
8. Remove the USB drive.
The update log is saved in [USB root directory]/eed2out/[EED2 SN]/log.

Note: When the EagleEye Director II camera system is in update state, the amber and
blue LEDs blink alternatively.

Software for an EagleEye camera is automatically updated when the camera is attached to a
RealPresence Group Series system with an EagleEye Director II camera system.

Indicator Lights
Indicator lights and power sensors display when the EagleEye Director II camera system is powered on.

A light-emitting diode (LED) is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Director II camera system. These
LED lights emit colors that refer to various system states and allow you to identify the current state of the
EagleEye Director II camera system.
The following table shows the LED status of EagleEye Director II camera system with its corresponding
behavior.

Polycom, Inc. 176

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

LED Color Behavior

Blue Power On, EagleEye Director II camera system is in active state

Blinking Blue Receive IR, EagleEye Director II camera system boot up

Fast Blinking Blue Power On, MCU is being initialized, Adjust Analytics camera status

Amber Standby/Asleep

Alternate Amber and Blue Software update, Factory restore, USB image update

Blinking Amber USB plugged in

Green In a call

Blinking Green Receive IR in a call

Fast Blinking Red EagleEye Director II camera system error

View System Status for EagleEye Director II Camera System

You might need to view the system status of an EagleEye Director II camera system on a RealPresence
Group Series system interface.

Procedure
» Do one of the following:
a) In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Status.
b) In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.

Polycom, Inc. 177

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

You cannot view the system status if the EagleEye Director II camera system is not connected or is not
selected as the current camera source.
System Status

Diagnostic Screen Description

Active Alerts Displays the status of any device or service listed within the Status
screens that has a current status indicator of red. Alerts are listed
in the order they occurred.

Call Control Displays the status of the Auto-Answer Point-to-Point Video and
Meeting Password settings.

Audio Displays the connection status of audio devices such as

microphones, Polycom SoundStation IP conference phone, and
Polycom SoundStructure card.

Camera Displays the connection status of the camera that is connected. If

the camera is not connected or is not selected as the current
camera source, this choice is not visible on the screen. In addition,
the details of the EagleEye cameras attached to the EagleEye
Director II camera system are displayed.

LAN Displays the connection status of the IP Network.

Servers • Always displays the Gatekeeper and SIP Registrar Server.

• Displays the active Global Directory Server, LDAP Server, or
Microsoft Server.
• If enabled, displays the Provisioning Service, Calendaring
Service, or Presence Service.

Log Management Displays the status of the Log Threshold setting.

When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see
an alert next to the System button on the menu.

EagleEye Director II Camera System Diagnostics

Most diagnostic information is available on both the web and the local interface, but some information is
specific to one or the other interface. From the web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video
Tests > Camera Tracking.
The screen includes the following diagnostic information for your camera system.

Polycom, Inc. 178

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Diagnostic Screen Description

Speaker Test Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz audio tone indicates
that the local audio connections are correct.
If you run the test from the system during a call, the far site will
also hear the tone.
If you run the test from the system web interface during a call, the
people at the site you are testing will hear the tone, but you will
not.

Audio Meters Measures the strength of audio signals from ten internal
microphones, far-site audio, and any device connected to the
audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a SoundStructure
digital mixer is connected to the room system.

Camera Tracking Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director II camera

system.
Audio
Verifies microphone functionality. To use this feature, speak aloud
and verify that you can see dynamic signal indications for four
vertical microphones and six horizontal microphones. If no signal
indication appears for a specific microphone, manually power off
the EagleEye Director II camera system and then power it back on.
Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a video call. Let the
far side speak aloud and verify that you can see dynamic signal
indications for the two reference audio meters.
If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, make
sure the reference cable is connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the camera
again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the right camera.
• Analytics Camera shows video from the analytics camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test screen.
Note: If the EagleEye Director II camera system is connected but
is not selected as current camera source, this choice is not visible
on the screen.

Polycom, Inc. 179

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Download System Logs and Configurations

You can use an empty USB storage device to save the EagleEye Director II camera system logs and
configurations. Make sure the file is in FAT32 format.

Procedure
1. Create a folder named plcm-eed2-cmd in the USB root directory.
2. Create a sub folder named log in the plcm-eed2-cmd folder.
3. Create a blank text file named downloadlogflg in the log folder.
4. Insert the USB storage device into the EagleEye Director II camera system. The LED blinks amber
and then turns solid blue.
5. Remove the USB drive.
The application logs and system information are downloaded to the [USB root directory]/
eed2out/[EED2SN]/log/ folder.
The configuration files are downloaded to the [USB root directory]/eed2out/[EED2 SN]/
config/ folder.
The system current running status is recorded in a file called sysstatus and is in the [USB root
directory]/eed2out/[EED2 SN]/ folder. The system status file includes current CPU/memory
usage and current running process information.

Perform a Factory Restore

You can use the hardware restore button on the EagleEye Director II camera system to perform a factory
restore. A factory restore completely erases the system and restores it to the software version and default
configuration stored in its factory partition. During a factory restore, the LED indicator on the front of the
EagleEye Director II camera system blinks blue and amber.

Note: Do not power off the EagleEye Director II camera system during the factory restore
process.

Procedure
1. While the EagleEye Director II camera system is powered off, insert a straightened paper clip
through the pinhole and press and hold the Restore button.
2. While holding the Restore button, plug in the power cable to power on the EagleEye Director II
camera system.
3. Hold the Restore button for an additional five seconds, and then release it when the LED
alternates amber and blue.
The EagleEye Director II camera system enters factory restore mode. The factory restore takes
approximately eight minutes to complete. The EagleEye Director II camera system automatically
reboots when the process is complete.

Polycom, Inc. 180

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Director

You can use the remote control or the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to set up the
EagleEye Director. You cannot configure the EagleEye Director using a Polycom touch device, but you
can start and stop camera tracking.
For detailed setup instructions, refer to Set up the Polycom EagleEye Director on Polycom Support.

Procedure
1. Power on the EagleEye Director.
You can verify that the device is detected and compatible with the system's software on the
System Status screen.
•In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status > EagleEye
Director.If you see EagleEye Director among the status settings, the device has been
detected.
2. Calibrate the cameras.
If you notice that the speaker is not framed accurately, ensure that the vertical bar of the EagleEye
Director is vertical. Placing the EagleEye Director on a horizontal surface can help to ensure that
the vertical bar is vertical. You might also need to recalibrate the cameras.
3. Adjust the room view.

EagleEye Director Indicator Light

The following figure shows the location of the power indicator light on the back of the EagleEye Director.

This indicator light provides the following information.

Indicator Light Status

Steady green light Cameras are ready; camera tracking is off

Steady red light Cameras are powering on

Blinking red light Factory restore on the cameras is starting

Blinking blue light Camera tracking is on

Polycom, Inc. 181

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Calibrate the EagleEye Director Cameras

In Voice Tracking mode, you only need to calibrate the right camera. In Direct Cut mode, calibrate the
right camera and then left one. Ensure that only one person speaks while you are calibrating the cameras
and keep the background quiet. If you rearrange or move the EagleEye Director, recalibrate it.

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• In the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking >
Calibration.
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and
select Calibrate Voice Tracking.
2. Follow the directions in the Auto Calibration screen that appears.
When you click Start, auto-calibration begins. When the automatic process ends, you have these
choices:
• Yes, I see a green box around my mouth. Selecting this choice means auto-calibration
was successful and you can move forward with adjusting the room view, if you like.
• No, I see a green box, but it is not around my mouth. Selecting this choice means you
can try auto-calibration again or manually calibrate the camera.
• No, I do not see a box at all. Selecting this choice means you must manually calibrate the
camera.
3. If necessary, follow these steps to manually calibrate the camera:
a) Use the arrow buttons and zoom controls on the remote control or system web interface to
zoom completely in, then aim the camera at your mouth.
b) Select Begin Calibration or Start and follow the onscreen instructions until a message
displays indicating successful calibration.

Adjust the Room View

You can adjust the room view on the EagleEye Director to get the best perspective for your video calls.

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• From the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking >
Calibration, and then select Begin Calibration.
•From the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and
then select the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
2. Do one of the following:
• In the local interface, select Skip to move to the Adjust Room View screen.
• In the system web interface, select Adjust Room View.
3. Use the arrow buttons and zoom controls on the remote control or system web interface to show
the room view you want far site participants to see.
4. Select Finish to save the settings and return to the Camera Settings screen.

Polycom, Inc. 182

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Enable Camera Tracking for EagleEye Director

If EagleEye Director tracking is enabled, the camera follows the person or people who are speaking.
While one camera tracks the person who is speaking, the other camera captures the room view. The
EagleEye Director shows the room view while the camera moves from one speaker to another. When the
tracking camera locates a person who is speaking, the EagleEye Director camera switches to a close-up
of that person. This tracking action, also called automatic camera positioning, can be manually started.

Procedure
» Do one of the following:
• In the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
◦ For the Tracking Mode setting, select Voice. This is the default tracking mode. In this
mode, the camera automatically tracks the current speaker in the room using a voice
tracking algorithm.When you select the Voice Tracking Mode, you can also choose
the Tracking Speed. This speed determines how quickly the camera moves to each
person who speaks. The default speed is Normal.If voice tracking does not work as
expected, make sure the microphones are functioning properly.
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and
then select the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
◦ Enable the Use Voices to Track People setting.
• If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom touch device, follow
these steps:
1. On the touch device, touch Cameras on the Home screen or the Call screen.
2. If the EagleEye Director is not currently selected, select it.
3. Touch Select Cameras and select the EagleEye Director camera.
4. Touch Control Camera.
5. Select Start Camera Tracking.

Disable Camera Tracking for EagleEye Director

You can manually stop EagleEye Director tracking, which is also called automatic camera positioning.

Procedure
» Do one of the following:
• In the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
◦ For the Tracking Mode setting, select Off. In this mode, the tracking function is
disabled. You must manually move the camera using the remote control or a touch
device.
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and
then select the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
◦ Disable the Use Voices to Track People setting.
• If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom touch device, touch
Cameras on the Home screen or the Call screen and select Stop Camera Tracking.

Polycom, Inc. 183

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Camera Tracking in the Local Interface

You can start or stop camera tracking in the local interface. Whether you are or are not in a call, go to
Menu > Cameras and select Start Camera Tracking or Stop Camera Tracking.
Camera tracking can also start or stop automatically, based on the following actions:
• Camera tracking starts automatically when you make a call.
• Camera tracking stops after you hang up a call.
• Camera tracking temporarily stops when you mute the RealPresence Group Series system in a call.
It resumes when you unmute the system. If camera tracking is disabled, pressing Mute on the
remote control does not affect tracking.

Perform a Factory Restore for the EagleEye Director

If the EagleEye Director is not functioning correctly or you need to recover from a corrupted partition, you
can use the restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases the camera's settings
and reinstalls the software. Keep the EagleEye Director powered on during the factory restore process.
The following figure shows you the location of the restore button on the back of the EagleEye Director.

Procedure
1. Press and hold the restore button on the back of the EagleEye Director for 2-3 seconds while the
power light cycles.
When normal video content is displayed on the monitor instead of a blue screen, the EagleEye
Director has been successfully restored.
2. Release the restore button.

Troubleshooting EagleEye Director Camera Tracking

Tracking performance can be affected by room lighting. If the room is too bright for camera tracking to
work properly, you can improve the tracking performance by adjusting the Backlight Compensation
setting on the Cameras screen. To find this setting in the system web interface, go to Admin Settings >
Audio/Video > Video Inputs and select the appropriate Input.

Troubleshooting EagleEye Director Camera Calibration

When the system first detects the EagleEye Director, a calibration wizard starts. If the EagleEye Director
is not detected, try one of the following solutions:
• Ensure all cables are tightly plugged in, then attempt camera detection again. If you are using
EagleEye Director version 1.0 software, you might need to ensure that the ball stubs are tightly
pressed into the hole on the base after checking the cables.
• Ensure that all seven EagleEye Director tracking microphones are working correctly. Five of those
microphones are horizontal and two are vertical reference audio microphones. Calibration fails if
any of the microphones do not work.

Polycom, Inc. 184

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

• Restart the RealPresence Group Series system.

Manually power off the EagleEye Director by unplugging its power supply and unplugging the HDCI cable
from the RealPresence Group Series system. Then power on the EagleEye Director, plug the HDCI cable
into the system, and attempt camera detection again.

Transfer EagleEye Director Logs

The Polycom EagleEye Director logs contain important status and debug information that is not included
in the logs available for the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. Attach a USB storage device formatted in FAT32 to the back panel of the EagleEye Director.
2. Restart the EagleEye Director by following these steps:
a) Unplug the 12v adaptor attached to the side of the EagleEye Director.
b) Wait a 5 seconds.
c) Plug the 12v adaptor into the side of the EagleEye Director.
It could take up to two minutes for the EagleEye Director to restart.
3. Remove the USB storage device.
A log file using the name format of eagleeyedirector_info_xxxxx.tar.gz is generated on the USB
storage device.

EagleEye Director Software Updates

Updates to EagleEye Director software is included with the RealPresence Group Series system software
updates. No license number or key is needed to update the camera software.
To update your EagleEye Director, connect it to the system before you run a software update. The
software update program detects the device and updates it if necessary.

Camera Presets
Camera presets are stored camera positions that you can create in the RealPresence Group Series
system local interface before or during a call. Presets allow you to do the following:
• Automatically point a camera at pre-defined locations in a room.
• Select a video source.
If your camera supports pan, tilt, and zoom movement, and it is set to People, you can create up to 10
preset camera positions for it using the remote control or a touch device, such as the RealPresence
Touch. Each preset stores the camera number, its zoom level, and the direction it points (if appropriate).
If a Polycom touch device is paired with a system, you must use the touch device to create presets. For
more information about creating and using presets, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide . Once presets are in place, you can view them in the system web interface by going to
Utilities > Tools > Remote Monitoring.
Note that if you use a EagleEye Director with your RealPresence Group Series system, you cannot use
presets for voice tracking.
Related Links

Polycom, Inc. 185

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System

Configure FECC on the Far-end Site Camera on page 186

Configure FECC on the Far-end Site Camera

If far-end camera control (FECC) is allowed, you can create 10 presets for a far-site camera. These
presets are saved only for the duration of the call. You might also be able to use presets created at the far
site to control the far-site camera.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General
Camera Settings and select Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera.
For details on how to create camera presets, or how to move a camera to a stored preset, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide .
Related Links
Camera Presets on page 185

Polycom, Inc. 186

Configuring Remote Control Behavior
Topics:

• Configure Remote Control Behavior

• Programming the Remote Control

Configure Remote Control Behavior

By configuring settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, you can customize the
remote control behavior for your end users. This information is for both Polycom and third party remote
control devices.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Remote Control, Keypad, and Power.
2. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

Keypad Audio Confirmation Specifies whether to play a voice confirmation of

numbers selected with the remote control or
keypad.

Numeric Keypad Function Specifies whether pressing number buttons on the

remote control or keypad moves the camera to
presets or generates touch tones (DTMF tones). If
this is set to Presets, users can generate DTMF
tones by pressing the # key on the remote while on
a video screen.

Use Non-Polycom Remote Configures the system to accept input from a

programmable, non-Polycom remote control. In
most cases the Polycom remote works as
designed, even when this feature is enabled.
However, try disabling this feature if you
experience difficulty with the Polycom remote. For
more information about system IR codes, refer to
the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Guide.

Channel ID Specifies the IR identification channel to which the

room system responds. Set the Channel ID to the
same channel as the remote control. The default
setting is 3. If the remote control is set to channel 3,
it can control a room system set to any Channel ID.

Polycom, Inc. 187

Configuring Remote Control Behavior

Setting Description

Hang-up Button Long Press Specifies the behavior of the remote control Hang-
up button when you press it for a long time:
• Hang-up / Power Off—Holding down
the Hang-up button powers off the room
system.

• Hang-up / Sleep—Holding down the

Hang-up button puts the system to
sleep.
• Hang-up Only—Holding down the
Hang-up button has no function other
than hanging up the call.

# Button Function Specifies the behavior of the # button on the

remote control:
• #, then @—Pressing the # button once
on the keypad displays the hash sign.
Pressing the # button twice, quickly,
displays the commercial at (@) symbol.
• @, then #—Pressing the # button once
on the keypad displays the @ symbol.
Pressing the # button twice, quickly,
displays the # sign.

Related Links
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems on page 191
Power On the System on page 17
Power Off the System on page 17

Programming the Remote Control

Use the remote control to power on and off your system, or to put the system to sleep or wake it. For
details about how to use the remote control, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User
Guide .
You can customize the behavior of the remote control to support the user's environment. Note the
following regarding remote control behavior:
• If the system is paired and connected with a RealPresence Touch, the remote control can perform
some limited functions.
• If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired and connected with a Polycom Touch Control,
the remote control is disabled.
• The room system remote control IR transmits a modulated frequency of 38 kHz.
• When a USB keyboard is connected to a room system, you can enter only numbers with the remote
control on the system's local interface on the Place a Call > Keypad or Place a Call > Contacts
screens.

Polycom, Inc. 188

Configuring Remote Control Behavior

Set the Remote Control Channel ID

You can set the remote control channel ID in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
Remote Control, Keypad, and Power.
2. Select the Channel ID.
3. Click Save.
To find the Channel ID for your monitor, check the connection label on the monitor, or refer to the
monitor's manufacturer documentation.

Set the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System

You can configure the Channel ID so that the remote control affects only one RealPresence Group Series
system, even if other systems are in the same room. The Polycom Touch Control virtual remote control is
always set to channel 3.
If the remote control is set to channel 3, it can control a room system set to any Channel ID. If the system
does not respond to the remote control, set the remote control channel ID to 3 starting with step 3 in the
following procedure. Then follow the entire procedure to configure the system and remote control channel
ID settings.
While performing the following procedures, blocking the IR signal from the remote control can prevent the
signal from being received by the system, causing the system to take an action that corresponds to any of
the remote control button presses.

Procedure
1. While blocking the IR signal from the remote control using your hand or some other object, press
and hold and for 2-3 seconds.
2. After the red LED on the remote control comes on, release both keys.
The LED remains lit for 10 seconds.
3. While the LED is lit, enter a 2-digit ID between 00 and 15.
If you do not enter the ID during the 10 seconds the LED is lit, the LED flashes six times and you
must repeat steps 1 and 2. Be sure to enter the ID during the next 10-second window.
If the channel ID is saved successfully, the LED flashes twice. Otherwise, the LED flashes six times and
you must repeat steps 1 - 3.

Confirm the Channel ID

You can confirm the correct channel ID to control your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. While blocking the IR signal from the remote control using your hand or some other object, press
and hold and for 2-3 seconds.
2. After the LED on the remote control comes on, release both keys.
The LED remains lit for 10 seconds.
3. While the LED is lit, enter the 2-digit ID between 00 and 15 that you believe is the channel ID.

Polycom, Inc. 189

Configuring Remote Control Behavior

If you do not enter the ID during the 10 seconds the LED is lit, the LED flashes six times and you
must repeat steps 1 and 2. Be sure to enter the ID during the next 10-second window.
4. If you entered the current channel ID, the LED flashes twice.
Otherwise, the LED flashes six times and allows you to repeat step 3.

Recharge the Remote Control Battery

Your system setup sheet shows how to charge the battery in the remote control the first time. When the
remote control battery power is at 10% or less, a notification is displayed on the home screen. The low
battery notification returns after you dismiss other notifications, and is not displayed while the system is in
a call.

Procedure
1. Pull the battery out of the end of the remote control.
2. Insert the USB plug into any USB 2.0 port, such as the one on your system.
The RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and RealPresence Group 500 systems
have two USB 2.0 ports on the back of the systems, while the RealPresence Group 700 system
has one USB 2.0 port on the front.
3. Insert the USB plug into any USB 2.0 port, such as the one on your system.
4. While the battery is charging, the status light is orange.
After the status light on the battery turns green, remove it from the port.
5. Insert the charged battery into the remote control.
Note: Recharging the battery might take anywhere from 20 minutes to several hours.

The following figure illustrates these steps for the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310,
RealPresence Group 500, and RealPresence Group 700 systems.

Polycom, Inc. 190

Configuring Remote Control Behavior

Ref. Number Description

1 Pull the battery out of the end of the remote control.

2 Insert the USB plug of the battery into a USB 2.0 port.

3 Wait until the status light on the battery turns green.

4 Insert the charged battery into the remote control.

Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems

The RealPresence Group 700 system can be powered on and off with the remote using the same buttons
as shown for the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems; however, the Group 700 system
supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the camera when the system is powered
off. So, if the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI connector
attached to the system, it will not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the system using the
handheld remote when in the Power Off state.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the handheld
remote control, use one of these solutions:
• Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the optional EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain in a Power On state, so that
the camera is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
• Position the RealPresence Group Series system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system
has a line-of-sight to the remote control.
• Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the system.
Related Links
Configure Remote Control Behavior on page 187

Polycom, Inc. 191

Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers
Topics:

• Polycom Concierge Solution

• Enabling RealPresence Mobile

You can customize how to use various controllers for the system. For more information, see the following
topics.

Polycom Concierge Solution

RealPresence Group Series systems now support the Polycom® Concierge solution. This enterprise
solution allows end users to extend and control their collaboration experience using personal computing
devices such as smartphones, laptops, and desktop systems.
When a system is provisioned as part of a Polycom Concierge deployment, users with supported and
provisioned devices can wirelessly connect to the system. The devices must be running Polycom® Mobile
or Polycom® Desktop. Examples of collaboration and control functions that users might perform include
joining a meeting in progress upon entering the meeting room, presenting content, adding participants,
hanging up a call, changing volume, muting a call, viewing and annotating shared content, and recording
a call.
To access the collaboration and control functions, users must first pair their personal device with a room
system. Administrators have three options for providing this information:
• Configure a beacon to broadcast the location details for the room system. For more information,
refer to the Polycom Concierge Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
• Generate a pairing information printout from RealPresence Resource Manager for users to obtain
the pairing information. For more information, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Resource
Manager System Operations Guide and the Polycom Concierge Solution Deployment Guide at
Polycom Support.
• Add the pairing code to the system local user interface.

Add the System Pairing Code to the System Home Screen

To display a pairing code on the RealPresence Group Series system local interface home screen, you
must enable a setting in the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings.
2. Click Address Bar.
3. Select Pairing Code for either the left or right Address Bar element and click Save.
The pairing code for the system displays on the bottom of the system's home screen in the
meeting room.
If users encounter problems pairing with the system or you receive a registration error, confirm that the
Polycom Concierge service is active.

Polycom, Inc. 192

Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers

Check the Polycom Concierge Service Status

You can view the Polycom Concierge service status to determine if it is active.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.
2. Confirm that the Polycom Concierge service is active (the status LED is green).
For additional details about the solution, see the Polycom Concierge Solution Deployment Guide at
Polycom Support. For product interoperability information, refer to the Polycom Concierge Solution
Release Notes at Polycom Support.

Enabling RealPresence Mobile

Polycom SmartPairing™ allows you to detect and pair a RealPresence Group Series system from the
RealPresence Mobile application on an Android or Apple iPad tablet. After you pair the application and
the system, you can use the RealPresence Mobile application to perform two basic functions:
• Use the application as a remote control for the room system.
• Swipe to transfer a call from the RealPresence Mobile application to the room system.

SmartPairing Prerequisites
Telnet must be enabled before you can use SmartPairing on RealPresence Group Series systems.
Because telnet is disabled by default in all Security Profiles, SmartPairing is also disabled by default. The
setting to enable telnet is not configurable when the Security Profile is set to Maximum or High.

Security Profiles and SmartPairing

Security Profile Telnet Setting Default SmartPairing Available?

Maximum / High Disabled, Not Configurable No

Medium / Low Disabled, Configurable Yes. To use SmartPairing, do the

following:
1 Enable telnet. In the system web
interface, go to Admin Settings >
Security > Global Security >
Access and at Enable Telnet
Access, select the checkbox.
2 Send an API command or use the
system web interface.

Configure SmartPairing
You can configure SmartPairing so that users can pair mobile devices to the RealPresence Group Series
system.

Polycom, Inc. 193

Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers

Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General
Settings > Pairing > SmartPairing.
2. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

SmartPairing Mode Specifies the method used to pair with the room
system, if SmartPairing is enabled:
• Disabled
• Automatic
• Manual

Signal Volume Specifies the relative signal strength of the

ultrasonic signal within the loudspeaker audio
output signal. The selections are Auto, and levels
are 1 to10.

Polycom, Inc. 194

Enabling Content Sharing
Topics:

• Configure Content Sharing

• Adjust Audio Level for Content
• Connecting a Computer
• Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor
• Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor
• Setting Up a Polycom Content Display Application
• Configure Closed Captioning
• Enable VisualBoard Content Sharing
• Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application
• Configure the Polycom UC Board
• Sharing Content During Calls
• Configuring DVD Player Settings

To prepare for sharing content, see the following topics.

Configure Content Sharing

You can configure content sharing in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. For content
to display properly, the system's Monitor 2 must support Progressive mode, and the output resolution
should be set to a Progressive setting, such as 1280x720p or 1920x1080p. Interlaced output for Monitor 2
is not supported. Do not use the resolution setting 1920x1080i.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and select the
input you want to configure for content.
2. For the Display as setting, select Content for the input that will display content.

When you connect a content-sharing device such as a laptop to the input, the content starts
displaying. If the content-sharing device is already connected, you must manually show the
content from the local interface. For more information about sharing content, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series User Guide .
If default values for other settings in the system have not changed, you are ready to share content
on your system. However, if you disabled the H.239 protocol, you must enable the program for
content sharing by following these steps:
3. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference.
4. Enable H.239.
Note: While in a call, you cannot enable or disable H.239.

Polycom, Inc. 195

Enabling Content Sharing

Adjust Audio Level for Content

You can adjust the audio level for content in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
If the audio level of the call using content sharing needs to be adjusted, follow these steps to change the
level:
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
• Set the Audio Input Level.

Connecting a Computer
You can connect a computer directly to a RealPresence Group Series system. When you do this, other
call participants can see everything that you see on your computer.
When you connect to video and audio from your computer, the audio is muted unless the computer is
selected as a video source.
Refer to your system setup sheet for connection details. For information about connecting computers as
content video sources for systems, refer to the following topic.

Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor

To use the VisualBoard application on your RealPresence Group Series system's Monitor 1, you must
configure monitor settings on the system web interface. If you are using a touch monitor as Monitor 1, you
can run the VisualBoard application on the monitor and touch the screen to interact with the application.
Some monitors might delay the time between writing and displaying, due to processing within the monitor.
When using the VisualBoard application with a monitor, configure your monitor or projector to use Game
Mode, if that setting is available.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2. Under Monitor 1 for the Enable setting, select Manual.
3. For the Monitor Profile setting, select Content, then Far, then Near or Content, then Far.

Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor

The VisualBoard application runs on Monitor 2 by default, but you might want to make configuration
changes to the monitor settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. Some monitors
might delay the time between writing and displaying, due to processing within the monitor. When using
the VisualBoard application with a monitor, configure your monitor or projector to use Game Mode, if that
setting is available.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2. To configure monitor 1, go to System > Admin Settings > Monitors.

Polycom, Inc. 196

Enabling Content Sharing

At Enable, select either Auto or Manual. If you chose Manual, select any of the available profiles,
except Content, then Far, then Near or Content, then Far.
3. To configure monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, enable one of the content profiles, such as Content,
then Far, then Near, Content, then Far, Content, then Near, or the Content Only profile.

Setting Up a Polycom Content Display Application

The People+Content IP application enables a presenter to show content from a computer to other sites in
a video conference using only an IP network connection. The presenter can show PowerPoint® slides,
video clips, spreadsheets, or any other type of content from a computer. People+Content IP supports any
computer desktop resolution with color set to 16-bit or higher.
If the system is paired with a RealPresence Touch or a Polycom Touch Control, People+Content IP does
not require installation. After you connect the PC to the USB connection on the device, a version of
People+Content IP launches automatically.
Before a presenter can use a computer to show content with People+Content IP, do the following:
• Download the People+Content IP software application from the Polycom web site to the computer
or computers that the presenter will use to show content.
You don't need to change the computer resolutions and you don't need special cables or hardware,
but each computer must meet these requirements:
◦ Operating System: Windows 7 or 8
◦ Minimum computer: 500 MHz Pentium® III (or equivalent); 256 MB memoryRecommended
computer: 1 GHz Pentium III (or equivalent); 512 MB memory
• Connect the computer or computers to the IP network.

Download and Install Polycom People+Content IP

You need to download and install the Polycom People+Content IP application on a computer before you
can use it to show content.

Note: If the room system is paired with a Polycom touch device, you do not need to install the
application onto your computer. After you connect your computer to the touch device over
USB, a version of the Polycom People+Content IP application launches automatically.

Procedure
1. On a computer, visit the People + Content IP page.
2. Download the Polycom People+Content IP software for Mac or PC.
3. Open the zip file and click on the application installation.
4. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.

Configure Closed Captioning

You can provide real-time text transcriptions or language translations of the video conference by
displaying closed captions on your RealPresence Group Series system. When you provide captions for a
conference, the captioner may be present, or may use a telephone or web browser to listen to the

Polycom, Inc. 197

Enabling Content Sharing

conference audio. When the captioner sends a unit of text, all sites see it on the main monitor for 15
seconds. The text then disappears automatically.
Closed captions are supported between Polycom systems with software version 4.1.3 or later, including a
system hosting a multipoint call, HDX systems with any software version, and Polycom VSX® systems
with software version 7.0 or later.
Captions may be provided in any language that uses the Latin alphabet.
Depending on the capabilities of the system, the captioner may enter caption text using one of the
following methods:
• Remotely, through a dial-up connection to the system's serial RS-232 port
• In the room using equipment connected directly to the serial port
• In the room or remotely, using the system web interface

Enter Closed Captions on the Web Interface

Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, or from a remote location, by
entering the captions directly into the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, as shown in the
following diagram.

Ref. Number Description

1 Web interface

2 LAN

3 RealPresence Group Series system

4 LAN port

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Tools > Closed Caption.
2. Log in using this information if prompted:
User Name: Your user name defined for the video conferencing system.
Password: Meeting password defined for your video conferencing system.
3. In the Closed Caption screen, type the caption text into the text field.
Text wraps to the next line after 32 characters.

Polycom, Inc. 198

Enabling Content Sharing

4. Press Send to send the text to the sites in the conference.

Enter Closed Captions Using Equipment Connected to a Serial RS-232

Port
Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, using equipment connected
directly to the serial port of the RealPresence Group Series system, as shown in the following diagram.

Ref. Number Description

1 Stenographer machine

2 PC with computer-aided transcription software

3 RealPresence Group Series system

4 RS-232 serial port

Procedure
1. Ensure that the computer and the system are configured to use the same baud rate and parity
settings.
2. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
3. Set the RS-232 mode to Closed Caption.
4. On the computer, start the transcription application.
5. Enter text using the stenographic machine connected to the computer.
6. To stop sending closed captions, close the transcription application.

Dial-Up Connection to the System's RS-232 Serial Port

Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, or from a remote location, via a
dial-up connection to the serial port of the RealPresence Group Series system, as shown in the following
diagram.

Polycom, Inc. 199

Enabling Content Sharing

Ref. Number Description

1 Stenograph machine

2 PC with computer-aided transcription software

3 Modem

4 Phone line

5 Modem

6 RealPresence Group Series system

7 RS-232 serial port

Procedure
1. Ensure that the computer and the system are configured to use the same baud rate and parity
settings.
2. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
3. Set the RS-232 Mode to Closed Caption.
4. Establish a dial-up connection between the computer and the system.
a) Connect a null modem adapter to the RS-232 serial port.
b) Connect an RS-232 cable to the modem and to the null modem adapter.
c) Connect the modem to a phone line.

Polycom, Inc. 200

Enabling Content Sharing

d) Configure the modem for 8 bits, no parity.

You may need to configure the modem to answer automatically. You may also need to
configure it to ignore DTR signals.
5. On the computer, start the transcription application.
6. Enter text using the stenographic machine connected to the computer.
7. To stop sending closed captions, close the transcription application.

Enable VisualBoard Content Sharing

You must enable the VisualBoard application before you can use it with the RealPresence Group Series
system.

Procedure
1. From the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
VisualBoard/RDP.
2. Select Enable, and then select Save.

Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application

Before you can begin using the VisualBoard application, ensure that you have done the following:
• Installed and configured one of the following: USB mouse or UC Board hardware
• Enabled the VisualBoard/RDP setting on the RealPresence Group Series system web interface
• When setting up the VisualBoard application, note that only one USB storage device can be
connected to one host port, whether it is connected directly or through a hub.

Configure the Polycom UC Board

With the Polycom® UC Board, you can show and annotate content in real-time from RealPresence Group
Series systems by using the stylus and receiver included with the UC Board hardware. You can use
either a second monitor or a whiteboard and projector. For flat, cold surfaces such as white boards with
projectors, Polycom suggests that you use the Polycom UC Board.
Two monitors are required to use the Polycom UC Board. The second monitor can be either a projector
used with a whiteboard, or a monitor.
Polycom recommends the following installation tips:
• Use LED backlit, LCD displays instead of CFL LCD displays.
• Do not use plasma backlit displays.
• The UC Board hardware sensor and pen are designed for cold surfaces, such as white boards with
projectors.
• Mount the hardware sensor on the top of the display device. Room lights can interfere with the
sensor when it is mounted on the bottom of the display.
The UC Board sensor supports one stylus at a time. It does not support using two styluses
simultaneously.

Polycom, Inc. 201

Enabling Content Sharing

For more information on setting up and using the UC Board, refer to the Polycom UC Board Quick Start
Guide, available with the UC Board hardware and at Polycom Support.
To set up two monitors and configure to show content:
1. To configure monitor 1, in the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Monitors. At Enable, select either Auto or Manual. If you chose Manual, select any of the
available profiles.
2. To configure monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, enable one of the content profiles.
To improve performance, configure your monitor or projector to use Game Mode, if that setting is
available.

Sharing Content During Calls

You can present content during calls when you use sources such as the following:
• A DVD player connected directly to a video input on a system
• People+Content IP installed on a computer, with any system
• A computer connected directly to a system or a Polycom touch device
• A USB drive connected to a Polycom touch device, such as the RealPresence Touch
RealPresence Group Series systems achieve maximum content frame rate of 30 fps for 1080p with a
1080p Resolution option key installed, and 60 fps for 720p. If you use Content as the Quality
Preference in your network IP settings, you can achieve a content frame rate of 60 fps for 1080p with the
1080p Resolution option key installed.
For more information about sharing content during a call, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series User Guide .

Configuring DVD Player Settings

To play content from a DVD, do the following for your RealPresence Group Series system type:
• With a RealPresence Group 310 or a RealPresence Group 500 system, you can connect a DVD
player to an HDMI or VGA input to play content.
• With a RealPresence Group 700 system, you can also connect a DVD player to the system's video
input to play DVDs in calls.
• Using a DVD player with a RealPresence Group 300 system is not supported.

Adjust DVD Audio Settings for Content

DVD inputs are active when you select the camera source configured as DVD. This means that both the
audio and video inputs are active—you cannot select one or the other. Because the microphone inputs
remain active while the DVD player is playing, call participants might want to mute the microphones while
playing DVDs. You can configure DVD audio settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
2. Set Line In Level for playback volume of the DVD player relative to other audio from the system.

Polycom, Inc. 202

Enabling Content Sharing

Enable DVD Audio Out Always On unless you have the DVD inputs and outputs both connected
to the same device to play and record.

Polycom, Inc. 203

Configuring Call Recording
Topics:

• Polycom RealPresence Media Suite Recording

• Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a RealPresence Group 700 System

The following topics describe how to configure call recording and how to record calls.

Polycom RealPresence Media Suite Recording

Users can use Polycom® Media Suite solution to record calls directly from the RealPresence Group Series
system, remotely log in to Polycom RealPresence Media Suite to record or live stream calls. On the
RealPresence Group 700 system, you can record calls on Monitor 3.
RealPresence Media Suite is an enterprise recording, streaming and video content management solution
that offers users and administrators a self-service user portal to record calls on their systems.

Enable Recording Controls

You can use a system to record the audio and video of a call.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Recording Service.
2. At Enable RealPresence Media Suite, select the checkbox.
3. Enter the connection information in the following settings.

Setting Description

Domain Name Enter the server domain name for RealPresence

Media Suite.

User Name Enter the server user name for RealPresence

Media Suite.

Password Enter the server password for RealPresence Media

Suite.

Server Address Enter the IP address for the RealPresence Media

Suite server.

4. Click Save to save the connection settings.

Recording Calls Remotely

From RealPresence Media Suite's User Portal, any user can start recording, create a live stream event,
and share video files. The Polycom RealPresence Media Suite is also a streaming and recording system
that participates in standards-based video and telepresence calls.

Polycom, Inc. 204

Configuring Call Recording

The RealPresence Media Suite solution allows users to record and live stream a call by dialing into a
RealPresence Group Series system from a RealPresence Media Suite portal. If users have access to a
RealPresence Media Suite portal, they can log in to the portal to dial in to a system from which they want
to record a call. This method is also ideal for an administrator of a remote system. For information about
using this method, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Media Suite, Appliance Edition User Guide or
Polycom RealPresence Media Suite, Virtual Edition User Guide at support.polycom.com.
Users can also remotely record calls in the following ways:
• Dial RealPresence Media Suite directly: Use the default recording settings defined by a
RealPresence Media Suite administrator. Before recording a call using this method, users must
obtain the IP address, H.323 extension, or SIP URL of the RealPresence Media Suite.
• Dial a RealPresence Media Suite Video Recording Room (VRR): A VRR is a virtual capture
server with a specific recording profile that is defined by a RealPresence Media Suite administrator.
Before recording a call using this method, users must obtain the VRR number and the IP address,
H.323 ID, or SIP address of the RealPresence Media Suite.
When a recording is initiated remotely from the RealPresence Media Suite user portal, users cannot
control the recording from the system.
For more information on recording with these two methods, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series User Guide .
If you have access to a RealPresence Media Suite portal, you can use additional features, such as
copying the URL for a recording to share with others. For more features, see the Polycom RealPresence
Media Suite User Guide at support.polycom.com.
The following connection methods are supported for dialing a RealPresence Media Suite.

Media Suite Type Connection Method Example

Media Suite system If the both the video conferencing 10.11.12.13

system and the RealPresence
Media Suite system are not
registered to the gatekeeper or to a
SIP server, dial the RealPresence
Media Suite IP address.

If both the video conferencing 1234

system and the RealPresence
Media Suite system are registered
to a gatekeeper, dial the
RealPresence Media Suite E.164
extension for H.323.

If both the video conferencing CS123

system and the RealPresence
Media Suite system are registered
to a SIP server, dial the
RealPresence Media Suite SIP
address.

Polycom, Inc. 205

Configuring Call Recording

Media Suite Type Connection Method Example

VRR For SIP calls: If the RealPresence Media Suite IP

is 11.12.13.14 and the VRR number
[VRR number]@[RealPresence
is 4096,dial 11.12.13.14##4096.
Media Suite IP] or [SIP peer prefix]
[VRR number] If the SIP peer prefix of the
RealPresence Media Suite is 8888
and the VRR number is 4096, dial
88884096.

For H.323 calls: If the RealPresence Media Suite IP

is 11.12.13.14 and the VRR number
[RealPresence Media Suite
is 4096,dial 11.12.13.14##4096.
IP]##[VRR number] or
[RealPresence Media Suite E.164 If the RealPresence Media Suite E.
prefix][VRR number] 164 prefix is 8888 and the VRR
number is 4096, dial 88884096.

Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a

RealPresence Group 700 System
You can configure monitor settings for recording on a RealPresence Group 700 system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2. Select one of the following settings for Monitor 3:
• Record Mode with Content. Select this setting to record what the speaker says, along with
any content audio. This records near, far, and content audio.
• Record Mode. Select this setting to record only what the speaker says. This records near,
far, and content audio.

Polycom, Inc. 206

Customizing the Local Interface
Topics:

• Change the Background Image on the Home Screen

• Change the Startup Image on the Home Screen
• Set Up the Address Bar

These topics describe how to configure your system by using the configuration screens on the local
interface. If you are in the room with the system, you can navigate the screens and enter information by
using the remote control and the onscreen keyboard. When you reach a text field, press the Select button
on the remote control to display the onscreen keyboard. Note that the onscreen keyboard is automatically
displayed when you reach the System Name field in the setup wizard.
Be aware that only those configuration screens needed to get the system connected are included in the
local interface. Most of the administrative settings are available only in the system web interface.
In the system's local interface, go to > Settings > Administration. The local interface has a subset of
the administration settings that are available in the system web interface.
When a RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control, the following
statements are true:
• You can change the system's configuration using the system web interface only.
• During pairing, when prompted to enter the Admin ID and Admin Password, but no Admin password
has been configured, you must submit a blank password.
If you enable a provisioning service, any settings provisioned by the RealPresence Resource Manager
system might be displayed as read-only settings in the system web interface Admin Settings. For more
information about automatic provisioning, refer to the RealPresence Resource Manager system
documentation at support.polycom.com.

Change the Background Image on the Home Screen

You can upload a custom image to display as the background of all monitors for a multi-screen system or
on the main monitor of a single RealPresence Group Series system. The image must have a pixel size of
1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format, and a file size less than 5 MB.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Background.
2. Browse to the desired image file and click Choose File > Upload.
The custom image displays on the main monitor or monitors.
Related Links
Change the Background Image on page 221

Polycom, Inc. 207

Customizing the Local Interface

Change the Startup Image on the Home Screen

The system local interface displays a default background image when the RealPresence Group Series
system first powers on. You cannot delete this image, but you can upload your own image to replace it.
When you change the image in the system web interface, the new image also appears on the
RealPresence Touch device.
You must upload an image with pixel size of 1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Startup Background.
2. Click Choose File to search for and select the image you want to upload.
3. When the image name appears next to Choose File, click Upload.

Set Up the Address Bar

You can customize where address bar elements appear on the Home screen of the RealPresence Group
Series system local interface.
The system local interface displays an address bar at the bottom of the Home screen. The address bar
can contain the following information:
• None
• IP Address
• H.323 Extension
• SIP Address
• Pairing Code

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Address Bar.
2. Configure the following settings.

Setting Description

Address Bar (Left Element) Allows you to select which element you want
displayed on the left side of the address bar on the
local interface. The choices are:
• None
• IP Address
• 323 Extension
• Pairing Code

Polycom, Inc. 208

Customizing the Local Interface

Setting Description

Address Bar (Right Element) Allows you to select which element you want
displayed on the right side of the address bar on
the local interface. The choices are:
• None
• SIP Address
• 323 Extension
• Pairing Code

Polycom, Inc. 209

Calling
Topics:

• Call a Favorite Contact

• Call a Speed Dial Contact
• Call a Recent Call Contact
• Place a Call
• Searching Directory Contacts to Call
• Browse Global Contact Entries to Call
• Place a Cascaded Call
• Place an Audio-Only Call

The following topics describe how to make calls.

Call a Favorite Contact

In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, at Place a Call, you can call a favorite contact.

Procedure
1. In the Contacts section, enter a name and click Search.
2. Select a contact name and click Call.
Related Links
Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups on page 124

Call a Speed Dial Contact

In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface on the Place a Call screen, you can call Speed
Dial contacts and can edit the Speed Dial contact list. After you have enabled Speed Dial, users can use
it as a shortcut for calling a contact.

Procedure
» In the Speed Dial section, select a contact from the list and click Call.
To place a call within your company's telephone system, enter the internal extension instead of the
full number.
Related Links
Remove Speed Dial Contacts on page 128

Polycom, Inc. 210

Calling

Call a Recent Call Contact

On the RealPresence Group Series system web interface Place a Call screen, you can place calls to
Recent Call contacts.

Procedure
» In the system web interface Place a Call screen's Recent Calls section, do one of the following:
• Find an entry and click the Call link next to the entry.
• Click More to view a list of calls with more details, then select an entry and click Call.

Place a Call
In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, at Place a Call, you can place a call manually.

Procedure
1. Click Manual Dial.
2. Enter the number.
3. Click Call.
The call is placed according to the default settings you selected in Admin Settings > Network >
Dialing Preferences. You can select settings other than the defaults in the two lists below the text
entry field.
4. To require a password, select Meeting Password and enter a password in the field that displays
below the check box.

Searching Directory Contacts to Call

Directory contacts are called “global contact entries” in the RealPresence Group Series system local
interface. These global contact entries are assigned to a default global Favorites group named Global
Entry. The global directory contains address book entries downloaded from an enabled global directory
server.
You can search the global directory to return a list of all global directory entries that match your search
criteria, then select contacts in the global directory to call. Up to 200 search results can be displayed at a
time from a Polycom Global Directory Service (GDS) or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
global directory.
To browse LDAP global directory entries, LDAP must be enabled through Polycom RealPresence
Resource Manager. If LDAP is not enabled through RealPresence Resource Manager, you can still
search the global directory, but you cannot browse the global directory.

Browse Global Contact Entries to Call

You can browse the global contact entries to call in the global directory in the RealPresence Group Series
system web interface.

Polycom, Inc. 211

Calling

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Place a Call > Contacts.
2. At Search, enter a contact name and click Search.
3. Select Call to place a call or select an entry to view the contact's information.

Place a Cascaded Call

From your RealPresence Group Series system, you can include multiple sites in a cascaded call if the
sites you call have internal multipoint capability.
The following diagram shows a cascaded call with multiple sites.

Keep the following points in mind regarding cascaded calls:

• H.239 is not supported in cascaded calls.
• Cascaded multipoint is not supported in SIP calls.
• HD and SD multipoint are not supported when the system hosts a cascaded call.
• You cannot change the near-end layout.
• The encryption padlock icon might not accurately indicate whether a cascaded call is encrypted.
• You cannot call a group of contacts by using Speed Dial or Favorites to call the group.
• You cannot place group calls on RealPresence Group 300 or 310 systems.

Procedure
1. Create and call a group in the directory, or place calls one at a time to several other sites.
2. Ask each far site to call additional sites.
Along with these additional sites, each far site in the original multipoint call can add one audio-only
connection.

Polycom, Inc. 212

Calling

Place an Audio-Only Call

You can now place SIP or H.323 audio-only calls on RealPresence Group Series systems through the
system web interface, the local interface, a RealPresence Touch device, API, or a Polycom® IP 7000
conference phone. Keep the following in mind when placing audio-only calls:
• If you start a conference with a SIP audio-only call, you cannot add an audio or video call to the
conference. To add other calls with SIP audio calls, first start with a video participant, then add SIP
audio calls.
• You cannot view video or share content as an audio-only participant during a conference call.
• Audio calls are supported when the Enable Audio-only Calls setting is enabled or when the
system is paired to a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000.
For information on placing audio-only calls on the local interface, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series User Guide .

Polycom, Inc. 213

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence
Touch Device
Topics:

• Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device

• Run the RealPresence Touch Device Setup Wizard
• Power Off the RealPresence Touch
• Wake the RealPresence Touch
• Enable the RealPresence Touch Device
• Pairing the Device
• Managing the RealPresence Touch Device
• Customize the RealPresence Touch Screens
• Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch
• Enable Microsoft Skype Mode for RealPresence Touch
• Updating Software
▪ Restart the RealPresence Touch Device
▪ Restart a System from a RealPresence Touch Device
• Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device

The following topics provide information on how to enable and set up a Polycom RealPresence Touch
device.

Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device

Ensure that the RealPresence Touch is conveniently located for use during a meeting, such as on a
conference table, so that systems can be controlled by the Polycom RealPresence Touch device. Place
the device in a location where you can easily touch the screen and see the RealPresence Group Series
system monitor displays. The RealPresence Touch device can be positioned horizontally at either a 30
degree or 65 degree viewing angle.

Run the RealPresence Touch Device Setup Wizard

Before you can pair the RealPresence Touch device to a RealPresence Group Series system, you must
set up the hardware and use the set up wizard.

Procedure
1. Ensure that you have completed the setup wizard on the system.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the RealPresence Touch.
3. Plug the Ethernet cable into the wall outlet:

Polycom, Inc. 214

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

• If your room provides Power Over Ethernet, you can connect the Ethernet cable directly to a
LAN outlet.
• If your room does not provide Power Over Ethernet, you must connect the Ethernet cable to
the power supply adapter. Then connect the power supply adapter to a LAN outlet and
power outlet.The RealPresence Touch powers on and displays the language selection
screen.
4. Choose your language and follow the onscreen instructions.
5. After the RealPresence Touch connects to the network, enter the system IP address at Device
Address, then enter the Admin ID and Password.
6. Tap Pair.
If the system is configured to allow pairing and you entered the IP address, admin ID and
password for the system correctly, the RealPresence Touch device pairs with the system. When
pairing is successful, the RealPresence Touch splash screen is displayed, followed by the home
screen.

Power Off the RealPresence Touch

If you need to move your RealPresence Touch device to another area, power off the device before you
disconnect the Ethernet cable.

Procedure
1. On any screen, tap Menu, Settings, and then Administration.
2. Sign in using your Admin ID and password.
3. Scroll down to Power and Pairing.
4. Touch RealPresence Touch Power until a Shutting down... message displays.
The RealPresence Touch is powered off.

Wake the RealPresence Touch

The RealPresence Touch goes to sleep after two minutes of inactivity. To wake it, you can touch the
screen.

Procedure
» Touch the screen.
The last screen that was displayed before the sleep state is displayed.

Enable the RealPresence Touch Device

Before your users can control the system with the RealPresence Touch device, you must enable the
device on the RealPresence Group Series system's web interface. Once the device is enabled, you can
pair it to the system.

Procedure
1. On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.

Polycom, Inc. 215

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

2. Select the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box and click Save.
Note that only one device can be paired to a system at a time.

Pairing the Device

When you configure the RealPresence Touch to pair with a particular RealPresence Group Series
system, the RealPresence Touch makes an IP connection to the room system. If the connection is lost,
the RealPresence Touch automatically attempts to restore the connection.
After you have completed RealPresence Touch setup, you can pair to a different system using
RealPresence Touch settings.

Pairing States
The following table describes the pairing and connection states:

State Description

Unpaired The RealPresence Touch is not associated with a

system.

Paired and Connected The RealPresence Touch is associated with a system

through the pairing process. This is normal operating
mode. A RealPresence Touch can be connected to
only one system at a time.

Paired and Disconnected The RealPresence Touch is associated with a system,

but communication is disrupted, usually because of a
system power off or LAN issue. Communication is
automatically restored when a system and the touch
device are successfully connected to the LAN.

Pair For the First Time

To pair your RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group Series system that has not been paired
before, you must enter the system's credentials before connection can be established.

Procedure
1. After completing the out-of-box (OOB) setup wizard, the RealPresence Touch displays the pairing
screen.
2. Tap the Manually Pair tab.
3. Enter the IP Address, Admin ID, and Password for the system.
4. Tap Pair.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.

Polycom, Inc. 216

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Pair to a Previously Paired System

If you have paired with a RealPresence Group Series system before, you can select it from a previously
paired list of systems. You do not have to enter the system credentials again, unless the credentials have
changed.

Procedure
1. On the Home screen, tap Menu, Settings, then Administration.
2. Sign in using your admin ID and password.
3. Scroll down to Power and Pairing and tap UNPAIR AND RETURN TO PAIRING SCREEN.
4. On the Recently Paired tab, tap the system that you want to pair with.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.
If you unpair from the system, any current calls on the system are still active. To hang up the calls,
repair to the room system and select More Options, then Participants, More Options, and
Remove or Remove All.
After the room system and the RealPresence Touch are paired, the system web interface and the
RealPresence Touch interface display information about each other and about their connection status.

Unpair a RealPresence Touch

You can unpair the RealPresence Touch and a RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2. Clear the check box next to Enable Polycom Touch Device.
3. Click Save.
The system cannot pair with any touch device while the Enable Polycom Touch Device check
box is cleared.

Remove a System from the Paired System List

After attempting to pair a device, a “Cannot Pair as a Dedicated Device” message might be displayed.
This means that another device is already paired to the same RealPresence Group Series system. An
administrator can determine which device is paired and can unpair the device using the system web
interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2. Click Forget this Device.
3. Click Save.
Now you can pair another system.

Polycom, Inc. 217

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Managing the RealPresence Touch Device

You can remotely manage certain features of your RealPresence Touch when it is paired to a
RealPresence Group Series . For a list of supported browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series Release Notes .
You can manage the following features remotely:
• Download Logs: Downloads the RealPresence Touch logs to the location specified in the device.
• Network Settings: Specifies whether the system acquires an IP address automatically or manually.
With the manual method, the other settings that are available from the RealPresence Touch
become available on the web.
• Pair: Pairs and unpairs from systems. Before you can connect to or pair with a device, you must
know the device's IP Address and the User Name and password used to connect.
• Security: Changes the admin ID and password of the RealPresence Touch.
• Software Updates: Updates the RealPresence Touch software. You can update from the default
Polycom server or your own server by entering the appropriate IP address.
• View RealPresence Touch Screens: Shows the screen currently being displayed on the
RealPresence Touch. You can click Refresh at any time to see if the screen has changed.

Open a Remote Management Window

You can open a remote management window for your RealPresence Touch in a RealPresence Group
Series system web browser.

Procedure
1. In a web browser, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Touch device.
2. In the login window, enter the ID and Password you use to access the administrative features of
the RealPresence Touch.
You can access the remote management features by using the Navigation menu or the
Dashboard. To return to the Dashboard, click the Home icon.

Pair Using RealPresence Touch Web Interface

To pair your RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group Series system, you must enter the
system's credentials before connection can be established.

Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Pairing.
2. At Device, select RealPresence Group Series .
3. Enter the IP Address or Host Name, User Name, and Password for the system.
4. Click Pair.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.

Unpair Using the RealPresence Touch Web Interface

You can unpair the RealPresence Touch and a RealPresence Group Series system.

Polycom, Inc. 218

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Pairing.
2. Click Unpair.

Change the RealPresence Touch User Name and Password

You can change the security credentials for the RealPresence Touch device.

Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Security.
2. At Admin ID, enter your admin ID.
3. At Current Password, enter the current password.
4. At Password, enter the new password.
5. At Confirm Password, reenter the new password.
6. Click Save.

Enable Recent Calls and Speed Dial

You can enable the recent calls and speed dial icons in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
• Recent Calls: In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System
Settings > Recent Calls. Select the Enable Recent Calls checkbox.
• Speed Dial: In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home
Screen Settings > Speed Dial. Select the Enable Speed Dial checkbox.

Customize the RealPresence Touch Screens

You can use the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to configure how information is
displayed on the Home screen of the RealPresence Touch device. These settings are included in the
System settings profile, and included in bundled provisioning when using RealPresence Resource
Manager.
You can configure the RealPresence Touch home screen in the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing >
RealPresence Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2. Configure the settings on the Home Screen Settings screen that are described in the following
topics.

Choose the Home Screen Icons

You can choose home screen icons for your RealPresence Group Series system local interface. By
default, two icon buttons appear in the lower center of the RealPresence Touch Home screen; users see
only the Place a Call and Show Content icons. However, you can customize the number of screens and
Home screen icons in a preferred order. Once you customize the Home screen configuration, users can
scroll through one to three Home Screens, with up to three icons on each screen.

Polycom, Inc. 219

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Procedure
1. In the web user interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > RealPresence
Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2. Under Configure Home Screen, click Configure Home Screen Options.
3. At Home screen 1 > Button 1, select one to three icon buttons to appear per screen in your
preferred order.
You can select from the following icon buttons:
• None (no icon)
• Place a Call
• Show Content
• Keypad
• Contacts
• Speed Dial
• Recent
• System Information
• User Settings
• Administration
4. If you want to include more than one Home screen, continue selecting icon buttons for Home
Screen 2 and Home Screen 3 until all screens are configured.
For example, Home Screen 1 > Button 1 > Recent Call Button 2 > Place a Call > Button 3 >
Contacts.
5. To save your selections, click Save.
Your new selections should display on the Home screens of the RealPresence Touch device.

Choose the Place a Call Screen Icons

You can customize the Place a Call screen to display certain icon buttons for your RealPresence Group
Series system. Since there are four ways to place a call by default, after you tap the Place a Call button,
all the selections display on the screen. You can customize one of the icon buttons to be the default. All of
the other Place a Call icon buttons continue to display at the top of the screen.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing >
RealPresence Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2. Under Configure Home Screen, click Place A Call Screen.
3. Under Select Preferred Sub Menu, choose from the following:
• Keypad
• Contacts
• Recent Calls
• Speed Dials
4. Click Save.
Your new selections should display on the RealPresence Touch Place a Call screen.
To revert back to the default icons, at Configure Home Screen, select Default Configuration,
and click Save.

Polycom, Inc. 220

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Change the Background Image

The RealPresence Touch device allows you to upload a custom background image that is separate from
the RealPresence Group Series system monitor background. If a custom image is not loaded, the image
from the primary system screen displays as the RealPresence Touch device background when it is paired
with the system (default behavior). To create a custom background on the RealPresence Touch, you
must upload an image with pixel size of 1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format that is less than
5 MB.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > RealPresence Touch Background.
2. Browse to the desired image file and click Choose File > Upload.
The custom image displays paired RealPresence Touch Home screen.
Related Links
Change the Background Image on the Home Screen on page 207

Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers for the

RealPresence Touch
The global directory provides a list of other systems that are registered with the Global Directory Server
and available for calls.
The other systems appear in the directory, allowing users to place calls to other users by selecting their
names.

Set Up Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch

You can use the RealPresence Touch device to set up directory servers.

Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers.
2. Configure the following settings:

Directory Servers Authentication Global Directory Entry Calling

Supported Protocols Groups Information

Microsoft NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:

distribution lists
Skype for Business • SIP address
Server 2015 (SIP URI)

Polycom, Inc. 221

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Directory Servers Authentication Global Directory Entry Calling

Supported Protocols Groups Information

LDAP Any of the following: Not Supported Might include:

with H.350 or Active • NTLM v2 only • 323 IP address
Directory
• Basic (raw IPv4
address, DNS
• Anonymous name, H.323
dialed digits, H.
323 ID, or H.
323 extension)
• SIP address
(SIP URI)
• ISDN number
• Phone number*

Polycom GDS Proprietary Not Supported Might include:

• 323 IP address
(raw IPv4
address, DNS
name, or H.323
extension)
• ISDN number

* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one
of the following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number

You can configure the system to use the following directory server when the system is
automatically provisioned by a RealPresence Resource Manager system.

Directory Servers Authentication Global Directory Entry Calling

Supported Protocol Groups Information

Skype for Business NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:
Server 2015 distribution lists
• SIP address
(SIP URI)

* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one
of the following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number

Related Links
Configure the Skype for Business Directory Server on page 48

Polycom, Inc. 222

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Enable Microsoft Skype Mode for RealPresence Touch

After the RealPresence Group Series system is registered with the Skype for Business Server online or
on-premises, you can enable Skype mode for the system to provide a consistent environment for all
Office 365 products in your deployment. When the system is signed into Skype for Business Online,
Skype mode is required and enabled automatically, and users can control the system only with the
RealPresence Touch device. You cannot disable Skype Mode in Skype for Business Online deployments.
In Skype mode, the system local interface has limited operations; refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series Release Notes for a limitations list.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Skype Mode.
2. Select Enable Skype mode.
3. Click Save.
For information on using the Skype Mode user interface, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Touch in
Skype Mode Quick Tips or the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide at support.polycom.com.

Updating Software
The RealPresence Touch must run a software version that is compatible with the software version on the
RealPresence Group Series system.
The RealPresence Touch, after pairing with the system, verifies the compatibility of the RealPresence
Touch panel and operating system software and requests a software update.
For additional details on software compatibility, refer to the appropriate version of the release notes
available at Polycom Support.
If you need to update your system at the same time you update the Polycom touch device, update the
system software first.
Update files for the RealPresence Touch are located on the Polycom support server. You can store the
update files on a USB device, RealPresence Resource Manager system, or on your own web server. No
license number or key is needed to update the RealPresence Touch.
You can configure the Polycom touch device to get software updates using any of the following methods:
• A Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system
• A server on your network
• The online software server hosted by Polycom
• A USB 2.0 storage device in FAT32 format that you connect to the side of the device

Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates

You can post software for a Polycom touch device on a RealPresence Resource Manager system. Then,
configure the device to get updates from the applicable RealPresence Group Series system by entering
the Production URL or Trial URL on the device Software Update screen.

Polycom, Inc. 223

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

When using a RealPresence Resource Manager system to automatically update the software for a
system with an associated Polycom touch device, use the same management server for the touch device
updates. This helps you control the version of software installed on the touch device.
When a Polycom touch device is connected to a provisioned system, a RealPresence Resource Manager
can receive status updates from and provide software updates to the touch device. For supported
RealPresence Resource Manager versions, go to http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/support/us/
support/service_policies.html and click Current Interoperability Matrix.
For information about configuring production and trial versions of software update packages, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager System Operations Guide available at support.polycom.com.

Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site

You can post software to your web server and then configure the RealPresence Touch device to receive
updates.

Procedure
1. Make sure that your server enables clients to download files with the following extensions or with
no extension:
• .tar.gz
• .txt
• .sig
• .plcm
2. Define a URL on your server that the RealPresence Touch can use for software updates, and
create a corresponding root directory to it.
3. Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the system that you use with the
RealPresence Touch.
4. Save and extract the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar file) from the
Polycom website to the root directory of the web server.

Managing Polycom Touch Device Software on Your Server

When checking for software updates on your server, Polycom touch devices check only for what is
referred to as the “current” release of the RealPresence Group Series system software. By default, the
current release is the software distribution package that was most recently extracted on your server.
Over time, you might extract other versions of the software on your server, resetting the current release
with every extraction. In addition, you could accumulate multiple versions of the same software.
Each software distribution package contains two commands that you can use to maintain all of the
software extracted on your server.
• The setcurel command sets a specific version of software as the current release.
• The removerel command removes a specific version of a software release from your server.

Set a Software Version as Current

Use the setcurrel command to set a specific version of RealPresence Touch software as the current
release on your server.

Polycom, Inc. 224

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Procedure
1. Run the setcurrel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set as the
current release:
• Unix or Linux: <root dir>/vega/platform/setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX
• Windows: <root dir>\vega/platform/setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
2. Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.

Remove a RealPresence Touch Software Version

Use the removerel command to remove a specific version of a RealPresence Touch software release
from your server.

Procedure
1. Run the removerel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set remove
from the server:
• Unix or Linux: <root dir>/vega/platform/setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX
• Windows: <root dir>\vega/platform/setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
2. Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.

Update Software from the Web Interface

Using the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, you can update the RealPresence Touch
software from the Polycom server or your own server.

Procedure
1. Open a supported browser.
2. Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Touch using the format
http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4. If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The default password is the RealPresence Touch serial number.
The first time you open the system web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name
and password after you select any of the interface options.
5. On the Home Page, click Software Update.
6. Enter the server address for the update.
The default server address, polycom, is the address for the Polycom public soft-update repository
and has the latest released software version available.
7. Click Save to save these changes.
8. Click Check for Software Updates.
9. Click Download and Install Software.
Download progress is displayed during installation.

Update Software from the Local Interface

Using the RealPresence Touch interface, you can update the RealPresence Touch software from the
Polycom server or your own server.

Polycom, Inc. 225

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration and then touch Software Update.
2. Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the RealPresence Touch software
in the in the Server Address field.
To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
3. Touch Check for Software Updates.
4. Touch Download and Install Software.

Update RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device

You can update the RealPresence Touch quickly using a USB storage device without updating the
RealPresence Touch factory restore partition.

Procedure
1. Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2. Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3. Navigate to the page for the system that you use with the RealPresence Touch.
4. Save the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar) file from the Polycom
website to the root directory of the USB device.
5. Ensure the RealPresence Touch Ethernet cord is connected and the RealPresence Touch is
powered on.
6. Connect the USB device to the side of the RealPresence Touch.
7. An automatic prompt asks you if you want to update the platform software.
Touch Yes.

Update the Software and the Factory Restore Partition From a USB
Storage Device
You can use a USB storage device to update RealPresence Touch software and the RealPresence
Touch factory restore partition.
If you cannot update your RealPresence Touch device using a server or with RealPresence Resource
Manager, you can load the software onto a USB storage device and use that to update the device.
Another benefit of using a USB device is that you can choose to perform both a factory restore and
update your device software simultaneously.
The following attributes ensure that your USB device supports the software update procedure:
• Use USB 2.0 devices (some USB 3.0 devices might not work with the RealPresence Touch).
• Format the primary partition as FAT32.
• Place all software update data into the root directory of the primary partition.

Procedure
1. Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2. Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3. Navigate to the page for the version of the system that you use with the RealPresence Touch.
4. Save the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar) file from the Polycom
website to the root directory of the USB device.
5. Disconnect the Ethernet power cable from the RealPresence Touch.

Polycom, Inc. 226

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

6. Connect the USB device to the side of the RealPresence Touch.

7. Press and hold the RealPresence Touch factory restore button with a bent paper clip for ten
seconds and simultaneously reconnect the Ethernet power cable to the RealPresence Touch.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions of the setup wizard to complete the update.
The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted,
or after using the factory restore button.

Restart the RealPresence Touch Device

You can restart the RealPresence Touch device when it is paired with a RealPresence Group Series
system from the touch device.

Procedure
1. On the RealPresence Touch device, navigate to Settings > Administration.
2. Enter the administrator password.
3. Tap Restart Touch Controller.

Restart a System from a RealPresence Touch Device

When the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a RealPresence Touch device and is
enabled for Skype for Business, you can restart the room system using the RealPresence Touch device.

Procedure
1. On the RealPresence Touch device, navigate to Settings > Administration.
2. Enter the administrator password.
3. Under RealPresence Group Series , tap Restart Room System.

Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device

You might need to do some troubleshooting on your RealPresence Touch device. For information on
troubleshooting, see the following topics.
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch on page 229
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on page 229
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device on page 228
View Call Statistics on page 228
View System Details and Connection Status on page 227

View System Details and Connection Status

You can view certain RealPresence Group Series system details about the paired system on the
RealPresence Touch; this information might be useful for troubleshooting or for technical support.

Procedure
1. On any screen on the RealPresence Touch, tap Menu and then Settings.

Polycom, Inc. 227

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

The System Information screen is displayed.

2. Under Device Connection Status, tap the room system that you want information on.
System details and connection status information is listed for the connected room system.
Related Links
Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device on page 227
You might need to do some troubleshooting on your RealPresence Touch device. For information on
troubleshooting, see the following topics.

View Call Statistics

When your RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a RealPresence Touch, you might want to
view certain call statistics, such as bitrates, compression formats, and packet loss during a call.

Procedure
1. During a call, on any screen, tap Call Statistics (located at the top left of your screen).
Call statistics for each stream in the current call are now displayed.
2. To view statistics for another call participant, switch to that participant and tap Call Statistics
again.
To view more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and tap More
Information.
Related Links
Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device on page 227
You might need to do some troubleshooting on your RealPresence Touch device. For information on
troubleshooting, see the following topics.

Download RealPresence Touch Logs

You can download RealPresence Group Series system logs using the RealPresence Touch.

Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Download Logs.
2. A .tar file is downloaded to your local computer.
You can extract the file and open it to review the log information.

Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device

You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can transfer RealPresence Touch logs to a USB
storage device. The USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.

Procedure
1. Insert a USB storage device into the RealPresence Touch device.
2. On the RealPresence Touch device, do one of the following:
• Tap Administration and enter the user name and password for the device.
• Tap Menu > Administration and enter your user name and password.
3. Tap Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to USB Device.

Polycom, Inc. 228

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

A message displays while the logs are being transferred to the USB storage device.
After a success message displays, click OK.
Related Links
Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device on page 227
You might need to do some troubleshooting on your RealPresence Touch device. For information on
troubleshooting, see the following topics.

Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch

If the RealPresence Touch device is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Administration
password, you can use the factory restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases
the RealPresence Touch device's settings and reinstalls the default platform and applications. Do not
power off the device during the factory restore process.
The restore button pinhole is on the back of the RealPresence Touch, as shown in the following figure.

Procedure
1. Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
2. Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
3. Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
4. Wait for the RealPresence Touch device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
5. Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
When the process is complete, the device displays the splash screen and then the home screen.
Related Links
Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device on page 227
You might need to do some troubleshooting on your RealPresence Touch device. For information on
troubleshooting, see the following topics.

Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device

If you want to install a particular software build on the RealPresence Touch, you can perform a a factory
restore using a USB storage device. Do not power off the device during the factory restore process.

Polycom, Inc. 229

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device

Procedure
1. Copy a build package (.tgz file) to the root directory of a USB storage device.
2. Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
3. Insert the USB storage device into the side USB port of the device.
4. Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
5. Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
6. Wait for the RealPresence Touch device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
7. Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
When the process is complete, the device displays the splash screen and then the home screen.
Related Links
Troubleshooting on the RealPresence Touch Device on page 227
You might need to do some troubleshooting on your RealPresence Touch device. For information on
troubleshooting, see the following topics.

Test the Software Download URL

If your RealPresence Group Series system or Polycom touch device is not updating properly, and you
entered polycom as the Server Address, the system resolves downloads.polycom.com to an IP address.
The system then checks for a software update using http.

Procedure
1. Open a browser.
2. Try to access the appropriate URL for your system or device.

System or Device Test URL

Polycom Touch Control http://downloads.polycom.com/video/

venus_group_series/dists/venus/info.txt

RealPresence Touch http://downloads.polycom.com/video/rp_touch/

vega/info.txt

RealPresence Group Series http://downloads.polycom.com/video/group_series/

rseries/info.txt

3. If the computer returns platform, or apps and platform, you can reach the Polycom software
server from your location and the URL is working.

Polycom, Inc. 230

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control
Device
Topics:

• Positioning the Polycom Touch Control

• Set Up the Polycom Touch Control
• Enable the Polycom Touch Control
• Configuring the Software
• Powering On the Polycom Touch Control
• Power Off the Polycom Touch Control
• Wake the Polycom Touch Control
• Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control
• Pairing the Polycom Touch Control Device
• Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely
• Updating the Software
• Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device

The following topics describe how to set up, configure, install, and update the Polycom Touch Control
device.

Positioning the Polycom Touch Control

Before you use your touch device for the first time, ensure that it is placed properly in the meeting room.
RealPresence Group Series systems can be controlled by the Polycom Touch Control. When the
Polycom Touch Control is not paired with a RealPresence Group Series system, the device can be used
as a virtual remote control. To use the Polycom Touch Control as a virtual remote control, ensure that the
infrared (IR) transmitter on the front of the device is facing the system you want to control. Also, make
sure that the Polycom Touch Control is conveniently located for use during a meeting.

Set Up the Polycom Touch Control

The Polycom Touch Control allows you to control a RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. Ensure that the correct software is installed on the system that you want to control, and that you
have completed the setup wizard on the system.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the underside of the Polycom Touch Control.
3. If you intend to use the Polycom Touch Control to show content from a computer, connect the
USB cable to the underside of the Polycom Touch Control.

Polycom, Inc. 231

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

4. If you want to connect the stand, route the Ethernet and USB cables through the opening in the
stand.
Then attach the stand to the Polycom Touch Control by tightening the mounting screw with a
screwdriver.
5. Plug the Ethernet cable into the wall outlet:
• If your room provides Power Over Ethernet, you can connect the Ethernet cable directly to a
LAN outlet.
• If your room does not provide Power Over Ethernet, you must connect the Ethernet cable to
the power supply adapter. Then connect the power supply adapter to a LAN outlet and
power outlet.The Polycom Touch Control powers on and displays the language selection
screen.
6. Choose your language and follow the onscreen instructions to pair the Polycom Touch Control
with your system, or select Pair Later on the Pairing screen to skip pairing.
7. After the Polycom Touch Control connects to the network, enter the RealPresence Group Series
system IP address and touch Connect.
By default, the IP address of the system is displayed on the bottom of its Home screen. If the
system is configured to allow pairing and you enter the IP address for the system correctly, the
Touch Control displays a prompt for the system admin user ID and password.
When the Polycom Touch Control has paired and connected with the system, the Polycom Touch
Control displays a success message, and the menus on the system monitor become unavailable.
Related Links
Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 237
Enable the Polycom Touch Control on page 232
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control on page 236
You can power on the Polycom Touch Control. For details, see the following topic.

Enable the Polycom Touch Control

You must enable the Polycom Touch Control device on the system web interface before users can use
the device to control a RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2. Select the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box and click Save.
Your touch device is now enabled and you can pair it to a room system. Note that only one device can be
paired to a room system at a time.
Related Links
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control on page 231

Configuring the Software

Before you use the Polycom Touch Control, you must configure the LAN setting, and optionally, the
regional setting on your RealPresence Group Series system.

Polycom, Inc. 232

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

The Polycom Touch Control has separate Admin Settings that allow you to update its software and
configure LAN, regional, and security properties for the device.
Related Links
Configure Admin ID and Password on page 235
Configure Location and Time Settings on page 234
Configure LAN Properties on page 55

Configure LAN Settings

Before you can pair the Polycom Touch Control with the RealPresence Group Series system, you must
configure the LAN settings.

Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2. Touch the LAN Properties tab.
3. Configure the following IP Address (IPv4) settings.

Setting Description

Set IP Address Specifies how the Touch Control obtains an IP

address.
• Obtain IP address automatically—
Select if the Touch Control gets an IP
address from the DHCP server on the
LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if
the IP address is not automatically
assigned.

IP Address Displays the IP address currently assigned to the

Touch Control, if the Touch Control obtains its IP
address automatically.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter
the IP address here.

Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask currently assigned to the

Touch Control.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter
the subnet mask here.

Default Gateway Displays the gateway currently assigned to the

Touch Control.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter
the gateway IP address here.

4. Configure the following DNS settings.

Polycom, Inc. 233

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Setting Description

Domain Name Displays the domain name currently assigned to

the Touch Control.
If the Polycom Touch Control does not
automatically obtain a domain name, enter one
here.

DNS Servers Displays the DNS servers currently assigned to the

Touch Control.
If the Touch Control does not automatically obtain a
DNS server address, enter up to two DNS servers
here.
You can specify IPv4 DNS server addresses only
when the IPv4 address is entered manually. When
the IPv4 address is obtained automatically, the
DNS Server addresses are also obtained
automatically.

5. View the general settings.

Setting Description

Duplex Mode Displays the duplex mode.

LAN Speed Displays the LAN speed.

Configure Location and Time Settings

You can configure location settings on the Polycom Touch Control.

Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2. Touch the Location tab.
3. Select a language from the Language menu.
4. Configure the following settings under Date and Time.

Setting Description

Time Zone Specifies the time difference between GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time) and your location.

Polycom, Inc. 234

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Setting Description

Time Server Specifies connection to a time server for automatic

Touch Control time settings.
The date and time must be manually reset every
time the Touch Control restarts, in the following
cases:
• Time Server is set to Off.
• Time Server is set to Manual or Auto,
but the Touch Control cannot connect to
a time server successfully.

Time Server Address Specifies the address of the time server to use
when Time Server is set to Manual.

Time Format Specifies your format preference for the time

display and lets you enter your local time.

Related Links
Configure Admin ID and Password on page 235
Configuring the Software on page 232

Configure Admin ID and Password

You can set an admin ID and password, which allows you to limit access to the Polycom Touch Control
Administration settings.

Procedure
1. From the Home screen touch Administration.
An admin ID and password might be configured for the Touch Control Administration settings. The
default ID is admin and the default password is 456.
2. Touch the Security tab.
3. Set the following security settings.

Setting Description

Admin ID Specifies the ID for the administrator account. The

default Admin ID is admin.

Admin Password Specifies the password for administrator access

when logging in to the Polycom Touch Control. The
default password is 456.
When this password is set, you must enter it to
configure the Polycom Touch Control Admin
Settings. The password must not contain spaces.

Related Links
Configure Location and Time Settings on page 234
Configuring the Software on page 232

Polycom, Inc. 235

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Powering On the Polycom Touch Control

You can power on the Polycom Touch Control. For details, see the following topic.
Related Links
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control on page 231

Power Off the Polycom Touch Control

You can power off the Polycom Touch Control.

Procedure
1. From the Touch Control Home screen, touch User Settings.
2. Scroll to the Power section.
3. Select Touch Control Power.
4. In the menu that appears, select Power Off the Touch Control.
If you choose to power off the Polycom Touch Control, you must disconnect and reconnect the
LAN cable to power it on again.

Wake the Polycom Touch Control

The Polycom Touch Control goes to sleep after two minutes of inactivity.

Procedure
» Touch anywhere on the screen to wake the device.

Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control

The Polycom Touch Control device displays the following pairing states:

State Description

Paired The Polycom Touch Control is successfully connected

to the RealPresence Group Series system through the
pairing process, including providing the system admin
ID and password. A single Polycom Touch Control can
be paired to multiple RealPresence Group Series
systems and, once paired, the Polycom Touch Control
can switch between systems without needing to enter
admin IDs or passwords.

Unpaired The ability to pair or connect to the Polycom Touch

Control is disabled on the RealPresence Group Series
system. The only way to unpair is to follow the
procedure described in the following topic.

Polycom, Inc. 236

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

State Description

Connected A Polycom Touch Control has an active pairing

connection to the RealPresence Group Series system.
A single Polycom Touch Control can be paired to
multiple systems, but can be connected to only one
RealPresence Group Series system at a time.

Disconnected The Polycom Touch Control does not have an active

pairing connection to a system, but is still paired if at
least one system that has previously paired with the
Polycom Touch Control has not unpaired.

Related Links
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 238

Pairing the Polycom Touch Control Device

When you configure the Polycom Touch Control to pair with a particular RealPresence Group Series
system, the Polycom Touch Control makes an IP connection to the system. If the connection is lost for
any reason, the Polycom Touch Control automatically attempts to restore the connection.
You can pair the Polycom Touch Control and system during initial Polycom Touch Control setup.
After you have completed Polycom Touch Control setup, you can pair to a different system using
Polycom Touch Control settings and unpair using the system web interface.
When you use a Polycom Touch Control with the system, you must be sure to update the RealPresence
Group Series software before you update the Polycom Touch Control software. Only Polycom Touch
Control software versions 4.x or later work with RealPresence Group Series systems.

Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device

You can pair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group Series system using the system
web interface. If you do not want to pair during setup, select Pair Later. If you choose to skip pairing,
many Polycom Touch Control features are not available.

Procedure
» After selecting a language, enter the RealPresence Group Series system IP address in the
Polycom Touch Control interface and touch Connect.
Related Links
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control on page 231

Pair to a System After Setup

You can use the Polycom Touch Control to pair with a RealPresence Group Series system after running
the setup wizard.

Procedure
1. On the Polycom Touch Control Home screen, touch System.

Polycom, Inc. 237

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

2. Scroll to Device Connection Status and then touch the Info icon next to the system name.
3. Touch View Pairing Settings.
4. Change the system IP address and touch Connect.

Unpair the Polycom Touch Control Device

You can unpair the Polycom Touch Control and RealPresence Group Series system using the system
web interface.

Procedure
1. On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Control.
2. Disable Allow Pairing or select Forget this Device.
The RealPresence Group Series system cannot pair with any Polycom Touch Control while Allow
Pairing is disabled.
Related Links
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control on page 236

Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely

You can remotely manage certain features of your Polycom Touch Control from within your enterprise
environment.
This list describes the features you can manage remotely:
• Download Logs: Downloads the Polycom Touch Control logs to the location specified in the
device.
• Network Settings: Specifies whether the system acquires an IP address automatically or manually.
With the manual method, the other settings that are available from the Polycom Touch Control
become available on the web.
• Pair: Pairs and unpairs from RealPresence Group Series systems. Before you can connect to or
pair with a device, you must know the device's IP Address and the User Name and Password used
to connect.
• Security: Changes the admin ID and password of the Polycom Touch Control.
• Software Updates: Updates the Polycom Touch Control software. You can update from the default
Polycom server or your own server by entering the appropriate IP address. You can configure the
updates to occur automatically or manually.
• View Polycom Touch Control Screens: Shows the screen currently being displayed on the
Polycom Touch Control. You can click Refresh at any time to see if the screen has changed.

Open the Remote Management Window

You can open the Polycom Touch Control in a browser window to perform remote management functions.

Procedure
1. In one of the supported web browser windows, enter the IP address of the Polycom Touch
Control.
2. In the login window, enter the ID and Password you use to access the administrative features of
the Polycom Touch Control.

Polycom, Inc. 238

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

You can access the remote management features by using the Dashboard or the Navigation
menu. You return to the Dashboard by clicking the Home icon.

Transfer Polycom Touch Control Logs to a USB Storage Device

You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can transfer the Touch Control logs to an
external USB storage device.

Procedure
1. Ensure that a USB device is connected to the USB port on the right side of the Polycom Touch
Control.
2. From the Home screen touch Administration.
An admin ID and password might be configured for the Touch Control Administration settings. The
default ID is admin and the default password is 456.
3. Under Security, select Transfer Touch Control Logs to USB Device.
A popup message displays when the log transfer completes successfully.

Updating the Software

The Polycom Touch Control must run a software version that is compatible with the software version on
the RealPresence Group Series system.
It is recommended that you install the latest compatible Polycom Touch Control software for any given
RealPresence Group Series system software version. When checking for software updates, the Polycom
Touch Control first checks for the presence of a USB storage device. The system then lists the available
Polycom Touch Control updates.
For additional details on software compatibility, refer to the appropriate version of the release notes
available at support.polycom.com.
If you need to update a RealPresence Group Series system at the same time you update the Polycom
Touch Control, update the system software first.
Update files for the Polycom Touch Control are located on the Polycom support server. You can store the
update files on a USB device, RealPresence Resource Manager system, or on your own web server.
No license number or key is needed to update the Polycom Touch Control. You can configure the device
to get software updates using any of the following methods:
• A Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system
• A server on your network
• The online software server hosted by Polycom
• A USB 2.0 storage device in FAT32 format that you connect to the side of the device

Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site for the Polycom Touch
Control
You can post software to your web server and then configure the Polycom Touch Control to receive
updates.

Polycom, Inc. 239

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Procedure
1. Make sure that your server enables clients to download files with the following extensions or with
no extension:
• .tar.gz
• .txt
• .sig
• .plcm
2. Define a URL on your server that the Polycom Touch Control can use for software updates, and
create a corresponding root directory to it.
3. Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group Series system
that you use with the Polycom Touch Control.
4. Save and extract the Polycom Touch Control Panel software package (.zip file) and the Polycom
Touch Control Operating System software package (.zip file) from the Polycom website to the root
directory of the web server.
5. Open a command line interface and enter the command appropriate for your operating system to
generate an info.txt file that lists the folders with updates:
• Unix or Linux: <rootdir>/dists/venus/geninfo.sh
• Windows: <rootdir>\dists\venus\geninfo.sh

Update Software Manually from the Web Interface

You can manually update Polycom Touch Control software from the Polycom server or your own server.
Polycom recommends that you set the maintenance window times so that the Polycom Touch Control is
updated about an hour after the last RealPresence Group Series system update has completed.

Procedure
1. Open a supported browser.
2. Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the Polycom Touch Control using the format
http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4. If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The default password is 456.
The first time you open the system web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name
and password after you select any of the interface options.
5. On the Home Page, under Touch Control details, click Software Update.
6. Enter the server address for the update, then click Save.
The default server address, polycom, is the address for the Polycom public soft-update repository
and has the latest released software version available.
7. Click Check for Software Updates to find the latest build on the server.
The Polycom Touch Control Operating system and panel software versions are listed.
8. Click Download and Install Software.
Download progress is displayed during installation.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.

Polycom, Inc. 240

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Update Software Automatically in the Web Interface

You can automatically update the Polycom Touch Control software from the Polycom server or your own
server. The Polycom Touch Control automatically performs a software update when one of the following
conditions are true:
• Auto Update is enabled (with Download and Install Software selected), and the scheduled time
occurs for a software update. (Example: Scheduled time is set for 3 p.m., so the software update
begins at 3 p.m.)
• Auto Update is enabled (with Download and Install Software selected), and the paired Group
Series system finishes its software update (which triggers a Polycom Touch Control software
update).

Procedure
1. Open a supported browser.
For a list of supported browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release
Notes .
2. Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Group Series system using
the format http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4. If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The first time you open the system web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name
and password after you select any of the interface options.
5. On the Home Page, under Touch Control details, click Update Software.
6. Enter the server address for the update, then click Save.
The default server address, polycom, is the address for the Polycom public soft-update
repository and has the latest released software version available.
7. To make automatic updates and update your software to the latest build on the server, select
Automatically Check for Software Updates.
8. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
9. Specify the automatic update options:
a) Touch Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which
the Polycom Touch Control checks for updates.
b) Touch Duration to select the length of the time within which the Polycom Touch Control
can check for updates.
After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the Polycom Touch Control
calculates a random time within the defined update window at which to check for updates.
It then checks for updates at this time on a daily basis as long as the Start Time and
Duration values do not change. If the Start Time or Duration values change, a new random
time within the new time window is calculated.
c) Touch Action for Available Software Updates and select whether to be notified of
available status updates only or to download and install software when updates are
available.
10. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.

Polycom, Inc. 241

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Update Software Automatically in the Local Interface

Using the Polycom Touch Control interface, you can automatically update the software from the Polycom
server or your own server.
Polycom recommends that you set the maintenance window times so that the Polycom Touch Control is
updated about an hour after the last RealPresence Group Series system update has completed.

Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration and then touch Updates.
2. Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the Polycom Touch Control
software in the Server Address field.
To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
3. Enable Automatically Check for Software Updates.
4. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
5. Specify the automatic update options:
a) Touch Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which
the Polycom Touch Control checks for updates.
b) Touch Duration to select the length of the time within which the Polycom Touch Control
can check for updates.
After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the Polycom Touch Control
calculates a random time within the defined update window at which to check for updates.
It then checks for updates at this time on a daily basis as long as the Start Time and
Duration values do not change. If the Start Time or Duration values change, a new
random time within the new time window is calculated.
c) Touch Action for Available Software Updates and select whether to be notified of
available status updates only or to download and install software when updates are
available.

Update Software Manually in the Local Interface

You can manually update the Polycom Touch Control Software using the Polycom Touch Control
interface.

Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration and then touch Updates.
2. Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the Polycom Touch Control
software in the in the Server Address field.
To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
3. Touch Check for Software Updates.
4. Select only the updates that you want to install.
5. Touch Download and Install Software.
a) When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.

Polycom, Inc. 242

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Update Software from a USB Storage Device

You can use a USB storage device to either update or downgrade Polycom Touch Control software
versions.
The following device attributes ensure that your USB device successfully supports the procedure:
• Use USB 2.0 devices (some USB 3.0 devices might not work with the RealPresence Group Series
systems).
• Format the primary partition as FAT32.
• Put all software update data in the root directory of the primary partition.

Procedure
1. Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2. Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3. Navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group Series system that you use with the Polycom
Touch Control.
4. Download the latest version of these .zip distribution package files to your hard drive:
• Polycom Touch Control Operating System
• Polycom Touch Control Panel Software
5. Extract all contents of the files you downloaded to the root directory of the USB device.
When extracting multiple distribution packages, a pop up message might appear asking if you
want to overwrite certain files that already exist. Select Yes to All.
6. Connect the USB device to the side of the Polycom Touch Control.
7. From the Home screen, touch Administration and then touch Updates.
8. Touch Check for Software Updates.
9. Select only the updates that you want to install.
10. Touch Download and Install Software.
11. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
Follow the on-screen instructions of the setup wizard to complete the update. The setup wizard is
available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the
factory restore button.

Set a Software Version as Current for the Polycom Touch Control

You can use the setcurrel command to set a specific version of Polycom Touch Control software as
the current release on your server.

Procedure
1. Run the appropriate setcurrel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to
set as the current release.

Software Type Unix or Linux Command Windows Command

Panel <root dir>/dists/venus/apps/ <root dir>\dists\venus\apps

setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX \setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX

Polycom, Inc. 243

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

Software Type Unix or Linux Command Windows Command

Operating system <root dir>/dists/venus/platform/ <root dir>\dists\venus\platform

setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX \setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX

2. Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.

Remove a Polycom Touch Control Software Version

Use the removerel command to remove a specific version of a Polycom Touch Control software release
from your server.

Procedure
1. Run the removerel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set remove
from the server.

Software Type Unix or Linux Command Windows Command

Panel <root dir>/dists/venus/apps/ <root dir>\dists\venus\apps

removerel.sh X.X.X-XXX \removerel.bat X.X.X-XXX

Operating system <root dir>/dists/venus/platform/ <root dir>\dists\venus\platform

removerel.sh X.X.X-XXX \removerel.bat X.X.X-XXX

2. Follow the onscreen instructions for removing the software version.

Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control

Device
For information on troubleshooting the Polycom Touch Control, see the following related topics.
• View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom Touch Control
• View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote Control
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the Polycom Touch Control on page 245
View System Details on page 244

Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light

When the Polycom Touch Control is on, the Home button is lit.

View System Details

You might need to view certain details to do tasks, such as pairing, or to perform troubleshooting tests to
provide information for your own testing on your RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. On the Home screen, touch System.

Polycom, Inc. 244

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

The following Touch Control information displays:

• Model
• Hardware Version
• Serial Number
• Panel Software
• Operating System Version
• Kernel Version
• MAC Address
• IP Address
2. To view the paired system details, touch the <Product Name > System tab.
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the Polycom Touch Control on page 245
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 244

Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the

Polycom Touch Control
If you want to install a particular software build on the Polycom Touch Control, you can perform a a
factory restore using a USB storage device. Do not power off the device during the factory restore
process.

Procedure
1. Copy a build package (.tar file) to the root directory of a USB storage device.
2. Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
3. Insert the USB storage device into the side USB port of the device.
4. Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
5. Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
6. Wait for the Polycom Touch Control device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called
the OOB, out-of-box wizard).
7. Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
If the device requires login information, the default for the admin ID is admin and for the password
is 456.
During the factory restore process, the default platform and applications are reinstalled. Do not
power off the device during the factory restore process. The device displays a success message
when the process is complete.
Related Links
View System Details on page 244
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 244

Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control

If the RealPresence Group Series system is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the
Administration password, you can use the factory restore button to reset the system.
The factory restore operation completely erases the system's flash memory and reinstalls the software
version and default configuration stored in its factory partition.

Polycom, Inc. 245

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device

The following items are not saved:

• Software updates
• All system settings including option keys and the remote control channel ID
• Directory entries
• CDR data
During a factory restore on the system or from a USB device, the LED indicator on the front of the system
blinks blue and amber.

Polycom, Inc. 246

System Maintenance
Topics:

• Managing System Profiles

• Restoring and Resetting a System
• System Log Files
• Retrieving Log Files
• Upgrading System Software
• Installing an Older Software Version

The following topics describe how to set up a system profile, perform a factory restore, and upgrade the
system software.

Managing System Profiles

If you manage systems that support multiple applications, you can use profiles to change RealPresence
Group Series system settings. You can store a system profile on a computer as a .profile file using
the system web interface. The number of profiles you can save is unlimited. Polycom recommends only
using profiles as a way to back up system settings. Attempting to edit a stored profile or upload a stored
profile from one system to a different system can result in instability or unexpected results.
The following settings are included in a profile:
• Home screen settings
• User access levels
• Icon selections
• Option keys
• System behaviors
Passwords are not included when you store a profile.

Store a Setting Profile

You can store the current setting profile on your computer.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Services > Profile Center.
2. Click Download next to Current Settings Profile to download the profile file from the
RealPresence Group Series system.
3. Save the file to a location on your computer.

Upload a Profile
You can upload a setting profile from your computer.

Polycom, Inc. 247

System Maintenance

Procedure
1. Reset the RealPresence Group Series system to restore default settings.
2. In your web browser address line, enter the system's IP address.
3. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Services > Profile Center.
4. Next to Upload Settings Profile, click Browse and browse to the location of the profile .csv file on
your computer.
5. Click Open to upload the .csv file to your system.

Perform a Factory Restore of a System

The restore button pinhole is on the bottom of the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems, as
shown in the following figure.

The restore button pinhole is on the front of the RealPresence Group 700 system, as shown in the
following figure.

Procedure
1. Power off the system.
2. Straighten a paper clip and insert it into the pinhole.
3. Using the paper clip, press and hold the restore button.
4. While continuing to hold the restore button, press the power button once.
5. Keep holding the restore button for 10 more seconds, then release it.

Polycom, Inc. 248

System Maintenance

During the factory restore process, the system displays the Polycom startup screen and the usual
software update screens on HDMI monitors. Other types of monitors will be blank. Do not power off the
system during the factory restore process. The system restarts automatically when the process is
complete.

Perform a System Reset

You can reset a system in the RealPresence Group Series system local interface.

Procedure
1. Go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System.
2. Enable Delete System Settings.
3. Click Reset System.
After about 15 seconds, the system restarts and displays the setup wizard.

Perform a Factory Restore to Install a Specific Software Version

If you start a factory restore while a USB storage device is connected, the RealPresence Group Series
system restores from the USB storage device instead of the system's factory partition.
For about the first five minutes of the factory restore process, the system is erasing data on the SD card
and extracting data from the USB storage device. This process runs from a special memory partition and
graphics are not available, so your monitor will be blank.
If you prefer, you can have the system prepare the SD card by rewriting the data with zeroes and
reformatting the card, thereby eliminating any traces of old data. Be aware that this step adds about 20
minutes to the beginning of the factory restore process, when all you will see is a blank screen. You will
notice, however, that the LED indicator shows a fast blink of blue and amber lights during this process.
The lights blink normally during the rest of the restore process.

Procedure
1. Copy the build package (.tar file) and the sw_keys.txt file to the root directory of a USB storage
device.
2. (Optional) Create a text file named zeroize.txt on the root directory of the USB storage device,
then edit the file by entering the word TRUE in all capital letters.
If the zeroize.txt file contains the word FALSE, or if the file is not in the root directory of the USB
storage device, the system uses the standard method of erasing data from the SD card.
3. Power off the system by pressing the power button on your system. Do not unplug the power cord.
4. Plug the USB storage device into your system.
5. While holding the restore button, press the power button once.
6. Keep holding the restore button for 10 more seconds, then release it.
The software version of the update file on the USB storage device is displayed in the system web
interface.
7. Click Start Update to begin the factory restore.
After the SD card is prepared, the system displays the Polycom startup screen and the usual
software update screens on HDMI monitors. Other types of monitors are blank. Do not power off
the system during the factory restore process. The system restarts automatically when the process
is complete.

Polycom, Inc. 249

System Maintenance

Delete Data and System Files

You can remove sensitive data and configuration information from the RealPresence Group Series
system for security purposes.

Procedure
1. Power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, or 700 system by holding down the Power
sensor for 3 to 5 seconds.
2. Unplug all network connections.
3. Perform a factory restore.
4. Wait for the system to start up and display the setup wizard.
5. Power off the system.

Restoring and Resetting a System

If the RealPresence Group Series system is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Admin
Room Password, you can reset the system with Delete System Settings enabled. This procedure
effectively refreshes your system, deleting all settings except for the following:
• Current software version
• Remote control channel ID setting
• Directory entries
• CDR data and logs
Related Links
General Troubleshooting on page 261

System Log Files

System log files are essential when troubleshooting RealPresence Group Series system issues. System
log files contain information about system activities and the system configuration profile. After setting up
system logging, you can retrieve a system log file.
Related Links
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging on page 252
View Log File Status on page 250
Retrieving Log Files on page 254

View Log File Status

You can view the log file status for your RealPresence Group Series system in the system web interface.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status and select the More
Info link for Log Threshold.
Related Links
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging on page 252

Polycom, Inc. 250

System Maintenance

Retrieving Log Files on page 254

System Log Files on page 250

Configure System Log Management

When the RealPresence Group Series system log fills up past the threshold, the following actions are
triggered:
• Transfers the log to the USB device if Transfer Frequency is set to “Auto at Threshold”
• Creates a log entry indicating that the threshold has been reached
• Displays an alert on the home screen
• Displays an indicator on the System Status screen

Note: When the Log Threshold system status indicator is red, automatic log transfers
cannot be completed and data might be lost. You must manually transfer the logs to
a USB storage device.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Log Management.
2. Configure these settings and click Save.

Setting Description

Current Percent Filled Displays how full the log file is, as a percentage of
the total size.

Percent Filled Threshold Specifies a threshold for the percent filled value.
Reaching the threshold triggers an alarm, creates a
log entry, and transfers the log if Transfer
Frequency is set to Auto at Threshold. Off
disables logging threshold notifications.

Folder Name Specifies the name to give the folder for log
transfers. Select one of the following:
• System Name and Timestamp—
Folder name is the system name and
the timestamp of the log transfer, in the
date and time format specified on the
Location screen. For example, if the
system name is “Marketing”, the folder
name could be
marketing_MMddyyyymmssSSS.
• Timestamp—Folder name is the
timestamp of the log transfer, in the date
and time format specified on the
Location screen, for example
yyyyMMddhhmmssSSS.
• Custom—Elective folder name for
manual log transfers.

Polycom, Inc. 251

System Maintenance

Setting Description

Storage Type Specifies the type of storage device used for log file
transfers.

Transfer Frequency Specifies when the logs are transferred:

Manual—The transfer starts when you click the
Start Log Transfer button, which is visible only on
the local interface. If the log fills before being
transferred, new events overwrite the oldest
events.
Auto at Threshold—The transfer starts
automatically when the Percent Filled Threshold is
reached.

Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging

The RealPresence Group Series system log captures devices and server events in a consistent manner.
You determine the log level, whether to enable remote logging, and whether to log additional SIP or H.
323 details.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Log Settings.
2. Configure these settings.

Setting Description

Log Level Sets the minimum log level of messages stored in

the room system's flash memory.
DEBUG logs all messages, and WARNING logs the
fewest number of messages.
Polycom recommends leaving this setting at the
default value of DEBUG.
When Enable Remote Logging is on, the log level
is the same for both remote and local logging.

Enable Remote Logging Specifies whether remote logging is enabled.

Enabling this setting causes the room system to
send each log message to the specified server in
addition to logging it locally.
The system immediately begins forwarding its log
messages after you click Save.
Remote logging encryption is supported when TLS
transport is the transport protocol. If you are using
UDP or TCP transport, Polycom recommends
remote logging only on secure, local networks.

Polycom, Inc. 252

System Maintenance

Setting Description

Remote Log Server Address Specifies the server address and port. If the port is
not specified, a default destination port is used. The
default port is determined by the configured
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol setting
as follows:
• UDP: 514
• TCP: 601
• TLS: 6514
The address and port can be specified in the
following formats:
• IPv4 Address (Example:
10.11.12.13:<port>, where <port> is the
elective destination port number in the
range 1.65535)
• IPv6 Address (Example: [2001::abcd:
1234]:<port>, where <port> is the
elective destination port number in the
range 1.65535)
• FQDN (Example:
logserverhost.company.com:<port>,
where <port> is the elective destination
port number in the range 1.65535)

Remote Log Server Transport Protocol Specifies the type of transport protocol:
• UDP
• TCP
• TLS (secure connection)

Enable H.323 Trace Logs additional H.323 connectivity information.

Enable SIP Trace Logs additional SIP connectivity information.

Send Diagnostics and Usage Data to Polycom Sends crash log server information to Polycom to
help us analyze and improve the product. Click the
Polycom Improvement Program button to view
information about how your data is used.

Related Links
View Log File Status on page 250
Retrieving Log Files on page 254
System Log Files on page 250

Polycom, Inc. 253

System Maintenance

Retrieving Log Files

You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can generate log files for the RealPresence
Group Series systems and touch devices. The following related topics explain how to retrieve those log
files.
Related Links
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging on page 252
View Log File Status on page 250
System Log Files on page 250
Download System Log Files on page 254
Transfer System Log Files on page 254

Download System Log Files

You can use the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to get system logs. The date and time
of system log entries are shown in GMT.

Procedure
1. Go to Diagnostics > System > Download Logs.
2. Click Download system log and then specify a location on your computer to save the file.
In the dialog boxes that appear, designate where you want the file to be saved.
Related Links
Transfer System Log Files on page 254
Retrieving Log Files on page 254

Transfer System Log Files

You can transfer a system log file in the RealPresence Group Series system local interface.

Procedure
1. Go to > Settings > Administration > Security > Log Management.
2. Click Transfer System Log to USB Device.
3. The system saves a file in the USB storage device named according to the settings in the system
web interface.
4. Wait until the system displays a message that the log transfer has completed successfully before
you remove the storage device.
Related Links
Download System Log Files on page 254
Retrieving Log Files on page 254

SNMP Condition Reports

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) versions 1, 2c, and 3 are supported on RealPresence
Group Series systems. A system sends SNMP reports to indicate conditions, including the following:
• All alert conditions found on the system alert screen

Polycom, Inc. 254

System Maintenance

• Details of jitter, latency, and packet loss

• Low battery power is detected in the remote control
• A system powers on
• Administrator logon is successful or unsuccessful
• A call fails for a reason other than a busy line
• A user requests help
• A telephone or video call connects or disconnects
SNMP features specific to version 3 include the following:
• Allows for secured connectivity between the console and the SNMP agent
• Supports both IPv4 and IPv6 networks
• Logs all configuration change events
• Supports a user-based security model
• Supports trap destination addresses

Configure SNMP Management

You can configure SNMP Management to give RealPresence Group Series system administrators access
to manage the system remotely.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP.
2. Configure these settings on the SNMP screen, then click Save.

Setting Description

Enable SNMP Allows administrators to manage the system

remotely using SNMP.

Enable Legacy Notifications Supports sending notifications that are compatible

with the legacy MIB.

Enable New Notifications Supports sending notifications that are compatible

with the new MIB.

Version1 Enables the use of the SNMPv1 protocol.

Version2c Enables the use of the SNMPv2c protocol.

Version3 Enables the use of the SNMPv3 protocol.

You must select this setting to use the subsequent
settings that apply only to SNMPv3.

Polycom, Inc. 255

System Maintenance

Setting Description

Read-Only Community Specifies the SNMP management community in

which you want to enable this system. The default
community is public.
Note: Polycom does not support SNMP write
operations for configuration and provisioning; the
read-only community string is used for both read
operations and outgoing SNMP traps.

Contact Name Specifies the name of the person responsible for

remote management of this system.

Location Name Specifies the location of the system.

System Description Specifies the type of video conferencing device.

User Name Specifies the SNMPv3 User Security Model (USM)

account name that will be used for SNMPv3
message transactions. The maximum length is 64
characters.

Authentication Algorithm Specifies the type of SNMPv3 authentication

algorithm used:
• SHA
• MD5

Authentication Password Specifies the SNMPv3 authentication password.

The maximum length is 48 characters.

Privacy Algorithm Specifies the type of SNMPv3 cryptography privacy

algorithm used:
• CFB-AES128
• CBC-DES

Privacy Password Specifies the SNMPv3 privacy (encryption)

password. The maximum length is 48 characters.

Engine ID Specifies the unique ID of the SNMPv3 engine.

This setting might be needed for matching the
configuration of an SNMP console application. The
Engine ID is automatically generated, but you can
create your own ID, as long as it's between 10 and
32 hexadecimal digits. Each group of 2 hex digits
can be separated by a colon character (:) to form a
full 8-bit value. A single hex digit delimited on each
side with a colon is equivalent to the same hex digit
with a leading zero (therefore, :F: is equivalent to :
0f:).
The ID cannot be all zeros or all Fs.

Polycom, Inc. 256

System Maintenance

Setting Description

Listening Port Specifies the port number SNMP uses to listen for
messages. The default listening port is 161.

Transport Protocol Specifies the transport protocol used:

• TCP
• UDP

Destination Address1 Specifies the IP addresses of the computers you

intend to use as your network management station
Destination Address2
and to which SNMP traps will be sent.
Destination Address3
Each address row has four settings:
1 IP Address (accepts IPv4 and IPv6 addresses,
host names, and FQDNs)
2 Message Type (Trap, Inform)
3 SNMP protocol version (v1, v2c, v3)
4 Port (the default is 162)
Disabling the Port setting disables the
corresponding Destination Address.

Download MIBs for SNMP Management

To allow your SNMP management console application to resolve SNMP traps and display human
readable text descriptions for those traps, you need to install Polycom MIBs (Management Information
Base) on the computer you intend to use as your network management station. The MIBs are available
for download from the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP.
2. Click the desired link:
• Download Legacy MIB
• Download MIB

Upgrading System Software

Polycom recommends that you upgrade your software to the latest available release. You can easily
update your RealPresence Group Series system software and system options by performing a few tasks
outlined here.
Be aware of these points when performing system upgrades:
• If you did not purchase additional system options, you need only to provide a serial number to
activate the software. You do not need an option key.
• If you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom dealer to get an upgrade
key.

Polycom, Inc. 257

System Maintenance

• If you are running a major or minor software version (x.y), you can update to a maintenance version
(x.y.z) without an upgrade key. For example, you do not need a software key to update from version
4.3.0 to 4.3.1 or from 4.1.0 to 4.1.5.
• If you are running a major software version and the software has had a major upgrade, you need a
software update key. For example, you need a key to update from version 4.0.0 to 5.0.0.
• If you are running a major or minor software version and the software has had a minor upgrade
within the same major version (x.y1 to x.y2), you need a software update key to get the new
software. For example, you need a key to update from version 4.2.0 to 4.3.0.
• For DoD Unified Capabilities Approved Product List (UC APL) software releases, go to
www.polycom.com/solutions/industry/federal_government/certification_accreditation.html.

Preparing to Upgrade
Ensure you have the required information ready before you begin installing and activating software
updates or options:
• License numbers and system serial numbers.
• Software or option keys. Obtain these by logging in to Polycom Support and requesting them from
the Activation/Upgrade link. If you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom
dealer to get a key.
RealPresence Group Series systems perform several internal restarts while running software updates.
Each restart takes about 2 or 3 minutes and improves the reliability of the update process by freeing up
memory. If you are updating a system using a web browser, the internal restart is not visible from the
system web interface.
You can downgrade software to an earlier version at any time.
You need an account on Polycom Support before you begin. Be sure to set up an account if you don't
already have one.
Related Links
Installing an Older Software Version on page 259
Obtain Software or System Option Keys on page 41

System Software Updates

You can configure your RealPresence Group Series system to get software updates using any of the
following methods:
• A Polycom® Resource Manager system
• A server on your network
• The online software server hosted by Polycom
• Distribution files uploaded from your computer using a system web interface to access the system
• A USB 2.0 storage device that you connect to the system
If you use your system within a Department of Defense (DoD) environment, contact your Information
Assurance Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB device with your system.
For additional details on system hardware and software compatibility, see the product release notes
available at Polycom Support.

Polycom, Inc. 258

System Maintenance

Dynamic System Software Updates

You can use a Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system to update multiple RealPresence
Group Series systems after you complete the configuration steps.
For more information about updating system software in dynamic mode, setting an automatic software
update policy, and testing a trial version software update package, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Resource Manager System Operations Guide available at Polycom Support.

Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site

You can post software to your web server and then configure the RealPresence Touch device to receive
updates.

Procedure

1. Make sure that your server enables clients to download files with the following extensions or with
no extension:
• .tar.gz
• .txt
• .sig
• .plcm
2. Define a URL on your server that the RealPresence Touch can use for software updates, and
create a corresponding root directory to it.
3. Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the system that you use with the
RealPresence Touch.
4. Save and extract the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar file) from the
Polycom website to the root directory of the web server.

Installing an Older Software Version

When your RealPresence Group Series system is provisioned with a provisioning server, such as
Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager, the system automatically detects software on the
provisioning sever and downgrades to the software version on the provisioning server.
If your system is not provisioned, you can put the software package on a USB device to downgrade the
system to an earlier version.
Related Links
Preparing to Upgrade on page 258
Update System Software from a USB Storage Device

Determine the Software Version

Before you downgrade RealPresence Group Series system software, Polycom recommends that you
check the current system software version you are running.

Polycom, Inc. 259

System Maintenance

Procedure
» In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail or
click the System link in the system web interface.

Delete System Settings

When you want to reinstall an older version of software with a USB device after upgrading to a later
version, Polycom recommends first deleting your RealPresence Group Series system settings.

Procedure
» In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System and
select Delete System Settings.

Downgrading Tips
Polycom recommends you review the following tips before downgrading your RealPresence Group Series
system software:
• When you use your system within a DoD environment, be sure to contact your Information
Assurance Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB device with your system.
• Before downgrading, use the release notes to verify the interoperability of the camera, peripheral,
hardware, and software versions you plan to install.
• When you downgrade the system software, the Polycom EagleEye Producer and the Polycom
EagleEye Director are automatically downgraded to a compatible version.
• When you downgrade the system software, the Polycom RealPresence Touch software is
automatically downloaded to a compatible version after being paired. However, the RealPresence
Touch platform version 2.0 might not automatically downgrade to version 1.0. In this case, to
manually downgrade from version 2.0 to 1.0, you must use a USB storage device or initiate a
downgrade from a server repository that includes version 1.0.
• You must downgrade Polycom Touch Control software with a USB storage device.
• Because of changes in software functionality and the user interface, some settings might be lost
when you upgrade or downgrade. Polycom recommends that you store your system settings using
profiles and download your system directory before updating your system software. Do not
manually edit locally saved profile and directory files.

Polycom, Inc. 260

Troubleshooting
Topics:

• General Troubleshooting
• View Remote Sessions on the System
• Placing a Test Call
• Audio and Video Tests
• System Diagnostics
• Viewing System Details on the Local Interface
• Provisioning Service Registration Failure
• Call Detail Report (CDR)
• Knowledge Base
• Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support
• Contacting Technical Support

To learn more about troubleshooting your system or device, refer to the following topics.

General Troubleshooting
The following table provides general troubleshooting information, including symptoms, problems and
possible solutions for your RealPresence Group Series system.

Symptom Problem Solution

The system does not respond to the The remote control battery is not Charge the remote control battery.
remote control. charged.

The room lights operate in the 38 Turn off the room lights and try the
Kz range and interfere with the remote control again.
remote control signals.

A touch control device, such as the Only one device can be paired at a
RealPresence Touch, might be time. To use the remote control,
paired to the room system. unpair the touch control device.

Picture is blank on the main The room system is sleeping. This Pick up the remote control to wake
monitor. is normal after a period of inactivity. up the system.

Polycom, Inc. 261

Troubleshooting

Symptom Problem Solution

The monitor remains blank after The monitor is powered off. Power on the monitor.
you pick up the remote control.
The monitor's power cord is not Connect the monitor's power cord
plugged in. and the power on the monitor.

The monitor is not correctly Verify that the monitor is connected

connected to the room system. correctly according to the set up
sheet that you received with the
system.

When using two monitors, the The room system is not configured In the system web interface, go to
second monitor is blank. for more than one monitor. Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Monitors and configure the second
monitor to Auto or Manual.
Configure the other Monitor 2
settings.

You lost the administration You cannot access the Refer to the factory restore topics to
password for your system or administration settings without a learn how to reset your system.
device. valid password.

The system is experiencing video You have not configured the Refer to the following Lost Packet
issues during calls, such as packet Network Quality settings in the Recovery topic link.
loss. system web interface.

Related Links
Restoring and Resetting a System on page 250
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings on page 74

View Remote Sessions on the System

You can view a list of remote sessions that are connected to the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > Sessions.
2. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time
in Call.
3. Configure these settings.

Placing a Test Call

Polycom support is available to assist you when you encounter difficulties. First though, If you are having
problems making a call, try the troubleshooting tips and then call our test numbers. When you finish
configuring the RealPresence Group Series system, you can call a Polycom video site to test your setup.
You can find a list of worldwide numbers that you can use to test your system at www.polycom.com/
videotest.

Polycom, Inc. 262

Troubleshooting

When placing test calls, try these ideas:

• Make sure the number you dialed is correct, then try the call again. For example, you might need to
dial 9 for an outside line or include a long distance access or country code.
• To find out if the problem exists in your system, ask the person you were trying to reach to call you
instead.
• Find out if the system you are calling is powered on and is functioning properly.
• If you can make calls but not receive them, make sure that your system is configured with the
correct number.

RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights

Indicator lights and power sensors display when the system or device is powered on. The following figure
shows the location of the power sensor and indicator light on the front of the RealPresence Group 300,
310, and 500 system.

Ref. Number Description

1 LED indicator light

2 Power sensor

The following figure identifies the features on the front of the RealPresence Group 700 system.

Polycom, Inc. 263

Troubleshooting

Ref. Number Description

1 LED indicator light

2 Power sensor

3 Status display area

4 USB 2.0 port

5 Restore button

Use the USB port for any USB 2.0 device. If your RealPresence Group 700 system operates with the
Maximum Security Profile, the status display area does not display the software version or IP address.

RealPresence Group 700 Indicator Lights

Brief status and diagnostic messages are displayed in the status display area of the RealPresence Group
700 system. The LED on the front of all RealPresence Group Series systems provides the following
information.

Indicator Light System Status

Off System is powered off.

Blinking blue light In a system health check, no errors are occurring and
tests are successful. The system continues to blink
blue and initializes after the sequence is complete if no
severe errors occur.

Blinking amber light In a system health check, at least one test has resulted
in a warning error. The system continues to blink amber
but initializes after the sequence is complete if no
severe errors occur.

Blinking red light In a system health check, at least one test has resulted
in a severe error. The system continues to blink red
and will not start up.

Steady blue light System is initializing.System is awake.

Blinking blue light System received an IR (infrared) signal.System is

receiving a call.

Steady amber light System is asleep.

Alternating blue and amber lights System is in software update mode.System is in factory
restore mode.

Fast blinking amber light System is shutting down.

Polycom, Inc. 264

Troubleshooting

Indicator Light System Status

Steady green light System is in a call.

EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights

An LED is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Producer unit. Different LED lights refer to different
system states. These allow you to identify the current system state for the EagleEye Producer system.
Detailed LED and system states mappings are shown in the following table.

LED Indicator Lights System State

LED System State

Blue Power On, EagleEye Producer Normal State

Blinking Blue On, Not in a Call, Receive IR

EagleEye Producer Boot Up

Fast Blinking Blue Calibrate Webcam Room View

Amber Standby - Asleep

Alternate Amber and Blue Software update, Factory restore, USB image update

Blinking Amber USB disk plugged in

Green On, In a call

Blinking Green On, In a call, Receive IR in a call

Fast Blinking Red System error

Blink Needs attention, Receive IR

Audio and Video Tests

You can perform the following audio and video diagnostic tests on your RealPresence Group Series
system.

Polycom, Inc. 265

Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Screen Description

Speaker Test Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz audio

tone indicates that the local audio connections are
correct.
If you run the test from the system during a call, the far
site will also hear the tone.
If you run the test from the system web interface during
a call, the people at the site you are testing will hear the
tone, but you will not.

Audio Meters Measures the strength of audio signals from

microphones, far-site audio, and any device connected
to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is
enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a
SoundStructure digital mixer is connected to the room
system.

Camera Tracking Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director.

Audio
Verifies microphone functionality. To use this feature,
speak aloud and verify that you can see dynamic signal
indications for two vertical microphones and five
horizontal microphones. If no signal indication appears
for a specific microphone, manually power off the
EagleEye Director and then power it back on.
Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a video
call. Let the far side speak aloud and verify that you
can see dynamic signal indications for the two
reference audio meters. If no signal indication appears
for a specific microphone, make sure the reference
cable is connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the
camera again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left
camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the right
camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test
screen.
Note: If the EagleEye Director is connected but is not
selected as the current camera source, this choice is
not visible on the screen.

Polycom, Inc. 266

Troubleshooting

Related Links
Audio Meters on page 267

Audio Meters
Audio meters indicate the strength of the audio input and output of your microphones, far-site audio, and
any device connected to the audio ports. To avoid or fix audio distortion, you can configure the Audio
Meter setting in the local or web RealPresence Group Series system interface. The meters allow you to
identify the left and right audio channels on the system.
Related Links
Audio and Video Tests on page 265
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface on page 268

Set Audio Meter Levels

You can set audio meter levels for your RealPresence Group Series system so that normal and loud
audio peaks are within an acceptable audio range.

Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video Tests > Audio Meter.
• In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Audio Meter.
2. To test the audio, do one of the following:
• To check the microphones for the near-site, speak into the microphones.
• To check far-site audio, ask a participant at the far site to speak, or call a phone in the far-
site room to hear it ring.
3. For normal speech and program material, set the audio signal levels so that you see peaks
between +3 dB and +7 dB.
Occasional peaks of +12 dB to +16 dB with loud transient noises are acceptable. If you see +20
on the audio meter, the audio signal is 0 dBFS and the audio might be distorted. A meter reading
of +20dB corresponds to 0dBFS in the room system audio. A signal at this level is likely clipping
the audio system.

System Diagnostics
To assist in troubleshooting, you can view RealPresence Group Series system diagnostics in either the
system web interface or the local interface.

Access Diagnostic Screens in the Web Interface

You can access RealPresence Group Series system diagnostics in the system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.
2. For details, click More Info.

Polycom, Inc. 267

Troubleshooting

Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface

You can access RealPresence Group Series system diagnostics in the local interface.

Procedure
» In the system local interface, select Settings > System Information > Diagnostics.
This screen includes the following system diagnostic details:

Diagnostic Screen Description

Near End Loop Tests the internal audio encoders and decoders,
the external microphones and speakers, the
internal video encoders and decoders, audio
hardware, and the external microphones, speakers,
cameras, and monitors.
Monitor 1 displays the video and plays the audio
that would be sent to the far site in a call.
This test is not available when you are in a call.

Ping Tests whether the system can establish contact

with a far-site IP address that you specify.
PING returns abbreviated Internet Control Message
Protocol results. It returns H.323 information only if
the far site is configured for H.323. It returns SIP
information only if the far site is configured for SIP.
If the test is successful, the system displays a
message.

Trace Route Tests the routing path between the local system
and the IP address entered.
If the test is successful, the system lists the hops
between the system and the IP address you
entered.

Color Bars Tests the color settings of your monitor for optimum
picture quality.
If the color bars generated during the test are not
clear, or the colors do not look correct, the monitor
needs to be adjusted.

Speaker Test Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz audio

tone indicates that the local audio connections are
correct.
If you run the test from the system during a call, the
far site will also hear the tone.

Polycom, Inc. 268

Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Screen Description

Audio Meter Measures the strength of audio signals from the

microphone or microphones, far-site audio, and any
device connected to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is
enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a
SoundStructure digital mixer is connected to the
system.

Camera Tracking Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye

Director, if this camera is connected to the system.
Audio
• Verifies microphone functionality. To
use this feature, speak aloud and verify
that you can see dynamic signal
indications for two vertical microphones
and five horizontal microphones. If no
signal indication appears for a specific
microphone, manually power off the
EagleEye Director and then power it
back on.
• Also verifies the reference audio signal:
Set up a video call. Let the far side
speak aloud and verify that you can see
dynamic signal indications for the two
reference audio meters. If no signal
indication appears for a specific
microphone, make sure the reference
cable is connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate
the camera again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left
camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the
right camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test
screen.

Polycom, Inc. 269

Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Screen Description

Sessions Displays the following information about each

session connected to the system:
• Type of connection, such as web or
local interface
• ID associated with the session, typically
Admin or User
• Remote IP address (the addresses of
people logged in to the system from
their computers)

Reset System Note: Do not use this setting unless your

administrator tells you to do so.
If a password is set, you must enter it to reset the
system.
Returns the system to its default settings. When
you select this setting using the remote control, you
can do the following:
• Keep your system settings (such as
system name and network
configuration) or restore system
settings.
• Keep or delete the directory stored on
the system. System reset does not
affect the global directory.
• Keep or delete all PKI certificates and
certificate revocation lists (CRLs).
Before you reset the system, you might ask your
administrator to download the Call Detail Report
(CDR) and CDR archive. For more information
about these reports, contact your administrator.

Related Links
Audio Meters on page 267

Viewing System Details on the Local Interface

You might need to view certain RealPresence Group Series system details on the local interface to do
video conferencing tasks, such as pairing, or to perform troubleshooting tests to provide information for
your own testing or for technical support. You can also review information about calls, network usage,
and performance on the various system screens in the local interface.
Available system menus vary based on how your administrator configured the system. Therefore, this
section might describe settings that you cannot access on your system. To find out more about these
settings, please talk to your administrator.
The System Information screen has the following choices:
• Information

Polycom, Inc. 270

Troubleshooting

• Status
• Diagnostics
• Call Statistics (in a call only)

Access the Information Screen

You can access RealPresence Group Series system status screen in the local interface.

Procedure
» Go to > System Information > Information to view the following system details.

Diagnostic Screen Description

System Detail Displays the following system information:

• System Name
• Model
• Hardware Version
• System Software
• Serial Number
• MAC Address
• IP Address

Network Displays the following network information:

• IP Address
• Host Name
• 323 Name
• 323 Extension (E.164)
• SIP Address
• Link-Local
• Site-Local
• Global Address

Usage Displays the following usage information:

• Time in Last Call
• Total Time in Calls
• Total Number of Calls
• System Up Time

Access the Status Screen

You can access RealPresence Group Series system status screen in the local interface.

Polycom, Inc. 271

Troubleshooting

Procedure
» Go to > System Information > Status.
When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings
button on the menu. This screen includes the following system status details for the out of a call
status:

Status Screen Description

Active Alerts Displays the status of any device or service listed

within the Status screens that has a current status
indicator of red. Alerts are listed in the order they
occurred. When a system device or service
encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the
Settings button on the menu.

Call Control Displays the status of the Auto-Answer Point-to-

Point Video and Meeting Password settings.

Audio Displays the connection status of audio devices

such as the microphones and SoundStation IP.

EagleEye Director Displays the connection status of the EagleEye

Director, if one is connected. If the camera system
is not connected, this choice is not visible on the
screen.

VisualBoard Displays the connection status of the VisualBoard,

if one is connected. If VisualBoard is not
connected, this choice is not visible on the screen.

LAN Displays the connection status of the IP Network.

Servers • Always displays the Gatekeeper and

SIP Registrar Server.
• Displays the active Global Directory
Server, LDAP Server, or Microsoft
Server.
• If enabled, displays the Provisioning
Service, Calendaring Service, or
Presence Service.

Log Management Displays the status of the Log Threshold setting.

You can download system logs, call detail reports,
and configuration profiles using the system web
interface.

When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings button on
the menu. This screen includes the following system status details for in a call status:
• If the RealPresence Group Series system detects an EagleEye Director, a status line for the device
is displayed.
• When a change occurs in the system status or a potential problem exists, you see an alert next to
the System button on the menu.

Polycom, Inc. 272

Troubleshooting

Status Screen Description

Call Statistics Displays information about the call in progress. In

multipoint calls, the Call Statistics screens show
most of this information for all systems in the call.

Related Links
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote Control on page 273

View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote
Control
You might need to view call statistics on the RealPresence Group Series system local interface to do
some troubleshooting for users. You can only view call statistics during a call. During a point-to-point call,
you can view call statistics about a call participant or about an active stream. As a shortcut during a call,
press the Back button on your remote control for two or more seconds to display the Call Statistics
screen.

Procedure
» Go to System Information > Call Statistics.
Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and select More
Information.
Related Links
Access the Status Screen on page 271

View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote
Control
During a RealPresence Group Series system multipoint call, you can view call statistics about any of the
call participants or about an active stream.

Procedure
1. Go to > System Information > Call Statistics.
A list of participants in the call displays.
2. Do one of the following:
• To view a participant's details, select Participants, navigate to the desired participant, and
select More Information. The participants' active streams are displayed beneath the
participant information.
• To quickly access information about a particular stream or streams associated with a
particular user, navigate to Streams for calls using Advanced Video Coding (AVC) or
Participant Streams for calls using Scalable Video Coding (SVC). Use the Back and Next
Participant buttons to navigate to the participant with the stream or streams you want to
view. Navigate to the desired stream and select More Information.
• To quickly access a list of all active audio, video, and content streams within the call,
navigate to Active Streams (available in SVC calls only). Select the desired stream, and
select More Information.

Polycom, Inc. 273

Troubleshooting

View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom

Touch Control
During a point-to-point call, you can view call statistics about a call participant or about an active stream.

Procedure
1. Touch Participants.
Participant information displays.
2. Touch View Call Statistics.
Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and touch . From an
individual stream view you can touch Next Stream to view the next stream in the list.

View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom

Touch Control
During a multipoint call, you can view call statistics about any of the call participants or about an active
stream.

Procedure
1. Touch Participants. A list of participants in the call displays.
2. Touch View Call Statistics and do one of the following:
• To view a participant's details, navigate to the desired participant, and touch .
• The participants' active streams are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and touch "I".
• From an individual stream view you can select Next Stream to view the next stream in the
stream list. To quickly access a list of all active audio, video, and content streams within the
call, navigate to Active Streams. This setting is available in SVC calls only. Select the
desired stream and touch "I".

Provisioning Service Registration Failure

If automatic provisioning is enabled but the RealPresence Group Series system does not register
successfully with the provisioning service, you might need to change the Domain, User Name, Password,
or Server Address used for registration. For example, users might be required to periodically reset
passwords used to log into the network from a computer. If such a network password is also used as the
provisioning service password, you must also update it on the system. To avoid unintentionally locking a
user out of network access in this case, systems do not automatically retry registration until you update
the settings and register manually on the Provisioning Service screen.

Call Detail Report (CDR)

When enabled by going to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Recent Calls in
the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, the Call Detail Report (CDR) provides the room
system's call history. Within 5 minutes after ending a call, the CDR is written to memory and then you can
download the data in CSV format for sorting and formatting.

Polycom, Inc. 274

Troubleshooting

Every call is added to the CDR, whether it is made or received. If a call does not connect, the report
shows the reason. In multipoint calls, each far site is shown as a separate call, but all have the same
conference number.
The size of a CDR can become unmanageable if you don't download the record periodically. If you
consider that 150 calls result in a CDR of approximately 50 KB, you can set up a schedule to download
and save the CDR after every 120 calls to keep the file easy to download and view. Remember that your
connection speed also affects how fast the CDR downloads. The CDR database is limited to the 150
most recent entries. If you are concerned about tracking all CDR records, ensure that you download the
records at regular intervals so that the limit is not exceeded and records are not lost.

Note: The RealPresence Resource Manager system captures CDR information for the
EagleEye Producer and the EagleEye Director II cameras and generates it to the
RealPresence Resource Manager system CDR. The call details include People Minutes
and People Count (Call Begin) at the beginning of a call and People Count (Peak
Value) at the end of a call.

Data Description

Row ID Each call is logged on the first available row. A call is a

connection to a single site, so there might be more than
one call in a conference.

Start Date The call start date, in the format dd-mm-yyyy.

Start Time The call start time, in 24-hour format hh:mm:ss.

End Date The call end date.

End Time The call end time.

Call Duration The length of the call.

Account Number If Require Account Number to Dial is enabled on the

system, the value entered by the user is displayed in
this field.

Remote System Name The far site's system name.

Call Number 1 The number dialed from the first call field, not
necessarily the transport address.
For incoming calls — The caller ID information from the
first number received from a far site.

Call Number 2 For outgoing calls — The number dialed from the
second call field, not necessarily the transport address.
(If applicable for call)
For incoming calls — The caller ID information from the
second number received from a far site.

Transport Type The type of call — Either H.323 (IP) or SIP.

Call Rate The bandwidth negotiated with the far site.

Polycom, Inc. 275

Troubleshooting

Data Description

System Manufacturer The name of the system manufacturer, model, and

software version, if they can be determined.

Call Direction In—For calls received.

Out—For calls placed from the system.

Conference ID A number given to each conference. A conference can

include more than one far site, so there might be more
than one row with the same conference ID.

Call ID Identifies individual calls within the same conference.

Total H.320 Channels Used Number of narrow-band channels used in the call.

Endpoint Alias The alias of the far site.

Reserved Polycom use only.

View Name Names the web or local interface used in the call.

User ID Lists the ID of the user who made the call.

Endpoint Transport Address The actual address of the far site (not necessarily the
address dialed).

Audio Protocol (Tx) The audio protocol transmitted to the far site, such as
G.728 or G.722.1.

Audio Protocol (Rx) The audio protocol received from the far site, such as
G.728 or G.722.

Video Protocol (Tx) The video protocol transmitted to the far site, such as
H.263 or H.264.

Video Protocol (Rx) The video protocol received from the far site, such as
H.261 or H.263.

Video Format (Tx) The video format transmitted to the far site, such as
CIF or SIF.

Video Format (Rx) The video format received from the far site, such as
CIF or SIF.

Disconnect Local ID and Disconnect Reason The identity of the user who initiated the call and the
reason the call was disconnected.

Q.850 Cause Code The Q.850 cause code showing how the call ended.

Total H.320 Errors The number of H.320 errors experienced during the
call.

Polycom, Inc. 276

Troubleshooting

Data Description

Average Percent of Packet Loss (Tx) The combined average of the percentage of both audio
and video packets transmitted that were lost during the
5 seconds preceding the moment at which a sample
was taken. This value does not report a cumulative
average for the entire call. However, it does report an
average of the sampled values.

Average Percent of Packet Loss (Rx) The combined average of the percentage of both audio
and video packets received that were lost during the 5
seconds preceding the moment at which a sample was
taken. This value does not report a cumulative average
for the entire call. However, it does report an average
of the sampled values.

Average Packets Lost (Tx) The number of packets transmitted that were lost
during a call.

Average Packets Lost (Rx) The number of packets from the far site that were lost
during a call.

Average Latency (Tx) The average latency of packets transmitted during a

call based on round-trip delay, calculated from sample
tests done once per minute.

Average Latency (Rx) The average latency of packets received during a call
based on round-trip delay, calculated from sample tests
done once per minute.

Maximum Latency (Tx) The maximum latency for packets transmitted during a
call based on round-trip delay, calculated from sample
tests done once per minute.

Maximum Latency (Rx) The maximum latency for packets received during a
call based on round-trip delay, calculated from sample
tests done once per minute.

Average Jitter (Tx) The average jitter of packets transmitted during a call,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.

Average Jitter (Rx) The average jitter of packets received during a call,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.

Maximum Jitter (Tx) The maximum jitter of packets transmitted during a call,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.

Maximum Jitter (Rx) The maximum jitter of packets received during a call,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.

Call Priority The AS-SIP call precedence level assigned to the call
(populated only when AS-SIP is enabled on the
system).

Polycom, Inc. 277

Troubleshooting

Related Links
Participant Count CDR Details on page 167

Download a Call Detail Report (CDR)

You can download a CDR using the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.

Procedure
1. In the system web interface, click Utilities > Services > Call Detail Report (CDR).
2. Click Most Recent Call Report and then specify whether to open or save the file on your
computer.

Knowledge Base
For more troubleshooting information for your RealPresence Group Series system, you can search the
Knowledge Base at Polycom Support.

Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support

If you are not able to make test calls successfully and you have verified that the equipment is installed
and set up correctly, contact your Polycom distributor or Polycom Technical Support at Polycom Support.
Enter the following information about your RealPresence Group Series system, then ask a question or
describe the problem. This information helps us to respond faster to your issue. In addition, please
provide any diagnostic tests or troubleshooting steps that you have already tried.

Locate the System Serial Number

You can view the system serial number on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
» To locate the system serial number (14 digits), go to Settings > System Information >
Information > System Detail or locate the number on the back of the system.

Locate the Software Version

You can view the software version on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
» To locate the software version, go to Settings > System Information > Information > System
Detail.

Locate Active Alert Messages

You can view the active alert messages on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.

Polycom, Inc. 278

Troubleshooting

Procedure
» To locate the active alert messages, go to Settings > System Information > Status > Active
Alerts for messages generated by your system.

Locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension Settings

You can view IP Address and H.323 extension settings on the local interface of the RealPresence Group
Series system.

Procedure
» To locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension settings, go to Settings > System Information >
Information > Network.

Locate the LAN Status

You can view the LAN status on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Settings > System Information >Status > LAN.

Locate Diagnostics
You can view diagnostics on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.

Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics.

Contacting Technical Support

If you are not able to make test calls successfully on your RealPresence Group Series system and you
have verified that the equipment is installed and set up correctly, contact your Polycom distributor or
Polycom Technical Support.
To contact Polycom Technical Support, go to Polycom Support.
Enter the following information, then ask a question or describe the problem. This information helps us to
respond faster to your issue:
• The 14-digit serial number from the System Detail screen or the back of the system
• The software version from the System Detail screen
• Any active alerts generated by the system
• Information about your network
• Troubleshooting steps you have already tried
You can find the system detail information in the local interface by going to Settings > System
Information > Information or in the system web interface by clicking System in the blue bar at the top of
the system web interface screen.

Polycom, Inc. 279

Troubleshooting

Polycom Solution Support

Polycom Implementation and Maintenance services provide support for Polycom solution components,
such as RealPresence Group Series systems, only. Additional services for supported third-party Unified
Communications (UC) environments integrated with Polycom solutions are available from Polycom Global
Services, and its certified Partners, to help customers successfully design, deploy, optimize, and manage
Polycom visual communication within their third-party UC environments. UC Professional Services for
Microsoft Integration is mandatory for Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook, Skype for Business
Server 2015 integrations. For additional information and details please refer to http://www.polycom.com/
services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom representative.

Polycom, Inc. 280

System Panel Views
Topics:

• Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System

• Polycom RealPresence Group 310 System
• Polycom RealPresence 500 System
• Polycom RealPresence Group 700 System

The following provides information on the RealPresence Group Series system back panel views.
Related Links
Set Up Third-party Microphones on page 24
Setting Up a Microphone on page 23
Available Microphone Inputs by System on page 24
SoundStructure Digital Mixer on page 25

Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System

The following figure and table shows how the system web interface settings relate to hardware input and
outputs on the back of the RealPresence Group 300 system.

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

1 Audio/Video > Video Input HDCI Input for the camera

Video Inputs > Input
1

2 N/A Microphone Input Polycom Audio input for up to

Microphone two Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer

Polycom, Inc. 281

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

3 Audio/Video > Audio Output 3.5mm Stereo Audio output for

Audio > Audio main monitor audio
Output or external speaker
system
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site +

4 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 • HDMI Output for Monitor 1

Monitors > Monitor version 1.3
1 with
embedded
audio
• DVI-D

5 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 • HDMI Output for Monitor 2

Monitors > Monitor version 1.3 (available only with
2 a monitor option
• DVI-D
key)

6 N/A USB Connectors USB 2.0 USB for Software

Update, remote
control battery
charging

7 General Settings > Serial Port RS-232 Serial port

Serial Ports

8 Network > LAN LAN Port Ethernet Connectivity for IP

Properties and SIP calls,
People+Content IP,
and the system web
interface

9 N/A Power Input 12 V 6.25 A Power input

Polycom RealPresence Group 310 System

The following figure and table shows how the system web interface settings relate to hardware input and
outputs on the back of the RealPresence Group 310 system.

Polycom, Inc. 282

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

1 Audio/Video > Video Input 1 HDCI Input for Camera 1

Video Inputs > Input
1

2 Audio/Video > Video Input 2/Audio HDMI version 1.3 Auxiliary video and
Video Inputs > Input Input 1 audio input
2
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio Input
> Type: HDMI

3 Audio/Video > Video Input 2 VGA Video input for

Video Inputs > Input Content
2

Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA video input, but not both.

4 Audio/Video > Audio Input 2 3.5mm Stereo Stereo line-level

Audio > Audio Input input
> Type: 3.5mm
3.5mm audio is
independent and
not associated with
any video input

5 N/A Microphone Input Polycom Audio input for up to

Microphone two Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer

Polycom, Inc. 283

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

6 Audio/Video > Audio Output 1 3.5mm Stereo Audio output for

Audio > Audio main monitor audio
Output or external speaker
system
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2

7 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 • HDMI Output for Monitor 1

Monitors > Monitor version 1.3
When format is
1 with
HDMI, audio output
embedded
for main monitor
audio
audio
• DVI-D
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2

8 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 • HDMI Output for Monitor

Monitors > Monitor version 1.3 2; does not include
2 audio
• DVI-D
NOTE:
RealPresence
Group 310 systems
require a dual
monitor option key
to allow dual
monitor output.

9 N/A USB Connectors USB 2.0 USB for software

update, remote
control battery
charging

Polycom, Inc. 284

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

10 General Settings > Serial Port RS-232 Serial port

Serial Ports

11 Network > LAN LAN Port Ethernet Connectivity for IP

Properties calls, People
+Content IP, and
the system web
interface

12 N/A Power Input 12 V 6.25 A Power input

Polycom RealPresence 500 System

The following figure and table shows how the system web interface settings relate to hardware input and
outputs on the back of the RealPresence Group 500 system.

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

1 Audio/Video > Video Input 1 HDCI Input for Camera 1

Video Inputs > Input
1

2 Audio/Video > Video Input 2/Audio HDMI version 1.3 Auxiliary video and
Video Inputs > Input Input 1 audio input
2
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio Input
> Type: HDMI

3 Audio/Video > Video Input 2 VGA Video input for

Video Inputs > Input Content
2

Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA video input, but not both.

Polycom, Inc. 285

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

4 Audio/Video > Audio Input 2 3.5mm Stereo Stereo line-level

Audio > Audio Input input
> Type: 3.5mm
3.5mm audio is
independent and
not associated with
any video input

5 N/A Microphone Input Polycom Audio input for up to

Microphone four Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer

6 Audio/Video > Audio Output 1 3.5mm Stereo Audio output for

Audio > Audio main monitor audio
Output or external speaker
system
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2

7 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 • HDMI Output for Monitor 1

Monitors > Monitor version 1.3
When format is
1 with
HDMI, audio output
embedded
for main monitor
audio
audio
• DVI-D
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2

Polycom, Inc. 286

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

8 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 HDMI version 1.3 Output for Monitor
Monitors > Monitor 2; does not include
DVI-D
2 audio

9 N/A USB Connectors USB 2.0 USB for software

update, remote
control battery
charging

10 General Settings > Serial Port RS-232 Serial port

Serial Ports

11 Network > LAN LAN Port Ethernet Connectivity for IP

Properties calls, People
+Content IP, and
the system web
interface

12 N/A Power Input 12 V 6.25 A Power input

Polycom RealPresence Group 700 System

This topic shows how the system web interface settings relate to hardware input and outputs on the back
of the RealPresence Group 700 system.

Polycom, Inc. 287

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

1 N/A Power Input 100-240 VAC 2.3 A Power input

2 Audio/Video > Video Input 1 HDCI Input for Camera 1

Video Inputs > Input
1

3 Audio/Video > Video Input 1 HDMI version 1.4 Input for Camera 1
Video Inputs > Input
1

4 Audio/Video > Video Input 2 HDCI Input for Camera 2

Video Inputs > Input
2

5 Audio/Video > Video Input 2 HDMI version 1.4 Input for Camera 2
Video Inputs > Input
2

Note: Use either the HDCI or HDMI for video inputs 1 and 2, but not both.

6 Audio/Video > Video Input 3 VGA Video input

Video Inputs > Input associated with
3 audio input 3

7 Audio/Video > Audio Input 3 3.5mm Stereo Audio input for

Audio > Audio Input stereo line-level
> Type: 3.5mm
Audio is included in
local audio mix
when video source
is selected
3.5mm audio is
independent and
not associated with
any video input

8 Audio/Video > Video Input 3 HDMI version 1.4 Video and audio
Video Inputs > Input input
3

Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA for video input 3, but not both.

9 Audio/Video > Video Input 4 Composite Video Video input

Video Inputs > Input
Associated with
4
audio input 4 (audio
is disabled until
video input 4 is
selected)

Polycom, Inc. 288

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

10 Audio/Video > Video Input 4 Component Video Video input

Video Inputs > Input associated with
4 audio input 4 (audio
is disabled until
video input 4 is
selected)

11 Audio/Video > Audio Input 4 RCA Associated with

Audio > Audio Input video input 4
> Type: Component
Inactive until video
input is selected
Audio is included in
local audio mix
when video source
is selected

Note: Use either the Composite/RCA or Component for input 4, but not both.

12 Audio/Video > Audio Input 2 RCA Auxiliary audio input

Audio > Audio Input
Intended as
> Type: Line
microphone input;
sent to far end only

13 N/A Audio Input 1 Polycom Audio input for up to

Microphone four Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer

14 N/A Audio Output 2 RCA Audio output for

main monitor audio
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio input
from audio inputs 3
and 4 when
associated video is
selected

15 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 VGA Output for Monitor 1

Monitors > Monitor
1

Polycom, Inc. 289

System Panel Views

Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description

16 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 HDMI version 1.3 Output for Monitor 1
Monitors > Monitor
Audio Output 1 Audio Mix Routed to
1
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio input
from audio inputs 3
and 4 when
associated video is
selected

17 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 VGA Output for Monitor 2

Monitors > Monitor
2

18 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 HDMI version 1.3 Output for Monitor 2
Monitors > Monitor
2

19 Audio/Video > Video Output 3 VGA Output for Monitor 3

Monitors > Monitor
3

20 Audio/Video > Video Output 3 HDMI version 1.3 Video and audio
Monitors > Monitor output for Monitor 3.
Audio Output 3
3 Audio output (near-
end + far-end +
content) when set
for recording

Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA for video outputs 1, 2, and 3, but not both.

21 General Settings > Serial Port RS-232 Serial port

Serial Ports

22 N/A USB Connectors USB 3.0 USB for Software

Update, remote
control battery
charging

23 Network > LAN PC LAN Port Ethernet Ethernet switch port

Properties > LAN
Options

24 Network > LAN LAN Port Ethernet Connectivity for IP

Properties calls, People
+Content IP, and
the system web
interface

Polycom, Inc. 290

Port Usage
Topics:

• Connections to Systems
• Connections from Systems

The following topics on port usage are useful when you configure your network equipment for video
conferencing.

Connections to Systems
The following table shows IP port usage to RealPresence Group Series systems.

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Inbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

22 Static TCP Secure API Yes Admin No

Settings >
Security>
Global
Security >
Access
Enable SSH
Access:
Enable to
open port 22

22 Static TCP Polycom Yes Admin No

Touch Settings >
Control over General
SSH Settings >
Pairing >
Polycom
Touch
Device>
Enable
Polycom
Touch
Device

Polycom, Inc. 291

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Inbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

23 Static TCP Telnet No Admin No

Diagnostics Settings >
Security >
Global
Security >
Access >
Enable
Telnet
Access

24 Static TCP Polycom API No Admin No

Settings >
Security >
Global
Security >
Access >
Enable
Telnet
Access

80 Static TCP Web UI over Yes Admin Admin

HTTP Settings > Settings >
Security > Security >
RealPresenc
Global Global
e Touch over
Security > Security >
HTTP
Access > Access >
Enable Web Web Access
Access Port (http)
- Disables
HTTP and
HTTPS port
Admin
Settings >
Security >
Global
Security >
Access >
Restrict to
HTTPS
- Disables
HTTP port

Polycom, Inc. 292

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Inbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

161 Static UDP SNMP No Admin Admin

Settings > Settings >
Security > Servers >
Global SNMP >
Security > Listening
Access > Port
Enable
SNMP
Access
Admin
Settings >
Servers >
SNMP >
Enable
SNMP

443 Static TLS Web UI over Yes Admin No

HTTPS Settings >
Security >
RealPresenc
Global
e Touch over
Security >
HTTPS
Access >
Enable Web
Access

1719 Static UDP H.225.0 RAS No Admin No

Settings >
Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Use
Gatekeeper

1720 Static TCP H.225.0 Call Yes Admin No

Signaling Settings >
Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Enable
IP H.323

Polycom, Inc. 293

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Inbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

5001 Static TCP People Yes Admin No

+Content™ IP Settings >
client Audio / Video
application > Video Input
for content > General
sharing. Camera
Used by Settings >
systems and Enable
the People
RealPresenc +Content IP
e Touch
device

5060 Static TCP SIP (Protocol Yes Admin No

depends on Settings >
UDP
Transport Network > IP
Protocol Network >
setting) SIP > Enable
SIP
Admin
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP >
Transport
Protocol

5061 Static TLS SIP Yes Admin No

Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP > Enable
SIP
Admin
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP >
Transport
Protocol

Polycom, Inc. 294

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Inbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

49152- Dynamic TCP H.245 Yes Admin Admin

65535 Settings > Settings >
Network > IP Network > IP
Network > H. Network >
323 > Enable Firewall >
IP H.323 Fixed Ports >
TCP Ports
(1024-65535)

16384- Dynamic UDP RTP/RTCP Yes Admin Admin

32764(Defaul Video and Settings > Settings >
t) Audio Network > IP Network > IP
Network > H. Network >
323 > Enable Firewall >
IP H.323 Fixed Ports >
UDP Ports
Admin
(1024-65535)
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP > Enable
SIP

Connections from Systems

The following table shows IP port usage from RealPresence Group Series systems.

Polycom, Inc. 295

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

80 Static TCP Polycom Yes Uncheck No

Product "Register"
Registration checkbox
for during the
RealPresenc setup wizard
e Group
Series
system
software
installation
and for the
RealPresenc
e Touch
device

123 Static UDP NTP Yes Admin No

Settings >
General
Settings >
Date and
Time >
System Time
> Time
Server

162 Static UDP SNMP TRAP No Admin Yes - Admin

Settings > Settings >
Servers > Servers >
SNMP > SNMP >
Enable Destination
SNMP Address
<1,2,3> >
Admin
Port
Settings >
Servers >
SNMP >
Destination
Address
<1,2,3>

Polycom, Inc. 296

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

389 Static TLS LDAP No Admin Yes

Settings >
- Admin
Servers >
Settings >
Directory
Servers >
Servers >
Directory
Server Type
Servers >
Server Type
= LDAP
- Admin
Settings >
Servers >
Directory
Servers >
Server Port

389 Static TLS LDAP to ADS No Admin No

(External Settings >
Authenticatio Security >
n) Global
Security >
Authenticatio
n > Enable
Active
Directory
External
Authenticatio
n

443 Static TLS RealPresenc No Admin No

e Resource Settings >
Management Servers >
(Provisioning, Provisioning
Monitoring, Service >
Softupdate) Enable
Provisioning

443 Static TLS Microsoft No Admin No

Exchange Settings >
Server Servers >
(Calendaring) Calendaring
Service >
Enable
Calendaring
Service

Polycom, Inc. 297

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

443 Static TLS Microsoft No Admin No

Skype Settings >
Address Servers >
Book Directory
Servers >
Server Type

514 Static UDP SYSLOG No Diagnostics > Yes -

System > outgoing port
System Log can be
Settings > specified in
Enable the Remote
Remote Log Server
Logging Address
field.
Diagnostics >
System >
System Log
Settings >
Remote Log
Server
Transport
Protocol =
UDP

601 Static TCP SYSLOG No Diagnostics > Yes -

System > outgoing port
System Log can be
Settings > specified in
Enable the Remote
Remote Log Server
Logging Address
field.
Diagnostics >
System >
System Log
Settings >
Remote Log
Server
Transport
Protocol =
TCP

Polycom, Inc. 298

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

1718 Static UDP H.225.0 No Admin No

Gatekeeper Settings >
Discovery Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Use
Gatekeeper =
Auto

1719 Static UDP H.225.0 RAS No Admin Yes -

Settings > outgoing port
Network > IP can be
Network > H. specified in
323 > Use the Primary
Gatekeeper Gatekeeper
IP Address
field

1720 Static TCP H.225.0 Call Yes Admin No

Signaling Settings >
Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Enable
IP H.323

3601 Static TCP GDS No Admin No

Settings >
Servers >
Directory
Servers >
Server Type

Polycom, Inc. 299

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

5060 Static UDP TCP SIP Yes Admin Yes -

Settings > outgoing port
Network > IP can be
Network > specified in
SIP > Enable the dial string
SIP (user@domai
n:port)
AND
Note that the
Admin
transport
Setting >
protocol used
Network > IP
depends on
Network >
Admin
SIP >
Settings >
Transport
Network > IP
Protocol =
Network >
Auto, TCP, or
SIP >
UDP
Transport
Protocol

5061 Static TLS SIP Yes Admin Yes -

Settings > outgoing port
Network > IP can be
Network > specified in
SIP > Enable the dial string
SIP (user@domai
n:port)
AND
Admin
Setting >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP >
Transport
Protocol =
Auto or TLS

5222 Static TCP RealPresenc No Provisioned No

e Resource by
Manager: RealPresenc
XMPP e Resource
Manager

Polycom, Inc. 300

Port Usage

Configuration

On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number

6514 Static TLS SYSLOG No Diagnostics > Yes -

System > outgoing port
System Log can be
Settings > specified in
Enable the Remote
Remote Log Server
Logging Address
field
Diagnostics >
System >
System Log
Settings >
Remote Log
Server
Transport
Protocol =
TLS

49152- Dynamic TCP H.245 Yes Admin Admin

65535 Settings > Settings >
Network > IP Network > IP
Network > Network >
Enable IP H. Firewall >
323 Fixed Ports >
TCP Ports
(1024-65535)

16384- Dynamic UDP RTP/RTCP Yes Admin Admin

32764 Video and Settings > Settings >
(Default) Audio Network > IP Network > IP
Network > Network >
Enable IP H. Firewall >
323 Fixed Ports >
UDP Ports
Admin
(1024-65535)
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
Enable SIP

Polycom, Inc. 301

Security Profile Default Settings
Topics:

• Maximum Security Profile Default Settings

• High Security Profile Default Settings
• Medium Security Profile Default Settings
▪ Low Security Profile Default Settings

The system security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your system. Default settings for
each security profile type vary. See the following topics for details.
Related Links
Configure Security Profiles on page 75

Maximum Security Profile Default Settings

System security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your RealPresence Group Series
system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Maximum
security profile.

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Place a Call

Contacts Search Box No value Yes

Speed Dial

Edit Search Box No value Yes

Manual Dial

Entry box No value Yes

VideoAudio Video Yes

Auto, 128, 256, 384, Auto Yes

512, 768, 1024, 1472,
1920, 2048, 3072,
3840, 4096, 6144

Auto, H.323, SIP Auto Yes

General Settings

System Settings

Polycom, Inc. 302

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Call Settings

Auto Answer Point Yes, No, Do Not No Yes

to Point Video Disturb

Auto Answer Yes, No, Do Not No Yes

Multipoint Video Disturb

Recent Calls

Call Detail Report Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable Recent Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calls

Home Screen Settings

Speed Dial Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendar Checkbox Disabled Yes

Background Choose image file No file selected Yes

Startup Choose image file No file selected Yes

Background

Kiosk Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Home Screen Checkbox Disabled Yes

Icons

Address Bar None None Yes, for both the left

and right elements
IP Address
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code

RealPresence Choose image file No file selected Yes

Touch Background

Skype Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Pairing

Polycom, Inc. 303

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Polycom Touch Checkbox Disabled Yes

Device
Note: Disabling this
setting closes the SSH
port.

SmartPairing Disabled Disabled Read-only

Serial Ports

Mode

RS- Note: Off Off Yes

232 Some
Control
Mod systems
e support Camera Control
only a
Closed Caption
subset of
listed Pass Thru
modes.

Login Mode Range: None, Admin Admin password Yes

password only, only
Username/Password

Login prompt type None, Admin password Username/ Yes

only, Username/ Password
Password

Network

IP Network

Enable SIP Checkbox Enabled Yes

Transport Protocol Auto, TLS, TCP, UDP TLS Yes

Dialing Preference

Dialing Options

Scalable Video SVC then AVC SVC then AVC Yes

Coding Preference
AVC Only
(H.264)

Enable H.239 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Enable Audio-Only Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calls

Polycom, Inc. 304

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

TIP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Call Type Order Video Video Yes

Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFERE
NCE_SIP_SPEAKERP
HONE (only displays if
Polycom SoundStation
IP 7000 is connected)

Video Dialing IP, H.323, SIP IP H.323 Yes

Order

Audio Dialing IP, H.323, SIP SIP Yes

Order Preference
1 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only
Calls checkbox is
selected)

Audio Dialing IP, H.323, SIP H.323 Yes

Order Preference
2 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only
Calls checkbox is
selected)

Audio/Video

Sleep

Enable Mic Mute in Checkbox Enabled Read-only

Sleep Mode

Video Inputs

General Camera Settings

Allow Other Checkbox Disabled Yes

Participant
s In a Call
to Control
Your
Camera

Polycom, Inc. 305

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

People
+Content
IP

Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

Camera
Preset
Snapshot
Icons

Audio

Polycom Checkbox Disabled Yes

StereoSurround

Security

Global Security

Security Profile

Security Maximum Maximum Yes

Profile
High
Medium
Low

Authentication

Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

Active
Directory
External
Authenticat
ion

Access

Enable Checkbox Enabled Yes

Network
Intrusion
Detection
System
(NIDS)

Enable Checkbox Enabled Yes

Web
Access

Polycom, Inc. 306

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Allow Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access to
User
Settings

Restrict to Checkbox Enabled Read-only

HTTPS

Web 16-bit integer Grayed out (80) Read-only

access port
(http)
Note: You
cannot
select this
setting if
the
Restrict to
HTTPS
setting is
enabled.

Enable Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Telnet
Access

Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

SNMP
Access

API
Port

Enable Checkbox Enabled Yes

SSH
Access

Lock Port Off, 2-10 Off Yes

after Failed
Logins

Port Lock 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Duration minutes,
1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset Port Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Lock
Counter
After

Polycom, Inc. 307

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

Whitelist

Idle 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 10 Yes

Session 45, 60, 120, 240, 480
Timeout in
Minutes

Maximum 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 25 Yes

Number of 40, 45, 50
Active
Sessions

Encryption

Require Off Required for Video Yes

AES Calls Only
When Available
Encryption
for Calls Required for Video
Calls Only
Required for All Calls

Require Checkbox Enabled Yes

FIPS 140
Cryptograp
hy

Local Accounts

Account Lockout

Lock 2-10 3 Yes

Admin
Account
After Failed
Logins

Admin 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Account
Lock
Duration

Reset Off, [1..24] hours 1 Yes

Admin
Account
Lock
Counter
After

Polycom, Inc. 308

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Lock User 2-10 3 Yes

Account
After Failed
Logins

User 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Account minutes,
Lock
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Duration

Reset User Off, [1..24] hours 1 Yes

Account
Lock
Counter
After

Login Credentials

Use Room Checkbox Enabled Read-only

Password
for Remote
Access

Require Checkbox Enabled Yes

User Login
for System
Access

Password Requirements

Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)

Reject 8-16 10 Yes

Previous
Passwords

Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password
Age in
Days

Maximum 30, 60, 90, 100, 110, 60 Yes

Password 120, 130, 140, 150,
Age in 160, 170, 180
Days

Minimum 1-4 4 Yes

Changed
Characters

Polycom, Inc. 309

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Password 1-7 7 Yes

Expiration
Warning

Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)

Minimum 8-16, 32 15 Yes

Length

Require Off, 1, 2, All 2 Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All 2 Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All 2 Yes

Numbers

Require Off, 1, 2, All 2 Yes

Special
Characters

Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters

Can Checkbox Disabled Read-only

contain ID
or Its
Reverse
Form

User (Room), Admin (Room)

Minimum 8-16, 32 9 Yes

Length

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Off,1,2,All Off Yes

Numbers

Polycom, Inc. 310

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Special
Characters

Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters

Can Checkbox Disabled Read-only

contain ID
or Its
Reverse
Form

Meeting

Minimum Off, 1-20, 32 Off Yes

Length

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Numbers

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Special
Characters

Reject 8-16 10 Yes

Previous
Passwords

Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password
Age in
Days

Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters

Polycom, Inc. 311

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.

Minimum 8-16, 32 12 Yes

Length

Require Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Numbers

Require Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Special
Characters

Reject 8-16 10 Yes

Previous
Passwords

Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password
Age in
Days

Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters

Can Checkbox Disabled Read-only

contain ID
or Its
Reverse
Form

Security Banner

Enable Security Checkbox Enabled Yes

Banner

Banner Text DoDCustom DoD Yes

Local System Unicode characters, DoD Banner Text Yes

Banner Text 2048 bytes max

Polycom, Inc. 312

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Remote System Unicode characters, DoD Banner Text Yes

Banner Text 2048 bytes max

Certificates

Certificate Options

Always Checkbox Enabled Yes

Validate
Peer
Certificates
from
Browser

Always Checkbox Enabled Yes

Validate
Peer
Certificates
from
Server

Revocation

Revocation OCSPCRL OCSP Yes

Method

Allow Checkbox Enabled Yes

Incomplete
Revocation
Checks

Servers

Directory Servers

Server Type Off Off Yes

Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS

Registration Status N/A Disabled Read only

SNMP

Version1 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version2c Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version3 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Polycom, Inc. 313

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Maximum

Range Default Value Configurable?

Provisioning Service Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendaring Service

Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendaring
Service

Recording Service

Enable Recording Checkbox Disabled Yes

Service

Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address

Maximum

Default Configura
Diagnostics Area Range Value ble?

System

System Log Settings

Enable Remote Logging Checkbox Disabled Yes

Remote Log Server Transport Protocol UDP TLS Read only

TCP
TLS

Changing Maximum Security Profile Default Values

When you configure the system to use the Maximum Security Profile, the system forces you to change
the following settings from their default values:
• Admin account User Id
• User account User Id
• Admin room password
• Admin remote access password
• User room password
• User remote access password

Polycom, Inc. 314

Security Profile Default Settings

Other Restrictions When Using the Maximum Security Profile

The following settings are not available in the “User Settings” menu (they are configurable only in their
respective sections of the Admin Settings):
• Camera > Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera
• Meetings > Mute Auto Answer Calls
• Meetings > Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
• Meetings > Auto Answer Multipoint Video
• Meetings > Allow Video Display on Web
Configure Security Profiles

High Security Profile Default Settings

System security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your RealPresence Group Series
system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the High security
profile.

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Place a Call

Contacts Search Box No value Yes

Speed Dial

Edit Search Box No value Yes

Manual Dial

Entry box No value Yes

Video Video Yes

Audio

Auto, 128, 256, 384, 512, Auto Yes

768, 1024, 1472, 1920,
2048, 3072, 3840, 4096,
6144

Auto Auto Yes

H.323
SIP

General Settings

System Settings

Polycom, Inc. 315

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Call Settings

Auto Answer Point to Yes No Yes

Point Video
No
Do Not Disturb

Auto Answer Multipoint Yes No Yes

Video
No
Do Not Disturb

Recent Calls

Call Detail Report Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable Recent Calls Checkbox Disabled Yes

Home Screen Settings

Speed Dial Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendar Checkbox Disabled Yes

Background Choose image file No file selected Yes

Startup Background Choose image file No file selected Yes

Kiosk Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Home Screen Icons Checkbox Disabled Yes

Address Bar None None Yes, for both

the left and
IP Address
right elements
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code

RealPresence Touch Choose image file No file selected Yes

Background

Skype Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Pairing

Polycom, Inc. 316

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Polycom Touch Checkbox Disabled Yes

Device
Note: Disabling this setting
closes the SSH port.

SmartPairing Mode Disabled Disabled Yes

Automatic
Manual

Serial Ports

Mode

RS-232 Mode Off Off Yes

Note: Some Control
systems support
Camera Control
only a subset of
listed modes. Closed Caption
Pass Thru

Login Mode None, Admin password Admin password Yes

only, Username/Password only

Network

IP Network

Enable SIP Checkbox Enabled Yes

Transport Protocol Auto TLS Yes

TLS
TCP
UDP

Dialing Preference

Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC AVC Only Yes

Preference (H.264)
AVC Only

Dialing Options

Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC SVC then AVC Yes
Preference (H.264)
AVC Only

Enable H.239 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Polycom, Inc. 317

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Audio-Only Calls Checkbox Disabled Yes

TIP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Call Type Order Video Video Yes

Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFERENC
E_SIP_SPEAKERPHONE
(only displays if Polycom
SoundStation IP 7000 is
connected)

Video Dialing Order IP IP H.323 Yes

H.323
SIP

Audio Dialing Order IP SIP Yes

Preference 1 (only
H.323
displays if Enable Audio-
Only Calls checkbox is SIP
selected)

Audio Dialing Order IP H.323 Yes

Preference 2 (only
H.323
displays if Enable Audio-
Only Calls checkbox is SIP
selected)

Audio/Video

Sleep

Enable Mic Mute in Checkbox Disabled Yes

Sleep Mode

Video Inputs

General Camera Settings

Allow Other Checkbox Disabled Yes

Participants In a
Call to Control
Your Camera

Enable People Checkbox Disabled Yes

+Content IP

Polycom, Inc. 318

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Camera Checkbox Disabled Yes

Preset Snapshot
Icons

Audio

Polycom Checkbox Disabled Yes

StereoSurround

Security

Global Security

Security Profile

Security Profile Maximum High Yes

High
Medium
Low

Authentication

Enable Active Checkbox Disabled Yes

Directory External
Authentication

Access

Enable Network Checkbox Enabled Yes

Intrusion
Detection System
(NIDS)

Enable Web Checkbox Enabled Yes

Access

Allow Access to Checkbox Disabled Yes

User Settings

Restrict to Checkbox Enabled Read-only

HTTPS

Web access port 16-bit integer Grayed out (80) Read-only

(http)
Note: You cannot
select this setting
if the Restrict to
HTTPS setting is
enabled.

Polycom, Inc. 319

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Enable Telnet Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Access

Enable SSH Checkbox Enabled Yes

Access

Enable SNMP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access

Lock Port after Off, 2-10 Off Yes

Failed Logins

Port Lock 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Duration minutes,
1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset Port Lock Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Counter After

Enable Whitelist Checkbox Disabled Yes

Idle Session 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 10 Yes

Timeout in 60, 120, 240, 480
Minutes

Maximum 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 25 Yes

Number of Active 45, 50
Sessions

Encryption

Require AES Off Required for Yes

Encryption for Video Calls Only
When Available
Calls
Required for Video Calls
Only
Required for All Video
Calls

Require FIPS 140 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Cryptography

Local Accounts

Account Lockout

Lock Admin Off 3 Yes

Account After
2-10
Failed Logins

Polycom, Inc. 320

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Admin Account 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Lock Duration

Reset Admin Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Account Lock
Counter After
Failed Logins

Lock User 2-10 3 Yes

Account After
Failed Logins

User Account 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Lock Duration minutes
1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset User Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Account Lock
Counter After
Failed Logins

Login Credentials

Use Room Checkbox Enabled Yes

Password for
Remote Access

Require User Checkbox Enabled Yes

Login for System
Access

Password Requirements

Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)

Reject Previous Off, 1-16 10 Yes

Passwords

Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password Age in
Days

Maximum Off, 30, 60, 90, 100, 110, 90 Yes

Password Age in 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
Days 170, 180

Minimum 1-4 4 Yes

Changed
Characters

Polycom, Inc. 321

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Password 1-7 4 Yes

Expiration
Warning

Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)

Minimum Length 1-16, 32 6 Yes

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Numbers Off,1,2,All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Its Reverse Form

User (Room), Admin (Room)

Minimum Length 8-16, 32 6 Yes

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off,1,2,All Off Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Polycom, Inc. 322

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Its Reverse Form

Meeting

Minimum Length Off, 1-20, 32 Off Yes

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Reject Previous Off, 1-16 10 Yes

Passwords

Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password Age in
Days

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.

Minimum Length 8-16, 32 8 Yes

Require Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Require Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Uppercase
Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Characters

Polycom, Inc. 323

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Reject Previous Off, 1-16 5 Yes

Passwords

Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password Age in
Days

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Its Reverse Form

Certificates

Certificate Options

Always Validate Checkbox Enabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Browser

Always Validate Checkbox Enabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Server

Revocation

Revocation OCSPCRL OCSP Yes

Method

Allow Incomplete Checkbox Enabled Yes

Revocation
Checks

Security Banner

Enable Security Banner Checkbox Disabled Yes

Banner Text DoDCustom Custom Yes

Local System Banner Unicode characters, 2048 Null (no text) Yes
Text bytes max

Remote System Banner Unicode characters, 2048 Null (no text) Yes
Text bytes max

Servers

Directory Servers

Polycom, Inc. 324

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area High

Range Default Value Configurable?

Server Type Off Off Yes

Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS

Registration Status N/A Disabled Read only

SNMP

Version1 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version2c Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version3 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Provisioning Service Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendaring Service

Enable Calendaring Checkbox Disabled Yes

Service

Recording Service

Enable Recording Checkbox DIsabled Yes

Service

Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address

High

Diagnostics Area Range Default Value Configurable?

System

System Log Settings

Enable Remote Logging Checkbox Disabled Yes

Remote Log Server Transport UDP UDP Yes

Protocol
TCP
TLS

Polycom, Inc. 325

Security Profile Default Settings

Changing High Security Profile Default Values

When you configure the system to use the High Security Profile, the system forces you to change the
following settings from their default values:
• Admin account room password
• User account room password
• Admin account remote access password
Configure Security Profiles

Medium Security Profile Default Settings

System security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your RealPresence Group Series
system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Medium
security profile.

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Place a Call

Contacts Search Box No value Yes

Speed Dial

Edit Search Box No value Yes

Manual Dial

Entry box No value Yes

VideoAudio Video Yes

Auto, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, Auto Yes

1472, 1920, 2048, 3072, 3840, 4096,
6144

Auto Auto Yes

H.323
SIP

General Settings

System Settings

Call Settings

Polycom, Inc. 326

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Auto Answer Point to Yes No Yes

Point Video
No
Do Not Disturb

Auto Answer Multipoint Yes No Yes

Video
No
Do Not Disturb

Recent Calls

Call Detail Report Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable Recent Calls Checkbox Enabled Yes

Home Screen Settings

Speed Dial Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendar Checkbox Disabled Yes

Background Choose image file No file Yes

selected

Startup Background Choose image file No file Yes

selected

Kiosk Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Home Screen Icons Checkbox Disabled Yes

Address Bar None None Yes, for both the

left and right
IP Address
elements
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code

RealPresence Touch Choose image file No file Yes

Background selected

Skype Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Pairing

Polycom, Inc. 327

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Enable Polycom Touch Checkbox Disabled Yes

Device
Note: Disabling this setting
closes the SSH port.

SmartPairing Mode Disabled Disabled Yes

Automatic
Manual

Serial Ports

Mode

RS-232 Mode Off Off Yes

Note: Some Control
systems support
Camera Control
only a subset of
listed modes. Closed Caption
Pass Thru

Login Mode Range: None, Admin password only, Admin Yes

Username/Password password
only

Network

IP Network

Enable SIP Checkbox Enabled Yes

Transport Protocol Auto, TLS, TCP, UDP TLS Yes

Dialing Preference

Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC SVC then Yes

Preference (H.264) AVC
AVC Only

Dialing Options

Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC SVC then Yes

Preference (H.264) AVC
AVC Only

Enable H.239 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Enable Audio-Only Calls Checkbox Disabled Yes

Polycom, Inc. 328

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

TIP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Call Type Order Video Video Yes

Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFERENCE_SIP_SPEA
KERPHONE (only displays if Polycom
SoundStation IP 7000 is connected)

Video Dialing Order IP IP H.323 Yes

H.323
SIP

Audio Dialing Order IP SIP Yes

Preference 1 (only
H.323
displays if Enable Audio-
Only Calls checkbox is SIP
selected)

Audio Dialing Order IP H.323 Yes

Preference 2 (only
H.323
displays if Enable Audio-
Only Calls checkbox is SIP
selected)

Audio/Video

Video Inputs

Sleep

Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Checkbox Disabled Yes

Mode

General Camera Settings

Allow Other Checkbox Disabled Yes

Participants In a
Call to Control Your
Camera

Enable People Checkbox Enabled Yes

+Content IP

Enable Camera Checkbox Enabled Yes

Preset Snapshot
Icons

Polycom, Inc. 329

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Audio

Polycom StereoSurround Checkbox Disabled Yes

Security

Global Security

Security Profile

Security Profile Maximum Medium Yes

High
Medium
Low

Authentication

Enable Active Checkbox Disabled Yes

Directory External
Authentication

Access

Enable Network Checkbox Enabled Yes

Intrusion Detection
System (NIDS)

Enable Web Access Checkbox Enabled Yes

Allow Access to Checkbox Disabled Yes

User Settings

Restrict to HTTPS Checkbox Enabled Yes

Web access port 16-bit integer Grayed out Read only

(http) (80)
Note: You cannot
select this setting if
the Restrict to
HTTPS setting is
enabled.

Enable Telnet Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access

Enable SSH Access Checkbox Enabled Yes

Polycom, Inc. 330

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Enable SNMP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access

Lock Port after Off, 2-10 Off Yes

Failed Logins

Port Lock Duration 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 minutes, 1 minute Yes

1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset Port Lock Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Counter After

Enable Whitelist Checkbox Disabled Yes

Idle Session 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60, 120, 240, 10,15,20,25, Yes
Timeout in Minutes 480 30,35,40,45,
50

Maximum Number 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 25 Yes
of Active Sessions

Encryption

Require AES Off When Yes

Encryption for Calls Available
When Available
Required for Video Calls Only
Required for All Video Calls

Require FIPS 140 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Cryptography

Local Accounts

Account Lockout

Lock Admin Off, 2-10 3 Yes

Account After Failed
Logins

Admin Account 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Lock Duration

Reset Admin Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Account Lock
Counter After

Lock User Account Off, 2-10 3 Yes

After Failed Logins

Polycom, Inc. 331

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

User Account Lock 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 minutes 1 minute Yes

Duration
1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset User Account Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Lock Counter After

Login Credentials

Use Room Checkbox Disabled Yes

Password for
Remote Access

Require User Login Checkbox Disabled Yes

for System Access

Password Requirements

Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)

Reject Previous Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Passwords

Minimum Password Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Age in Days

Maximum Password Off, 30, 60, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, Off Yes
Age in Days 140, 150, 160, 170, 180

Minimum Changed Off, 1-4, All Off Yes

Characters

Password Off, 1-7 Off Yes

Expiration Warning

Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)

Minimum Length 1-16, 32 3 Yes

Require Lowercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Uppercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Polycom, Inc. 332

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Yes

Its Reverse Form

User (Room), Admin (Room)

Minimum Length 8-16, 32 8 Yes

Require Lowercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Uppercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Yes

Its Reverse Form

Meeting

Minimum Length Off, 1-20, 32 Off Yes

Require Lowercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Uppercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Reject Previous Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Passwords

Polycom, Inc. 333

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Minimum Password Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Age in Days

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.

Minimum Length 8-16, 32 3 Yes

Require Lowercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Uppercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Reject Previous Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Passwords

Minimum Password Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Age in Days

Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Yes

Its Reverse Form

Certificates

Certificate Options

Always Validate Checkbox Disabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Browser

Always Validate Checkbox Disabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Server

Polycom, Inc. 334

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Revocation

Revocation Method OCSPCRL OCSP Yes

Allow Incomplete Checkbox Enabled Yes

Revocation Checks

Security Banner

Enable Security Banner Checkbox Disabled Yes

Banner Text DoDCustom Custom Yes

Local System Banner Text Unicode characters, 2048 bytes max Null (no text) Yes

Remote System Banner Unicode characters, 2048 bytes max Null (no text) Yes
Text

Servers

Directory Servers

Server Type Off Off Yes

Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS

Registration Status N/A Disabled Read only

SNMP

Version1 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version2c Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version3 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Calendaring Service

Enable Calendaring Checkbox Disabled Yes

Service

Recording Service

Polycom, Inc. 335

Security Profile Default Settings

Admin Settings Area Medium

Range Default Configurable?

Value

Enable Recording Service Checkbox DIsabled Yes

Recording Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address

Medium

Diagnostics Area Range Default Value Configurable?

System

System Log Settings

Enable Remote Logging Checkbox Disabled Yes

Remote Log Server Transport UDP UDP Read only

Protocol
TCP
TLS

Changing Medium Security Profile Default Values

When you configure the system to use the Medium Security Profile, it forces you to change the following
settings from their default values:
• Admin account room password
• User account room password
Related Links
Configure Security Profiles on page 75

Polycom, Inc. 336

Security Profile Default Settings

Low Security Profile Default Settings

System security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your RealPresence Group Series
system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Low security
profile.

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Place a Call

Contacts Search box No value Yes

Speed Dial Search box No value Yes

Recent Calls

Manual Dial Entry box No value Yes

Video
Video
Audio

Auto, 128, 256, 384,

512, 768, 1024, 1472,
Auto
1920, 2048, 3072,
3840, 4096, 6144

Auto
H.323 Auto
SIP

Admin Settings > General Settings > My

Information

Contact Information Entry boxes No value Yes

Location

Admin Settings > General Settings >

System Settings

System Name

System Name Entry box No value

Call Settings

Polycom, Inc. 337

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Off, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3

hours, 4 hours, 5
hours, 6 hours, 7
Maximum Time in Call hours, 8 hours, 9 8 hours Yes
hours, 10 hours, 11
hours, 12 hours, 24
hours, 48 hours

Yes

Auto Answer Point to Point Video No No Yes

Do Not Disturb

Yes

Auto Answer Multipoint Video No No Yes

Do Not Disturb

Auto, Full Screen,

Mulitpoint Mode Discussion, Discussion Yes
Presentation

Display Icons in a Call Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification Checkbox Disabled Yes

Keypad

Preferred 'Place a Call' Navigation Contacts Keypad Yes

Recent Calls

Automatic Self View Control Checkbox Enabled Yes

Recent Calls

Call Detail Report Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable Recent Calls Checkbox Enabled Yes

Maximum Number to Display 25, 50, 75, 100 100 Yes

Admin Settings > General Settings >

Home Screen Settings

Speed Dial Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendar Checkbox Disabled

Background Choose Image File No file selected

Polycom, Inc. 338

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Startup Background Choose Image File No file selected

Kiosk Mode Checkbox Disabled

Home Screen Icons Checkbox Disabled

None
IP Address

Address Bar SIP Address None Yes

H.323 Extension
Pairing Code

Image file not

RealPresence Touch Background Choose image file Yes
selected

Skype Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

Pairing > Enable Polycom Touch Device

Note: Disabling this setting closes the SSH

Checkbox Disabled Yes
port.

Disabled

SmartPairing Mode Automatic Disabled Yes

Manual

RS-232 Mode
Note: Some
Serial Ports > Mode RealPresence Group
Series systems support
only a subset of listed
modes.

Off
Control
Camera Control Off Yes
Closed Caption
Pass Thru

Polycom, Inc. 339

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

None
Admin Admin Password
Login Mode Yes
Password only Only

Username/Password

Network > IP Network

Enable SIP Checkbox Enabled Yes

Auto
TLS
Transport Protocol TLS Yes
TCP
UDP

Dialing Preference

SVC then AVC

Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) SVC then AVC Yes
AVC Only

Dialing Options

SVC then AVC

Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) SVC then AVC Yes
AVC Only

Enable H.239 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Enable Audio-Only Calls Checkbox Disabled Yes

TIP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Call Type Order Video Video No

IP H.323
Video Dialing Order IP H.323 Yes
SIP

Auto Dialing Order Preference 1

SIP
(only displays if Enable Audio-Only Calls SIP Yes
H.323
checkbox is selected)

Auto Dialing Order Preference 2

H.323
(only displays if Enable Audio-Only Calls H.323 Yes
SIP
checkbox is selected)

Audio/Video > Video Inputs > Sleep

Polycom, Inc. 340

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

No Signal
Display No Signal Yes
Black

Off
1 minute
3 minutes
15 minutes
Time Before System Goes to Sleep 30 minutes 15 minutes Yes
60 minutes
2 hours
4 hours
8 hours

Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes

General Camera Settings

Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control

Checkbox Disabled Yes
Your Camera

Enable People+Content IP Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable Camera Preset Snapshot Icons Checkbox Enabled Yes

Audio

Polycom StereoSurround Checkbox Disabled Yes

Security > Global Security > Security

Profile

Maximum
High
Security Profile Low Yes
Medium
Low

Authentication

Enable Active Directory External

Checkbox Disabled Yes
Authentication

Access

Polycom, Inc. 341

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Enable Network Intrusion Detection System

Checkbox Enabled Yes
(NIDS)

Enable Web Access Checkbox Enabled Yes

Allow Access to User Settings Checkbox Disabled Yes

Restrict to HTTPS Checkbox Enabled Yes

Web access port (http) Note:You cannot

select this setting if the Restrict to HTTPS 16-bit integer Grayed out (80) Read only
setting is enabled.

Enable Telnet Access Checkbox Disabled Yes

Enable SSH Access Checkbox Enabled Yes

Enable SNMP Access Checkbox Disabled Yes

Lock Port after Failed Logins Off, 2-10 Off Yes

1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30
Port Lock Duration minutes 1 minute Yes
1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset Port Lock Counter After Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Enable Whitelist Checkbox Disabled Yes

1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 10,15,20,25,30,35,40

Idle Session Timeout in Minutes Yes
45, 60, 120, 240, 480 ,45,50

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35,

Maximum Number of Active Sessions 25 Yes
40, 45, 50

Encryption Yes

Off
When Available

Require AES Encryption for Calls Required for Video When Available Yes
Calls Only
Required for All Video
Calls

Require FIPS 140 Cryptography Checkbox Enabled Yes

Local Accounts > Account Lockout Yes

Polycom, Inc. 342

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Lock Admin Account After Failed Logins Off, 2-10 3 Yes

Admin Account Lock Duration 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Reset Admin Account Lock Counter After Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Lock User Account After Failed Logins Off, 2-10 3 Yes

1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30
User Account Lock Duration minutes 1 minute Yes
1, 2, 4, 8 hours

Reset User Account Lock Counter After Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Login Credentials Yes

Use Room Password for Remote Access Checkbox Disabled Yes

Require User Login for System Access Checkbox Disabled Yes

Password Requirements

Admin

Minimum Length Off, 1-32 Off Yes

Require Lowercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Uppercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Special Characters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Reject Previous Passwords Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Minimum Password Age in Days Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

30, 60, 90, 100, 110,

120, 130, 140, 150,
Maximum Password Age in Days Off Yes
160, 170, 180, 190,
200

Minimum Changed Characters Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, all Off Yes

Maximum Consecutive Repeated

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters

Password Expiration Warning Off, 1-7 Off Yes

Polycom, Inc. 343

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Selected Yes

User Room

Minimum Length Off, 1-32 Off Yes

Require Lowercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Uppercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Special Characters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Reject Previous Passwords Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Minimum Password Age in Days Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

30, 60, 90, 100, 110,

120, 130, 140, 150,
Maximum Password Age in Days Off Yes
160, 170, 180, 190,
200

Minimum Changed Characters Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, all Off Yes

Maximum Consecutive Repeated

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters

Password Expiration Warning Off, 1-7 Off Yes

Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Selected Yes

Meeting

Minimum Length Off, 1-32 Off Yes

Require Lowercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Uppercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Special Characters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Reject Previous Passwords Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Minimum Password Age in Days Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Maximum Password Age in Days none Off Yes

Minimum Changed Characters none Off Yes

Polycom, Inc. 344

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Maximum Consecutive Repeated

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters

Password Expiration Warning none Off Yes

Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Selected Yes

Remote Access

Minimum Length Off, 1-32 Off Yes

Require Lowercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Uppercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Special Characters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Reject Previous Passwords Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Minimum Password Age in Days Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

30, 60, 90, 100, 110,

120, 130, 140, 150,
Maximum Password Age in Days Off Yes
160, 170, 180, 190,
200

Minimum Changed Characters Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, all Off Yes

Maximum Consecutive Repeated

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters

Password Expiration Warning Off, 1-7 Off Yes

Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Selected Yes

SNMP

Minimum Length Off, 1-32 Off Yes

Require Lowercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Uppercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Require Special Characters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes

Reject Previous Passwords Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Polycom, Inc. 345

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Minimum Password Age in Days Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Maximum Password Age in Days none Off Yes

Minimum Changed Characters none Off Yes

Maximum Consecutive Repeated

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters

Password Expiration Warning none Off Yes

Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Not Selected Yes

Certificates > Certificate Options

Always Validate Peer Certificates from

Checkbox Disabled Yes
Browser

Always Validate Peer Certificates from

Checkbox Disabled Yes
Server

Revocation

Revocation Method OCSPCRL OCSP Yes

Allow Incomplete Revocation Checks Checkbox Enabled Yes

Security Banner

Enable Security Banner Checkbox Disabled Yes

Banner Text DodCustom Custom Yes

Unicode characters,
Local System Banner Text Null (no text) Yes
2048 bytes max

Unicode characters,
Remote System Banner Text Null (no text) Yes
2048 bytes max

Servers > Directory Servers

Off
Microsoft
Server Type Off Yes
LDAP
Polycom GDS

Registration Status N/A Disabled Read only

SNMP

Polycom, Inc. 346

Security Profile Default Settings

Low
Admin Setting
Range Default Configurable?

Version 1 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version 2c Checkbox Disabled Yes

Version 3 Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calendaring Service

Enable Calendaring Service Checkbox Disabled Yes

Recording Service

Enable RealPresence Recording Suite Checkbox Disabled Yes

Registration Status Checkbox Status text Read Only

Domain Name
User Name
Enabled Yes
Password
Server Address

Diagnostics > System > System Log

Settings

Enable Remote Logging Checkbox Disabled Yes

UDP

Remote Log Server Transport Protocol TCP UDP Read only

TLS

Polycom, Inc. 347

Call Speeds and Resolutions
Topics:

• Point-to-Point Call Speeds

• Multipoint Call Speeds
• High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions
• Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video
• Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video

See the following topics to learn about maximum call speeds and resolutions for different call types.

Point-to-Point Call Speeds

The following table shows the maximum allowable H.323/SIP point-to-point call speeds for each type of
RealPresence Group Series system:

System Maximum Call Speed

RealPresence Group 300 3072 kbps

RealPresence Group 310 3072 kbps

RealPresence Group 500 6144 kbps

RealPresence Group 700 6144 kbps

Multipoint Call Speeds

The following table shows the maximum allowable H.323/SIP call speeds for the number of sites in a call.
Maximum speeds can be further limited by the communications equipment. Multipoint option keys are
required for some of the capabilities shown in the table. RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems do
not support multipoint calling.

Max Speed for Each Site

Max Speed for Each Site (CCCP Skype for
(ICE Enabled, Skype for Business 2015 with A/V
Number of Sites in Call Max Speed for Each Site Business 2015 MCU)

3 3072 kbps 1024 kbps 664 kbps

4 2048 kbps 512 kbps 664 kbps

5 1536 kbps 384 kbps 664 kbps

Polycom, Inc. 348

Call Speeds and Resolutions

Max Speed for Each Site

Max Speed for Each Site (CCCP Skype for
(ICE Enabled, Skype for Business 2015 with A/V
Number of Sites in Call Max Speed for Each Site Business 2015 MCU)

6 1152 kbps 256 kbps 664 kbps

7 (RealPresence Group 1024 kbps 128 kbps 664 kbps

700 only)

8 (RealPresence Group 832 kbps 128 kbps 664 kbps

700 only)

These values do not apply when the Microsoft Skype Interoperability option is enabled, whether it is in a
Skype for Business 2015 environment. When this option key is enabled, all calls are CCCP calls and are
capped at 1920 kbps due to ICE restrictions.
The values in the Max Speed for Each Site (ICE Enabled, Skype for Business 2015) column are
applicable only when both of the following criteria are met:
• The Skype Interoperability option key is disabled, so that calls are negotiated with H.263 using
Skype for Business 2015 clients.
• The ICE calls go across the firewall boundary.

High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions

This section includes the H.264 high-profile resolutions and frame rates sent in calls between two
RealPresence Group Series systems. Resolutions and frame rates are based on both the call speed and
the Optimized for setting of your Camera input.
Due to the complexities of the systems and their capabilities, it is not possible to include tables of the
resolutions and frame rates for calls between a system and a different type of endpoint or a multipoint
resource. The systems attempt to provide the highest resolutions and the best frame rates in all types of
calls.
The values for sharpness and motion are the same from 2 MB to 6 MB for systems that support higher
call speeds. The difference between NTSC and PAL cameras is how frame rates are calculated:
• NTSC 60 fps equals PAL 50 fps
• NTSC 30 fps equals PAL 25 fps
The following table shows the resolutions for People video on systems with NTSC cameras in H.264 high-
profile calls. The actual resolutions and frame rates might vary and depend upon the call types and call
scenarios in your environment.

Polycom, Inc. 349

Call Speeds and Resolutions

Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls

Camera Source

HD (1280x720x60) HD (1920x1080x60)

Call Speed Motion/ Max Frame Max Frame

(kbps) Sharpness Resolution Rate (fps) Resolution Rate (fps)

<160 Motion 512x288 60 512x288 60

160-511 Motion 640x368 60 640x368 60

512-831 Motion 848x480 60 848x480 60

832-895 Motion 1024x576 60 720x832 60

896-1727 Motion 1280x720 60 1280x720 60

>=1728 Motion 1280x720 60 1920x1080 60

<128 Sharpness 640x368 30 640x368 30

128-511 Sharpness 1024x576 30 1024x576 30

512-1023 Sharpness 1280x720 30 1280x720 30

>=1024 Sharpness 1280x720 30 1920x1080 30

The following table shows the resolutions for People video on systems with NTSC EagleEye Acoustic
cameras in H.264 high-profile calls.

Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls for EagleEye Acoustic

Camera Source

HD (1920x1080x30)

Call Speed (kbps) Motion/Sharpness Resolution Max Frame Rate (fps)

<128 Motion/Sharpness 640x368 30

128-511 Motion/Sharpness 1024x576 30

512-1023 Motion/Sharpness 1280x720 30

>=1024 Motion/Sharpness 1920x1080 30

Polycom, Inc. 350

Call Speeds and Resolutions

Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video

Polycom supports high definition (HD) multipoint resolutions, which improve video quality in multipoint
conferences and increases maximum transmitting and receiving video resolutions. During a multipoint
video conference, if any endpoints in the conference do not support high resolution video and transmit
lower resolution video, all endpoints receive lower resolution video.
The maximum Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) transmitting and receiving resolutions are specified in the
following table. Note that changing from discussion to speaker does not alter the transmit of 960x540
from an endpoint and the receive of 1080p from the endpoints.
RealPresence Group 500 systems support one endpoint as a host system and up to 5 other endpoints in
a 6-way multipoint conference; RealPresence Group 700 systems support one endpoint as a host system
and up to 7 other endpoints in an 8-way multipoint conference.

Number of Endpoints in the Maximum Transmitting

Video Conference Resolutions Maximum Receiving Resolutions

2-4 endpoints 1080p, 30fps 960x540p, 30fps

5-8 endpoints 720p, 30fps 640x368p, 30fps

Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video

The high frame rates with high resolution apply only to point-to-point calls above 832 kbps on
RealPresence Group Series systems. In addition, you must set Optimized for value of your Camera input
to Sharpness. Low frame rates apply if your call does not meet these requirements.
For multipoint calls, the maximum resolution and frame rate for content is 720p @ 30 fps.

Resolution Encode Resolution Sharpness Motion

800 x 600 800 x 600 30 60

1024 x 768 1024 x 768 30 60

1280 x 720 1280 x 720 30 60

1280 x 768 1280 x 720 30 60

1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 30 60

1600 x 1200 1280 x 1024 30 60

1680 x 1050 1280 x 720 30 60

1920 x 1080 1920 x 1080 30 60*

*Available only when the Quality Preference setting on your system is set to Content in Admin
Settings > Network > IP Network > Network Quality.

Polycom, Inc. 351